Tieng Anh Lop 8 New

Trường THCS Tịnh Phong Năm học 2012 - 2013

PHÂN PHỐI CHƯƠNG TRÌNH THCS - MÔN TIẾNG ANH 8 - NĂM HỌC 2012 - 2013Cả năm học 37 tuần = 105 tiếtTrong đó có các tiết dành cho ôn tập, kiểm tra và sửa bài kiểm tra thường xuyên và định kỳ.Học kỳ I : 19 tuần = 53 tiếtTrong đó: Từ tuần 1 đến tuần 15: 15 tuần x 3 tiết = 45 tiết Từ tuần 16 đến tuần 19: 4 tuần x 2 tiết = 8 tiết

Units Weeks Periods Contents1. 1. Ôn tập kiểm tra

Unit 1: My friends 2. Listen and Read - LF43. Speak - LF3

2. 4. Listen - LF1 - LF25. Read - Getting Started6. Write

Unit 2: Making arrangements 3. 7. Getting Started - Listen and Read 8. Speak9. Read

4. 10. Write (không dạy phần 3 )11. Listen + L.F312. Getting Started - Listen and Read

Unit 3: At home 5. 13. Speak14. Read15. Write

6. 16. Listen + L.F217. Language Focus - 3 - 4 18. Ôn tập

7. 19. Kiểm tra 1 tiết20. Getting Started - Listen and Read

Language Focus 1 - 2Unit 4: Our Past 21. Speak - LF 4

8. 22. Listen23. Read - LF 324. Write

9. 25. Chữa bài KT 1 tiếtUnit 5: Study hard 26. Getting Started - Listen and Read

27. Speak - Listen10. 28. Read1"Language learner... words

29. Read 2 "The rest of read"30. Write

11. 31. Language Focus 1 - 3 - 4 Unit 6: The Young Pioneer Club 32. Getting Started - Listen and Read

33. Speak - Listen 12. 34. Read

35. Write36. Language Focus 1 - 2 - 3

13. 37. Ôn tập Dương Quang Minh English 8 1


38. Kiểm tra 1 tiếtUnit 7: My neighborhood 39. Getting Started - Listen and Read

14. 40. Speak - LF541. Listen 42. Read

15. 43. Write44. Language Focus 1 - 2 - 3 - 4 45. Sửa bài kiểm tra

Unit 8: Country life and city life 16. 46. Getting Started - Listen and Read 47. Speak - LF348. Listen - LF1 - LF2

17. 49. Read - LF450. Write - LF 5

18. 51. Ôn tập52. Ôn tập

19. 53. Kiểm tra bổ sung các cột điểm54. Kiểm tra Học kỳ I

Dương Quang Minh English 8 2


Week 1: Date: Monday, August 13th, 2012Period 1:Unit: REVIEW

A/ Aim: Helping students to review the Present Simple tense, the Present Progressive tense, comparision of adjectives, invitations, …

B/ Language Focus:- The Present Simple tense.- The Present Progressive tense.- Comparision of adjectives.

C/ Teaching aids: Textbooks.D/ Procedure:

Teacher’s and Students’ activities

Content

+ Presentation: 1/ The Present Simple tense:a) To “Be”:(+) S + am/ is/ are …… Eg: Mai is a student in class 8A.(-) S + am/ is/ are NOT ……… Eg: Mai is not a student in class 8A.(?) Am/ Is/ Are + S ……. ? Eg: Is Mai a student in class 8A?b) Verbs:(+) S + V(s/es) ……… Eg: Nam goes to school everyday.(-) S + do/ does NOT + infinitive …… Eg: Nam doesn’t go to school on Sunday.(?) Do/ Does + S + infinitive …… ? Eg: Does Nam go to school evreyday?

2/ The Present Progressive tense:(+) S + am/ is/ are + V-ing …… Eg: Mai is reading a book.(-) S + am/ is/ are NOT + V-ing ……… Eg: Mai is not reading a book.(?) Am/ Is/ Are + S + V-ing ……. ? Eg: Is Mai reading a book?

3/ The Simple Past :a) “to BE”:

(+) S + was/ were + ... + yesterday/ ago/ last week, … Eg: Nam was a student in class 7A last year.(-) S + was/ were + NOT + ... + yesterday/ ago/ last week,

……. .Eg: Nam wasn’t a student in class 7A last year.



+ Practice: Ask student to practice the exercises, then write into their notebooks.

(?) Was/ Were + S + ... + yesterday/ ago/ last week, …?Eg: Was Nam a student in class 7A last year?b) Verbs:(+) S + V-ed/ V-2 + ... + yesterday/ ago/ last week, … .Eg: Liz visited Tri Nguyen Aquarium last month.(-) S + DID + NOT + infinitive + ... + yesterday/ ago/ last

week, … .Eg: Liz didn’t visit Tri Nguyen Aquarium last month.(?) DID + S + infinitive + ... + yesterday/ ago/ last week,

……?Eg: Did Liz visit Tri Nguyen Aquarium last month?

4/ The Simple Past :(+) S + WILL + infinitive + ... + tomorrow/ next week, ….Eg: Nam will do his homework tomorrow.(-) S + WILL + NOT + infinitive + ... + tomorrow, next

week, ……. .Eg: Nam will not do his homework tomorrow.(?) Will + S + ... + tomorrow, next week, …?Eg: Will Nam do his homework tomorrow?

5/ Comparision of adjectives:a) Comparative of adjectives:a1) Short adjectives:S1 + be + short adj.-ER + THAN + S2 Eg: This shirt is cheaper than that one.a2) Long adjectives:S1 + be + MORE + long adj. + THAN + S2 Eg: This shirt is more beautiful than that one.b) Superlative of adjectives:b1) Short adjectives:S1 + be + THE short adj.-EST + in/ on/ of ... Eg: Nam is tallest student in our class.b2) Long adjectives:S1 + be + THE MOST + long adj. + in/ on/ of … Eg: These toys are the most expensive in the toystore.c) Irrergular adjective:

Adjective Comparative Superlativegood better the bestbad worse the worstlittle less the least

many/ much more the mostfar further

fartherthe further/ the fartther

6/ Supply the correct form of the verbs in the brackets:a. Are you doing anything this weekend?=> I (see) see a film on Sunday.b. Jane (fly) flied to Madrid last month.



c. What are you (do) doing at the moment?=> I (take) am taking an intensive English course.d. There was an interesting film on TV last night. (you,

watch) Did you watch it?e. Uncle Ho (work) worked as a teacher when he was young.

7/ Make questions for the following sentences:a. Mai Anh usually studies her lessons for two hours.=> How long does Mai Anh usually study her lessons?b. They are going to the amusement center.=> Where are they going?c. I enjoy classical music. => What kind of music do you enjoy ?

8/ Supply the correct form of the words in the brackets:a. This shirt is (cheap) cheaper than that shirt.b. Nam is (tall) tallest student in our class.c. Nga learns (hours) more hours than Hoa.d. Mai has four books, her brother has a book. She has

(books) fewer books than her brother.

E/ Homework: Ask students to do exercises into their notebooks.



Unit 1: MY FRIENDS

I/ Aim: Helping students:- To introduce people.- To respond to introductions.- To describe people.- To write about themshelves and about other people.

II/ Language focus:1. Present Simple to talk about general truths.2. (Not) adjectives + enough to – infinitive3. Attributive and predicative adjectives.

III/ Vocabulary: (to) annoy,(to) rise, (to) seem, blond (adj), curly (adj), fair (adj), generous (adj), reserved (adj), slim (adj), sociable (adj), straight (adj), volunteer (adj), a character, a joke, an ophanage,

IV/Unit Allocation:

Lesson 1 Listen and read Language Focus 4

Reading for details a conversation and further practice (not) adjective + enough to - infinitive.

Lesson 2 SpeakLanguage Focus 3

Practice in describing someone.

Lesson 3 Listen Language Focus 1-2

Listening for details to complete the dialogue.Further practice in simple present tense

Lesson 4 Read Getting started

Reading a text for details about Ba’s friends.

Lesson 5 Write Writing about oneshelf and about other people.

Week 1: Date: Monday, August 13th, 2012Period 2:

Unit 1: MY FRIENDSLesson 1: LISTEN AND READ Page: 11 LANGUAGE FOCUS 4 Page: 17

A/ Aim: Reading the dialogue for details and further practice the structure “(not) adjective + enough to – infinitive”.

B/ Objective: By the end of the lesson, students will be able to know more about Hoa, Lan and Nien, and to practice with the structure “(not) adj + enough to – infinitive. ”



Content

+ Warm up: 1/ Pelmanism:



+ Pre reading:- Bookshut.- Eliciting.- Recording.

. Check: Rub out and Remember. Give students some questions and ask them to work in pairs to answer them. Give feedback.

+ While reading: Ask students to read the dialogue between Hoa, Lan and Nien on page 10 and check their prediction. Ask students to read the dialogue again and answer the questions in exercise 2 on page 11.

+ Presentation: Set the scene to introduce for the structure “(not) + adjectives ENOUGH TO – infinitive”. Teacher is to ask students to hang the picture on the board, “How do I say and how do you answer? Complete the exchange.”

+ Practice: Ask students to practice. Give feedback. Have students work on their

meet come live thinksend thought receive metlived received came sent

2/ Vocabulary:- (to) seem [si:m] : dường như(translation)- a next-door neighbor ['nekst'dɔ: 'neibə]: người hàng xóm(explaintion: a person who lives next to your house)- (to) look like [luk laik] : trông có vẻ(translation)

3/ Pre questions:a) Is Nien Lan’s friend or Hoa’s friend ?b) How old is Nien ? c) Where does Nien live?d) Is she a beautiful girl?Answer keys:a) She is Hoa’s friend.b) She’s twelve years old. c) She lives in Hue.d) Yes, she is.

4/ Answer the questions:a) Where does Nien live? => She lives in Hue.b) Does Lan know Nien? => No, she doesn’t.c) Which sentence tells you that Hoa is older than Nien?=> The sentence is “She wasn’t old enough to be in my

class.”d) When is Nien going to visit Hoa? => At Christmas.

5/ Model sentences:a) Model sentences:- Can you (1) …… this (2) …… over there?=> No, I (3) ……… not (4) ……… (5) ……… to (6) ………

the (7) ……… over there.Answer keys:

(1) hang (2) picture (3) am (4) tall(5) enough (6) hang (7) picture

b) Form:… (not) + adjective ENOUGH TO – infinitive …

Meaning: ( chưa/ không đủ … để làm gì)… (not) TOO + adjective + TO – infinitive …

Meaning: (quá đến nổi … không thể làm)6/ Word cue drill:

a) read English books/ V/ good - Can you read English books?



own first then compare with their partners.

+ Further Practice: Ask students to do exercise 4 on page 17 in pairs. Ask students to practice the dialogue. Give feedback.

=> Yes. My English is good enough to read English books.b) drive a car/ X/ old - Can you drive a car?=> No. I’m not old enough to drive a car .c) carry this bag/ V / strong - Can you carry this bag?=> Yes. I’m strong enough to carry it.d) solve this problem/ X/ clever - Can you solve this problem?=> No. I’m not clever enough to solve this problem.

7/ Complete the dialogue:a) Hoa: Can you put the groceries in your bag? Lan: No. It is not big enough to carry everything.b) Hoa: Is Ba going to drive his father’s car? Lan: Don’t be silly! Ba is not old enough to drive a car.c) Hoa: Do you need any help? Lan: No, thanks. I’m strong enough to lift this box.d) Hoa: Why don’t you join our English Speaking Club? Lan: I don’t think my English is good enough to be a member.Answer keys: a) not big enough b) not old enough c) strong enough d) good enough

8/ Rewrite the following sentences, using the words in brackets:

1) Sophia isn't old enough to be in my class. (young) => Sophia is too young to be in my class. 2) The room wasn't large enough far so many guests. (small) => The room was too small for so many guests. 3) David isn't tall enough to reach the self. (short) => David is too short to reach the self.

E/ Homework: Ask students to write 5 sentences about themseves using the structure: “(not) + adjective + enough to - infinitive.”



Week 1: Date: Friday, August 17th, 2012Period 3:

Unit 1: MY FRIENDSLesson 2: SPEAK Page: 11 - 12 LANGUAGE FOCUS 3 Page: 17

A/ Aim: Reading a text for detaile and describing someone.B/ Objective: By the end of the lesson, students will be able to understand the text and

rivise the simple present, comparison a lot of, many.C/ Teaching aids: Textbooks poster.D/ Procedure:


Content

+ Warm up: Ask students to think of the adjectives used to describe body and hair.

+ Presentation: Show students a picture of Mary and ask them to describe her hair, her body build.

+ Practice: Ask students to practice. Give feedback. Ask students to look at 6 people on pagwe 11 - 12 to describe one person.

1/ Brainstorming:body build hair

Answer keys: - fat - straight- slim - long- tall - short- short - black/ dark- overweight - blond/ fair- slender - brown

2/ Model sentences:a) Model sentences: - She has long blond hair. - She is short and thin.b) Structure:1. S + have/ has + adjective hair.2. S + be + adjective .

3/ Word cue drill:a) he/ tall/ thin => He is tall and thin.b) she/ short/ slim => She is short and slim.c)he/ short/ fat => He is short and fat.d)she/ long/ black => She has long black hair.e) she/ curly/ blond => She has curly blond hair.



+ Further Practice: Have students work in pairs to answer the questions on page 17. Give feedback.

f) he/ straight/ brown => He has straight brown hair.

4/ Speaking:Example: S1: This person is short and thin. She has long blond hair.S2: Is this Mary?S1: Yes.

5/ Ask and answer the questions:a) How many people are there in the picture?=> There are four people in the picture.b) What does each person look like? => There is a tall, heavy-set man; there is a tall, thin woman

with short hair; there is a boy sitting on the ground, holding his head, and there is a short man standing across the street.

e) What is each person wearing?=> The man standing next to the taxi is wearing a yellow

shirt and black trousers; the woman is carrying a shoulder bag, and is wearing a green skirt and red blouse. The boy sitting on the ground and holding his head is wearing blue short and a white shirt; the man across the street is wearing blue trousersand a pink shirt.

E/ Homework: Ask students to do Language Focus 3 into their notebooks.



Week 2: Date: Tuesday, August 21st, 2012Period 4:

Unit 1: MY FRIENDSLesson 3: LISTEN Page: 12 - 13 LANGUAGE FOCUS 1 - 2 Page: 16A/ Aim: Listening for details and further practice in simple present tense. B/ Objective: By the end of the lesson, students will be able to describe someone and

complete the dialogue by listening.C/ Teaching aids: Textbooks, pictures.D/ Procedure:


Content

+Warm up: Ask students to find out the adjectives beginning with the letters that the teacher gives.

+ Pre listening:- Bookshut.- Eliciting.- Recording.

.Check: Slap the board.

Ask students to do exercise “Listen a, b, c, d.” on page 12 - 13. Give students some expressions and make sure they know their meanings. Get students to guess and to complete four dialogue on page 12 - 13, using the given

1/ Categories:T writes: a b c d g S writes: awful big clever dirty great T writes: h i j k l S writes: heavy intelligent jealous kind lovely T writes: m n o p q S writes: mean new old poor quite

2/ Vocabulary:- a planet ['plænit] : hành tinh(example: the sun, the moon, the earth …)- a Mars [ma:z] : sao Hoả(translation)- a Mercury ['mə:kjuri] : sao Thuỷ(translation)- silly ['sili] (adj): ngốc nghếch, ngớ ngẫn(translation)Annoy (v) [ə'nɔi] quấy rầy , làm phiềnSet (v) lặn (n) sự để ; set about : bắt đầu; set apart: tách raSet up : thành lập; set back : vặn chậm lại; set on : tấn công; set out : tô điểm

planet MarsMercury silly

3/ Prediction:4/ Listening:

Answer keys: a) I’d like you to meet Nice to meet you



expressions. Give feedback.

+ While listening: Let students listen to the tape twice. Get students to work in pairs to complete the dialogue and compare with their predictions.

+ Post listening: Ask students to practice speaking the dialogue. Let students work in pairs to practice the dialogues. Ask students to use the simple present and simple past tense to complete paragraph 1 on page 16. Ask students to work individually and then compare their answers with their partners. Give feedback.Ask students to practice speaking the dialogue. Let students work in pairs to practice the dialogues. Ask students to use the simple present and simple past tense to complete dialogue 2 on

b) I’d like you to meet It’s a pleasure to meet youc) come and meet d) How do you do. Tape transcript:a) Hoa: Hello, Nam. Nam: Morning, Hoa. Hoa: Nam, I’d like you to meet my cousin, Thu. Nam: Nice to meet you, Thu. Thu: Nice to meet you too, Nam.b) Khai: Miss Lien, I’d like you to meet my mother. Miss Lien: It’s a pleasure to meet you, Mrs Vi. Mrs Vi: The pleasure is all mine, Miss Lien. Miss Lien: Oh, there is the principal. Please excuse me,

Mrs Vi, but I must talk to him. Mrs Vi: Certainly.c) Ba: Bao, come and meet my grandmother. Bao: Hello, ma’am. Grandmother: Hello, young man. Ba: Bao is my classmate, grandmother. Grandmother: What was that? Ba: Classmate! Bao is my classmate. Grandmother: I see.d) Mr Lam: Isn’t that Lan’s father, my dear? Mrs Linh: I’m not sure. Go and ask him. Mr Lam: Excuse me. Are you Mr Thanh? Mr Thanh: Yes, I am. Mr Lam: I’m Lam., Nga’s father. Mr Thanh: How do you do?

5/ Complete the paragraphs:a) Hoa (0) lived (live) in Hue last year, but now she (1) lives

(live) in Ha Noi. Yesterday, Hoa’s friend Nien (2) sent (send) Hoa a letter. Nien (3) was (be) Hoa’s neighbor when Hoa lived in Hue. She (4) is (be) younger than Hoa.

b) Lan (0) is (be) Hoa’s best friend. The two girls (1) are (be) in the same class at Quang Trung School. Last year, Hoa (2) came (come) in the school for the first time. Lan (3) showed (show) her around and (4) introduced (introduce) her to many new friends.

Answer keys: a) (1) lives (2) sent (3) was (4) lived

b) (1) are (2) came (3) showed (4) introduced6/ Complete the dialogue:

Ba is helping his young cousin Tuan with some homework.Ba: What do you know about the sun, Tuan?



page 16. Ask students to work individually and then compare their answers with their partners. Give feedback.

Tuan: The sun (0) rises in the east and (1) sets in the west.Ba: Can you tell me anything about the other planets.Tuan: I know something about the Earth. It (2) goes around

the sun.Ba: Yes, and the moon (3) moves around the Earth.Tuan: Where is Mars, Ba?Ba: It (4) is near the sun.Tuan: No, it’s silly! That (5) is Mercury. Mars (6) is near

the Earth.E/ Homework: Ask students to complete paragraph 1 on page 16.Week 2: Date: Tuesday, August 21st , 2012Period 5:

Unit 1: MY FRIENDSLesson 4: READ Page: 12 - 13 GETTING STARTED Page: 16

A/ Aim: Reading for specific information.B/ Objective: By the end of the lesson, students will be able to know more about Ba’s friends.C/ Teaching aids: Textbooks.D/ Procedure:


Content

+ Warm up: Ask students to look at the four pictures on page 10 and talk about the activities they want to do after school or in their free time. Give them some questions.

+ Pre reading:- Bookshut.- Eliciting. - Recording.

1/ Chatting:a) What are these students doing?=> (play soccer/ play chess/ read books/ play volleyball)b) What time of the day do you think it is?=> (in the morning/ evening, after school)c) Do you like soccer/ rteading books … ?d) Whom do you like playing with?

2/ Vocabulary:- a character ['kæriktə] : tính nết(translation)- an orphanage ['ɔ:fənidʒ] : trại mồ côi(explanation: a place where children without parents live)- reserved [ri'zə:vd] (adj): kín đáo(translation)- sociable ['sou∫əbl] (adj): dễ gần gũi(translation)- (to) tell jokes [tel dʒouk] : nói đùaJoke (n) [dʒouk] lời nói đùa (explanation: tell a story which makes people laugh)- sense of humor [sens əv 'hju:mə] (n): hài hước



. Check: What and Where.

. Set the scene: These statements are about Ba and his friends, read them and guess. Give feedback.

+ While reading: Ask students to open their books and read the text on page 13. Let students check their predictions. Get students to do exercise 1 on page 14. Ask students to work in pairs to choose the best answers. Give feedback. Ask students to work in pairs to do exercise 2 on page 14. Let students read the text again and answer the questions.

+ Post reading: Ask all students to work in close pairs. Ask students to work in groups and talk to one another about their friends, using the adjectives they have just learnt to describe.

Outgoing (adj) ['autgouiη] = easy going (adj) ['i:zi,gouiη]

dễ chịu, cởi mở, khoan dung(translation)reserved character sociabletell jokes orphanage sense of humor

3/ True-False statements:a) Ba only has three friends – Bao, Song Khai.b) Ba and his friends have the same characters.c) Bao-Song-Khai are quite reserved in public.d) They all enjoy school and study hard.Answer keys:

a) F b) F c) F d) Ta) Ba has a lot of friends but he spends most of his time with

Bao, Song and Khai.b) They have different characters.c) Only Song and Khai are quite reserved.

4/ Multiple choice:Answer keys: a) Ba talks about three of his friends.b) Bao’s volunteer work does not affect his school work.c) Khai and Song don’t talk much in public.d) Ba’s friends sometimes get tired of his jokes.

5/ Answer the questions:a) How does Ba feel having a lot of friends?=> He feels lucky having a lot of friends.b) Who is the most sociable? => Bao is the most sociable.c) Who likes reading? => Khai likes reading.d) What is the bad thing about Ba’s jokes?=> His jokes sometimes annoy his friends..e) Where does Bao spend his free time? => Bao spends his free time doing volunteer work at a local

orphanage.f) Do you and your close friends have the same or different

characters? => (Students’ answer.)

6/ Talking:

E/ Homework: Ask students to write a paragraph (about 50 words) about one close friend.



Week 2: Date: Friday, August 24th, 2012Period 6:

Unit 1: MY FRIENDSLesson 5: WRITE Page: 15

A/ Aim: Writing about oneself and about other people.B/ Objective: By the end of the lesson, students will be able to write a paragraph about

their close friends.C/ Teaching aids: Textbooks, pictures.D/ Procedure:


Content

+Warm up : Ask students to look at the picture on page 17 quickly (for 20 seconds). Then let them keep their books closed. Give students two questions, the group which answers correctly the fastest wins the games.

+ Pre writing: Ask students to read the information about Tam then answer the questions..

+ While writing: Let students write a paragraph about Tam, using the information they have just got. They have to work individually. Ask students to compare with the paragraph in their books on page 15. Ask students to write some

1/ Kim’s game:Answer keys:a) How many people are there in the picture? => Four.b) What is each person wearing? => The woman is wearing a red shirt and a green skirt. => The man who is standing beside the car is wearing

brown trousers and a yellow shirt. => The man who is standing on the pavement is wearing a

pink shirt and blue trousers. => The boy is wearing blue shorts and a white short.

Vocabulary:Appearance (n) [ə'piərəns] sự xuất hiện, nhận dạngDescription (n) [dis'krip∫n] sự mô tảHumorous (adj) ['hju:mərəs] khiếu hài hước

2/ Answer the questions:a) Who is his name? => Le Van Tam. b) How old is he? => Fourteen.c) What does he look like?=> He is tall and thin. He has short black hair.d) What is he like?



information about one of their friends, then write a paragraph about him or her. Get students ti share with their partners and correct if possible.

+ Post writing: Ask each student to write a similar paragraph about himself or herself. Move around the class and help students, then ask some students to speak in front of the class about himself or herself.

=> He is sociable, humorous and helpful.e) Where does he live?=> He lives at 26 Tran Phu Street in Ha Noi.f) Whom does he live with? => He lives with his mother, father and an elder brother.g) Who is his friend? => Ba and Bao.

3/ Writing: “His name’s Le Van Tam and he’s fourteen years old. He lives at 26 Tran Phu Street in Ha Noi with his mother, father and his elder brother, Hung. He’s tall and thin and has short black hair. He is sociable, humorous and helpful. His best friends are Ba and Bao.”4/ Writing about your friend, using the following questions

as prompts: His/ Her is name …... and he/ she is …… years old. He/ She is …… and he/ she has …... . He/ She lives with his/ her ……. . He/ She is …… . His Her best friends …… .

E/ Homework: Ask students to write another paragraph about one of their family members.



Unit 2: MAKING ARRANGEMENTS

I/ Aim: Helping students:- To talk about intentions.- To use telephone to make and confirm arrangements.- To take a telephone message.

II/ Language focus: 1) GOING TO talks about intentions and activitives in the future. 2) Adverbs of place.III/ Vocabulary: (to) agree, (to) arrange, (to) conduct, (to) demonstrate, (to) emigrate, (to)

transmit, commercial (adj), countless (adj), mobile (adj), an assistant, deaf -mute (n), a device, a directory, an exhibition, an experiment, a fishing rod, a message, a stationary

IV/ Unit allocation:

Lesson 1 Listen and readGetting started

Reading the conversation about making and confirming arrangements.

Lesson 2 Speak GOING TO talks about intentions. Lesson 3 Listen Listening for details and practicing adverbs of place.Lesson 4 Read Reading the text for specific information about Alexander

Graham Bell.Lesson 5 Write Writing a message.Lesson 6 Language Focus Further practice in adverbs of place.

Week 3: Date: Tuesday, August 28th, 2012Period 7:

Unit 2: MAKING ARRANGEMENTSLesson 1: GETTING STARTED Page: 18 LISTEN AND READ L.F1 Page: 19

A/ Aim: Reading for details about a conversation on the phone.B/ Objective: By the end of the lesson, students will be able to use the telephone to make

and confirm arrangements.C/ Teaching aids: Textbooks, poster, pictures (on page 18).D/ Procedure:


Content

+ Warm up: 1/ Matching:



Ask students to match each object (pictures on page 18) with its name. Give the definitions of these objects on a poster and ask students to match the object with its definition.

+ Pre reading:. Set the scene: “Hoa and Nga are talking on the phone. They are talking about going to see a movie.” Ask students to guess.

+ While reading: Ask students to read the conversation between Nga and Hoa on page 19 and give them feedback.

Give students some questions and ask them to work in pairs to answer them. Get some pairs of students to ask and answer the questions. Let all students work in pairs. Ask students to match.

Answer keys 1: a) an answering machineb) a mobile phone c) a fax machined) a telephone directory e) a public telephonef) an address bookDenifitions: 1. to send fax2. to find someone’s telephone number3. to write addresses and telephone numbers4. to make a phone call in a street telephone box5. to leave and take message 6. to make phone call anywhere you like

Answer keys 2: a + 5 b + 6 c + 1 d + 2 e + 4 f + 3

2/ Open prediction:a) Who made the call?b) Who intruduced herself?c) Who invited the other to the movies?d) Who arranged a meeting place?e) Who arranged the time?f) Who agreed to the time?

Answer keys: a) Nga made the call.b) Nga intruduced herself. c) Nga invited Hoa to the movies.d) Nga arranged a meeting place. e) Hoa arranged the time. f) Nga agreed to the time.

3/ Answer the questions:a) What is Hoa’s telephone number?=> Her telephone number is 3847329.b) Which movie are they going to see? Where? => They are going to see the movie Dream City at Sao Mai

Movie Theater.c) How is Hoa going to see a movie? => Hoa is going by bike.d) Where are they going to meet? What time?=> They are going to meet outside the theater at 6:30.

4/ Matching:a. Hold on 1. Nó được chiếu ở đâu?



+ Post reading: Ask students to play the roles of two students who are talking on the phone making arangements. Students can change the information which is underlined. Let students work in pairs. Teacher moves around the class and helps the students.

. Set the scene: Ba and Bao are making arrangements to play chess. Ask students to work with their partners to complete the dialogue. Ask students to play the roles of Ba and Bao to practice the dialogue. Ask students to make the similar arrangements and practice talking with a partner.

b. Is six thirty all right?c. Where’s it on ?d. A bit far from …

2. Khá xa ….3. Sáu giờ 30 được chứ?4. (Cầm máy) chờ nhé.

Answer keys: a. + 4 b. + 3 c. + 1 d. + 2

5/ Role play:Suggested dialogue:Lan: 3854146.Mai: Can I speak to Lan, please?Lan: Yes. Lan speaking.Mai: Hello Lan. This is Mai.Lan: Hello Mai.Mai: I’m going to see a movie at 7:30 this evening. Would

you like to come?Lan: Of course. But I have to ask my Mom. Hold on …. OK.

She says I can go, Where’s it on?Mai: At Sao Mai Movie Theate.Lan: Let’s go by bicycle.Mai: OK. Let’s meet outside the theater. Lan: Is 7:00 OK?Mai: All right. See you at 7:00. Bye.Lan: Bye.

I/ Language Focus 1:Example:Nga has amovie ticket. => She’s going to see amovie.a) Quang and Nam bought new fishing rods yesterday. => They are going to go fishing.b) Trang’s mother gave her a new novel this morning and she

has no homework today.=> She is going to read the new novel.c) Van has a lot of homework in Math and she is going to

have Math at school tomorrow.=> She is going to do her homework.d) Mr Hoang likes action movies very much and there’s an

interesting action movie on TV tonight.=> He is going to watch an action movie on TV tonight.e) Hien’s friend invited her to his birthday party.=> She is going to give him a birthd at present.

E/ Homework: Ask students to write a similar dialogue on their notebooks.



Week 3: Date: Tuesday, August 28th, 2012Period 8:

Unit 2: MAKING ARRANGEMENTSLesson 2: SPEAK L.F2 Page: 20 - 21

A/ Aim: Practicing talking on the phone.B/ Objective: By the end of the lesson, students will be able to talk on the telephone

informations with GOING TO.C/ Teaching aids: Textbooks, cards.D/ Procedure:

Teachers’ and Students’ activities

Content

+ Warm up: Talk to students about using telephone.

+ Presentation: Ask students to do exercise 1 on page 20. The students have to work in pairs to put the sentences in the correct order to make a complete conversation.

Ask some questions to check students understanding and focus on the structure GOING TO.

1/ Chatting:a) Do you have a telephone at home?b) How often do you make a phone call?c) What would you say when you pick up the phone to

answer it?d) What would you say if you are the caller?

2/ Ordering the conversation:

Answer keys: 1- b: Hello. 9210752.2 - f: Hello. Can I speak to Eric, please? This is Adam. 3 - j: Hello, Adam. How are you?4 - a: I’m fine. I’m going to a pop concert at the City

Concert Center tonight. Would you like to come?5 - i: Which band is it?6 - c: It’s The Kids in Town. You like it, don’t you?7 - e: Yes. What time can we meet?8 - k: Is 7:15 OK? The concert starts at 7:45. Let’s meet

inside the center, at the cafe corner.9 - g: That’s fine. See you at 7:15. Thank you Adam.10 - h: Bye, Eric.11 - d: Bye.

3/ Structures:a) Model sentences:



+ Practice: Model two cues then ask students to repeat chorally then individually. Ask some students to practice asking and answering. Ask the whole class to work in pairs. Ask students to do exercise Language Focus 1 on page 25. They have to work with a partner and say what the people are going to do. Give an example first. Let students to work in pairs. Give feedback.

+ Production:. Set the scene: Ba and Bao are making arrangements to play chess. Ask students to work with their partners to complete the dialogue. Ask students to play the roles of Ba and Bao to practice the dialogue. Ask students to make the similar arrangements and practice talking with a partner.

+ Are they talking on the phone? => Yes.+ What are they intend to do?=> They intend to go to the pop concert.+ What time are they meeting? Where?=> They are meeting inside the concert at 7:15.+ What form of the verbs do you use to talk about

intention? => Be going to.b) Form:Subject + BE + GOING TO + infinitive

c) Use: Express an intention4/ Word cue drill:

a) see a movie/V- Are you going to see a movie? => Yes, I am.b) play soccer/ X- Are you going to play soccer? => No. I’m not.c) meet your friends/ V- Are you going to meet your friends? => Yes, I am.d) help your mother/ V- Are you going to help your mother? => Yes, I am.e) do your homework/ X- Are you going to do your homework? => No. I’m not.f) watch TV/ X- Are you going to watch TV? => No. I’m not.

5/ Further practice:

Example: Nga has amovie ticket. => She’s going to see amovie.a) Quang and Nam bought new fishing rods yesterday. => They are going to go fishing.b) Trang’s mother gave her a new novel this morning and

she has no homework today.=> She is going to read the new novel.c) Van has a lot of homework in Math and she is going to

have Math at school tomorrow.=> She is going to do her homework.d) Mr Hoang likes action movies very much and there’s an

interesting action movie on TV tonight.=> He is going to watch an action movie on TV tonight.e) Hien’s friend invited her to his birthday party.



+ Activitive 2: Model two cues then ask students to repeat chorally then individually. Ask some students to practice asking and answering. Ask the whole class to work in pairs. Ask students to do exercise Language Focus 1 on page 25. They have to work with a partner and say what the people are going to do. Give an example first. Let students to work in pairs. Give feedback.

=> She is going to give him a birthd at present.6/ Role play:

Ba: Hello. 8257012.Bao: May I speak to Ba please. This is Bao.Ba: Hello, Bao. How are you?Bao: I’m fine, thanks. And you?Ba: Great. Me, too.Bao: Can you play chess tonight? Ba: I’m sorry. I can’t play chess tonight. I’m going to do

my homework.Bao: What about tomorrow afternoon?Ba: Tomorrow afternoon is fine. Bao: I’ll meet you at the Center Chess Club . Ba: At the Center Chess Club? OK. Let meet at the front

door.Bao: Is 2:00 o’clock OK?Ba: Great. See you tomorrow afternoon at 2:00 o’clock.

II/ Language Focus 2:a) see a movie/ V- Are you going to see a movie? => Yes, I am.b) play soccer/ X- Are you going to play soccer? => No. I’m not.c) meet your friends/ V- Are you going to meet your friends? => Yes, I am.d) help your mother/ V- Are you going to help your mother? => Yes, I am.e) do your homework/ X- Are you going to do your homework? => No. I’m not.f) watch TV/ X- Are you going to watch TV? => No. I’m not.

E/ Homework: Ask students to write five things that they intend to do next week.



Week 3: Date: Friday, August 31st , 2012Period 9:

Unit 2: MAKING ARRANGEMENTSLesson 4: READ Page: 21 - 22

A/ Aim: Reading the paragraph for details about Alexander Graham Bell.B/ Objective: By the end of the lesson, students will be able to know more about

Alexander Graham Bell.C/ Teaching aids: Textbooks, poster, picture of Bell.D/ Procedure:


Content

+ Warm up: Let students answer the questions by coming to the board and write.


. Check: What and Where. Ask students to work in pairs and guess.

1/ Brainstorming:What is the telephone used for?

- to chat with friend - to communicate- to have a message - to call someone- to make arrangements- to talk the person who live far from- to get information at the airport or railway station

quickly2/ Vocabulary:

- (to) emigrate ['emigreit] : xuất cảnh(example: go to another country to live)- (to) transmit [trænz'mit] : truyền đi(translation)- (to) conduct [kən'dʌkt] : thực hiện, tiến hành(synonym: What’s the synonym of (to) carry out)- (to) demonstrate ['demənstreit] : chứng minh(translation)- a device [di'vais] : thiết bị(translation)- a deaf-mute ['def'mju:t] : người vừa câm vừa điếc(explanation: a person who is unable to hear and speak)Experiment (v/ n) [iks'periment] làm thí nghiệm ; cuộc thử nghiệmInvention (n) [in'ven∫n] sự phát minh, sáng kiếnAssistant (n) [ə'sistənt] người trợ lý, người phụ tá



Give feedback.+ While reading:

Ask students to read the text on page 21 - 22 and check their prediction. Have students correct false statements. Give feedback.

Ask students to look at the book page 22. Get students to read the events of Bell’s life and put them in the correct order. Ask students to compare with their partners.

+ Post reading: Get students to write a paragraph about Bell’s life, using the information from the text. Let students to swap their writtings and corrcet.

conduct transmit emirgatedeaf-mute demonstrate device

3/ True - False statements:a) Alexander Graham Bell was born in the USA.b) He worked with deaf-mute patients in a hospital in

Boston.c) Thomas Watson was Bell’s assistant.d) Bell and Watson introduced the telephone in 1877.e) Bell experimented with ways of transmitting speech

between deaf-mutes ever a long distance.f) Bell demonstrated his invention at a lot of exhibitions.

Answer keys: a) F b) F c) T d) F e) F f) T

a) Alexander Graham Bell was born in Edinburgh in Scatland.

b) He worked with deaf-mute patients at Boston University.d) Bell and Watson introduced the telephone in 1876.e) Bell experimented with ways of transmitting speech over

a long distance.

4/ Ordering: Alexander Graham Bella) went to live in the United Statesb) successfully demonstrated his inventionc) worked with Thomas Watsond) was born in Scotlande) went to live in Canadaf) invented the telephoneg) worked with people who could neither speak nor hear

Answerkeys: 1 - d 2 - e 3 - a 4 - g 5 - c 6 - b 7 - f

5/ Writing:Suggestion: “Alexander Graham Bell was born on March 3rd, 1847 in Scotland. He went to live in Canada and then to the USA in 1870s. He worked with deaf-mutes at Boston University and did experiments with ways of transmitting speech over a long distance. In 1876, he and his assistant – Thomas Watson introduced the telephone successfully and in 1877 the first telephone was in commercial use.”

E/ Homework: Ask students to write the paragraph (they have just written and corrected with their friends) into their notebooks.



Week 4: Date: Tuesday, September 11th, 2012Period 10:

Unit 2: MAKING ARRANGEMENTSLesson 5: WRITE Page: 23 - 24

A/ Aim: Writing a message.B/ Objective: By the end of the lesson, students will be able to write a telephone message.C/ Teaching aids: Textbooks.D/ Procedure:


Content

+Warm up: Write the words whose letters are in a random order on the board.

+Pre writing: Talk to students about talking a telephone message.

- Bookshut.- Eliciting.- Recording.

. Check: Rub out and Remember.

+While writing: Ask students to read the message and fill in the gaps in the passage on page 23. Let students work in pairs. Ask students to read message

1/ Jumble words:a) mcuestor = customer b) ayddmi = middayc) essgmea = message d) nifurretu = furnituree) rvseice = service

2/ Chatting:a) Have you ever taken telephone message? => (Yes/ No)b) When you take a message, what should be mentioned in

the message? => (Date, time, who sent, to whom, content)

3/ Vocabulary:- a customer ['kʌstəmə] : khách hàng(explanation: a person who comes to buy something at a

shop…)- a delivery [di'livəri] : sự giao hàng(translation)- a stationery ['stei∫ənri] : dụng cụ văn phòng(example: papers, pens, rulers, envelopes )- (to) pick someone up [pik 'sʌmwʌn ʌp] : đón, đón ai đó(translation)Message (n) ['mesidʒ] thư tín, tin nhắn, điện tínDelivery (adj) [di'livəri] sự phận phát, được phân phát

4/ Gap filling:Answer keys: “A customer (1) phoned the Thang Loi Delivery Service on (2) May 12 th just before midday. She wanted to (3) speak



2 on page 23 to get information and write the message. Let students write individually then share with a partner.

+Post writing: Ask students to write another message.. Set the scene: “Tom phoned Nancy, but she was out. Lisa, Nancy’s sister took a message for Nancy. Help Lisa to write a message”. Ask students to read the dialogue between Lisa and Tom then write the message. Let students work in pairs. Give feedback.

to Mr Ha but he was out. So Mr Tam (4) took a message for Mr Ha. The customer’s (5) name was Mrs Lien and she wanted to know about her furniture (6) delivery. She wanted (7) Mr Ha to call her. She said Mr Ha could reach her (8) at 8645141 after lunch”

5/ Fill the message:Answer keys:

Thanh Cong Delivery ServiceDate: June 16th Time: After middayFor: Mrs VanMessage: Mr Nam call about his stationery order. He

wanted you to call him at 8634082.Taken: Mr Toan.

6/ Write the message:Answer keys: Date: (Students answer)Time: (Students answer)For: Nancy.Message: Tom call about playing tennis this afternoon.

He will come over to pick you up at 1:30.Taken by: Lisa.

E/ Homework: Ask students to write the message on their notebooks.




Unit 2: MAKING ARRANGEMENTSLesson 6: LISTEN

LANGUAGE FOCUS 3 Page: 26

A/ Aim: Listening for details and further practice in adverbs of place.B/ Objective: By the end of the lesson, students will be able to complete a telephone by

listening and further practice in adverbs of place.C/ Taeching aids: Textbooks, posters.D/ Procedure:


Content

+ Warm up:+ Warm up:

+ Pre listening: Ask students to look at the form of the telephone message on page 21 and set the scene “a woman phoned the principal of Kingston Junior High School, but he was out.” Have students guess the message. Let students work in pairs. Give feedback.

+ While listening: Ask students to listen the dialogue, compare with their guess.

I/ Listen:1/ Telephone transformation:

2/ Prediction:KINGSTON JUNIOR HIGH SCHOOL

DATE: TIME:FOR: The PrincipalMESSAGE:TELEPHONE NUMBER:

3/ Listening:Tape transcript:Secrectary: Kingston Junior High School. Good afternoon.Woman: Good afternoon. Could I talk to the principal,

please?Secrectary: I’m afraid Mr Kelvin is out at the moment.

Would you like to leave a message?Woman: Uhm, no. But I’d like to make an appointment to

see him.Secrectary: I think he will be available on Tuesday.Woman: Tuesday’s OK. Can I see him in the morning?Secrectary: Sure you can. What time would you like to

come?Woman: Is 10:30 OK?Secrectary: I’m sorry. The principal will have a school visit

at 10:30. What about 9:45?Woman: 9:45? Let me see. Yes, it’s all right.



+ Activitive 3: Ask students to do exercise 3 on page 26.. Set the scene: “ Ba is playing hide and seek with his cousin, Mr Tuan. Use the adverbs of place to complete the speech bubbles.” Let students work in pairs then compare with another pair (at their table). Give feedback. Ask students to read out the speech bubbles.

+ Practice: Let students work in pairs then compare with another pair (at their table). Give feedback. Ask students to read out the speech bubbles.

Secrectary: What’s your name, please?Woman: My name’s Mary Nguyen.Secrectary: Is that N-G-U-Y-E-N?Woman: Yes, that’s right. Mrs Nguyen.Secrectary: And your address, please?Woman: Number 23, 51st Street. My telephone number is

64683720942.Secrectary: Thank you, Mrs Nguyen.Woman: Thank you very much. Goodbye.Secrectary: Goodbye.Answer keys:

KINGSTON JUNIOR HIGH SCHOOLDATE: (Students answer)TIME: (Students answer)FOR: The PrincipalMESSAGE: Mrs Mary Nguyen wanted to see you at 9:45 in

the morning.TELEPHONE NUMBER: 64683720942.

III/ Language Focus 3:1/ Jumble words:

a) tdeousi = outside b) siiden = insidec) hetre = there d) erhe = heree) stupairs = upstairs f) wonstairds = downstairs

5/ Complete the speech bubbles:Answer keys: a) Where is Tuan? => I think he is upstairs.b) No, he isn’t here.c) He isn’t downstairs and he isn’t upstairs.d) Perhaps he’s outside.e) No, he isn’t there.f) I’m not outside. I’m inside, Ba.

E/ Homework: Write six sentences about your house, using adverbs of place.



Full name: ............................................................Class: 8 A

ENGLISH TESTTime: 15 minutes

Score:

Section I: Choose the best word or phrase words and underlined: (2ms)1) ……………………………………………………... does Hoa look like? => She’s beautiful.A. What B. Who C. Which D. Whose 2) My brother isn’t old enough ………………………………………………... to school alone.A. go B. to go C. going D. went3) They are going to ………………………………………………… their homework tonight.A. to do B. did C. do D. doing4) Alexander Graham Bell was a ……………………………………………………………. .A. English B. American C. French D. ScotsmanSection II: Supply the correct form of the verbs in the brackets: (1.5ms)1) We (be) ………………………………………………………………… in grade 8 this year.2) Hoa and Lan (buy) ………………………………………………… some books yesterday.3) Our class (go) ………………………………………………………… to the zoo next week.Section III: Combine the following sentences, using the structure “ENOUGH TO”: (1.5ms)Example: 0) She is old. She can go to school by herself. => She is old enough to go to school by herself.1) Ba is tall. He can play volleyball. => …………………………………………………………………………………………… .2) Lan is intelligent. She can do that test. => …………………………………………………………………………………………… .3) Tom is not old. He can’t ride a motorbike. => …………………………………………………………………………………………… .Section IV: Complete the second sentence so that it has a similar meaning to the first: (2ms)1) Peter is too young to see the horror film. => Peter is not ……………………………………………………………………………….. . 2) Remember to turn off the light before going out. Dương Quang Minh English 8 29


=> Don’t ……………………………………………………………………………………... .3) That girl is very intelligent. => What ………………………………………………………………………………………..! 4) I intend to come over the pick you up. => I am ………………………………………………………………………………………. .Section V: Find the mistakes and write the correct form: (3 ms)1) Could I say to Mrs Giang, please? 2) You don’t have some money left. Why don’t you ask your father of some? 3) How long is it from here to city center? => About 2 km. Section I: Choose the best word or phrase words and underlined: (4ms)1) A. What 2) B. to go 3) C. do 4) D. ScotsmanSection II: Supply the correct form of the verbs in the brackets: (3ms)1) We (be) are in grade 8 this year.2) Hoa and Lan (buy) bought some books yesterday.3) Our class (go) will go to the zoo next week.Section III: Combine the following sentences, using the structure “ENOUGH TO” : (3ms)Example: 0) She is old. She can go to school by herself. => She is old enough to go to school by herself.1) => Ba is tall enough to play volleyball.2) => Lan is intelligent to do that test.3) => Tom is not old enogh to ride a motorbike. Section IV: Complete the second sentence so that it has a similar meaning to the first: (2ms)1) => Peter is not old enough to see the horror film. 2) => Don’t forget to turn off the light before going out.. 3) => What an intelligent girl! 4) => I am going to come over to pick you up. Section V: Find the mistakes and write the correct form: (3ms)1) Could Can I say to Mrs Giang, please? 2) You don’t have some any money left. Why don’t you ask your father of some? 3) How long far is it from here to city center? => About 2 km.

Full name: ............................................................Class: 8 B


Score:

Section I: Choose the best word or phrase words and underlined: (4ms)1) ……………………………………………………... does Hoa look like? => She’s beautiful.A. What B. Who C. Which D. Whose 2) My brother isn’t old enough ………………………………………………... to school alone.A. go B. to go C. going D. went3) They are going to ………………………………………………… their homework tonight.A. to do B. did C. do D. doing Dương Quang Minh English 8 30


4) Alexander Graham Bell was a ……………………………………………………………. .A. English B. American C. French D. ScotsmanSection II: Supply the correct form of the verbs in the brackets: (3ms)1) We (be) ………………………………………………………………… in grade 8 this year.2) Hoa and Lan (buy) ………………………………………………… some books yesterday.3) Our class (go) ………………………………………………………… to the zoo next week.Section III: Combine the following sentences, using the structure “ENOUGH TO”: (3ms)Example: 0) She is old. She can go to school by herself. => She is old enough to go to school by herself.1) Ba is tall. He can play volleyball. => …………………………………………………………………………………………… .2) Lan is intelligent. She can do that test. => …………………………………………………………………………………………… .3) Tom is not old. He can’t ride a motorbike. => …………………………………………………………………………………………… .Section I: Choose the best word or phrase words and underlined: (4ms)1) A. What 2) B. to go 3) C. do 4) D. ScotsmanSection II: Supply the correct form of the verbs in the brackets: (3ms)1) We (be) are in grade 8 this year.2) Hoa and Lan (buy) bought some books yesterday.3) Our class (go) will go to the zoo next week.Section III: Combine the following sentences, using the structure “ENOUGH TO” : (3ms)Example: 0) She is old. She can go to school by herself. => She is old enough to go to school by herself.1) => Ba is tall enough to play volleyball.2) => Lan is intelligent to do that test.3) => Tom is not old enogh to ride a motorbike. Unit 3: AT HOME

I/ Aim: Helping students:- To describe places and situation.- To ask for and give reasons.- To write a description of a room.

II/ Language focus:1. Reflexive Pronouns.2. Modal: must, have to, ought to.3. Why - Because.



III/ Vocabulary: (to) injure, (to) destroy, a bead, chore (n), a wardrobe, a cup board, a knife, a match, an object, precaution (n), a rice cooker, a rug, safety (n), a saucepan, scissors (n), a sink, a socket, a steamer,

IV/ Allocation unit:

Lesson 1 Getting Started Listen and Read

Reading the dialogue and practice Modal verbs: must, have to, ought to,

Lesson 2 Speak Talking about the position of furniture in the kitchen and in the living room.

Lesson 3 ListenLanguage Focus 2

Further practice in Why - question and the answers - Because.

Lesson 4 Read Reading for details about safety precautions in the house.Lesson 5 Write Writing a description of the room.Lesson 6 Language Focus 1

- 3 - 4 Further practice in Reflexive Pronoun, Modal verbs: must, have to, ought to, and Why - question with Because.

Week 5: Date: Friday, September 14th , 2012Period 12:

Unit 3: AT HOMELesson 1: GETTING STARTED Page: 27

LISTEN AND READ L.F 1 Page: 27 - 28

A/ Aim: Helping students to read the dialogue for details and to practice the Modal verbs: must, have to, ought to.

B/ Objective: By the end of the lesson, students will be able to understand the dialogue and use Modal verbs to talk about the housework.

C/ Teaching aids: Textbooks, pictures.D/ Procedure:


Content

+ Warm up: Ask students to look at 6 pictures quickly in 30 seconds and try to remember the verbs in the pictures as many as possible.

+ Presentation:- Bookshut.- Eliciting.- Recording.

1/ Kim’s games:a) wash dishes/ do the washing up b) make the bedc) sweep the floor d) cooke) tidy up f) feed the chicken

2/ Vocabulary:- a steamer ['sti:mə] : nồi hấp( picture)- chore [t∫ɔ:] (n): việc trong nhà( picture)- a cupboard ['kʌpbəd] : tủ ly( picture)



. Check: What and Where. . Set the scene of the dialogue between Nam and his mother, Mrs Vui. Get students to listen the dialogue while looking at their books. Ask students to complete the list of the things Nam has to do.

+ Practice: Have students ask and answer.

+ Further practice: Ask students to read the dialogue again and write the list of the things Nam has to do. Ask students to look at the pictures and complete the dialogue between Nga and Lan, using must or have to together with the verbs given. Ask students to work in pairs, practicing the dialogue.

- a sink [siηk] : bồn rửa( picture)- a saucepan ['sɔ:spən] : cái chảo( picture)

steamer chore sinkcup board sauce pan

3/ Model sentences:a)Model sentence:- Nam has to cook dinner.- Nam has to go to the market to buy fish and vegetable.- Nam has to call his Aunt, Mrs Chi and ask her to meet his

mother at grandma’s house.b) Form:Have/ Has TO - infinitive … = Must - infinitive …

c) Meaning: phải ( làm gì). Exchange: - What do you have to do? => I must do the washing up.

4/ Word cue drill:a) make the bed- What do you have to do? => I must make the bed.b) sweep the floor- What do you have to do? => I must sweep the floor.c) cook dinner- What do you have to do? => I must cook dinner.d) tidy my room- What do you have to do? => I must tidy my room.e) feed the chicken- What do you have to do? => I must feed the chicken.

5/ Complete the list of the things Nam has to do:Answer keys:

- Cook dinner.- Go and visit grandme.- Go to the market.- Buy some fish and vegetables.

II/ LF 1 6/ Complete the dialogue:Answer keys:Nga: Can you come to the movie, Lan?Lan: No. I (0) have to do my choresNga: What do you have to do?Lan: I (1) must tidy my bed room. Then I (2) have to dust the

living room and I (3) must sweep the kitchen floor, too.



Nga: That won’t take long. What else?Lan: I (4) have to clean fish tank and then I (5) must empty

the garbage. Finally, I (6) must feed the dog.Nga: Ok. Let’s start. Then we can go out.

E/ Homework: Write the things you have to do on Sunday.

Week 5: Date: Saturday, September 17th , 2012Period 13:

Unit 3: AT HOMELesson 2: SPEAK Page: 28 - 29

A/ Aim: Practice speaking.B/ Objective: By the end of the lesson, students will be able to use the prepositions of

place to talk aboout the positions of furniture in the house.



C/ Teaching aids: Textbooks, pictures.D/ Procedure:

Teacher’s and Students activities

Content

+ Warm up: Ask students to look at the picture on page 28, then write name.

+ Presentation: Ask students the positions of the items in the pictures.

+ Practice: Get students to work in pairs, talking about the positions of each item.

+ Further practice:. Set the scene: “Mrs Vui bought new furnitures for her living room, but she cannot decide where to put it. You should help her to arrange the furnitures.” Ask students to look at the picture and talk about their ideas.

1/ Kim’s game:2/ Answer the questions:

a) Where is the clock? => It’s above the fridge.b) The fruit => In the bowl.c) The flowers? => On the table.d) Rice cooker? => Next to the bowl of fruit.e) Cupboard? => On the wall, above the counter.f) Knives? => They are on the wall, under the cupboard.g) Dish rack? => On the counter, next to the bowl of fruit.

3/ Speaking:- The calender is on the wall, above the stove.- The knives are on the wall, under the cupboard.

4/ Practice:- Let’s put the clock on the wall, between the shelf and the

picture.- OK. I think we ought to put the TV and the stereo on the

shelf.- I think the coffee table should be between the couch and

the arm chair.- Let’s put the telephone next to the couch.- I think we should put the magazines above the books on

the shelves.- I think the shelves ought to be at one of the corners,

opposite the couch.E/ Homework: Describle your living room

Week 5: Date: Saturday, September 17th , 2012

Period 14:

Unit 3: AT HOMELesson 3: READ Page: 31 - 32



A/Aim: Reading for details about safety precautions in the house and further practice in Why - questions and answer - Because.

B/ Objective: By the end of the lesson, students will be able to understand the safety precautions in the house and use Why - Because.

C/ Teacing aids: Textbooks, pictures, realias.D/ Procedure:


Content

+ Warm up:


. Check: Slap the board. Ask students to read the statements and guess. Give feedback.

+ While reading: Ask students to read the poster and check their prediction. Ask students to correct if the statement is false.

Ask students to work in pairs to find out the answers of these questions.

1/ Brainstorming:Danger in the house for children

- drug - electricity - boiling wate- fire - gas - knife

2/ Vocabulary:- a precaution [pri'kɔ:∫n] : sự phòng ngừa(translation)- a socket ['sɔkit] : ổ cắm điện(realia)- a match [mæt∫] : que diêm(realia)- an object ['ɔbdʒikt] : dụng cụ gia đình(translation)- safety ['seifti] (adj): an toàn(translation)- (to) destroy [di'strɔi] : phá hủy(translation)- (to) injure ['indʒə] : làm bị thương(picture)

3/ True - False predictions:a) It is safe to leave medecine around the house.b) Drugs can look like candy.c) A kitchen is a suitable place to play.d) Playing with one match cannot start a fire.e) Putting a knife into an electrical socket is dangerous.f) Young children do not understand that many household

objects are dangerous.Answer keys:

a) F b) T c) F d) F e) T f) Ta) It is safe to keep medecine in locked cupboards.c) A kitchen is a dangerous place to play.d) Playing with one match can cause a fire.

4/ Answer the questions:a) Why must we put all chemicals and drugs in a locked

cupboard? => Because children often try to eat and drink them.b) Why mustn’t we let children play in the kitchen?=> Because the kitchen is a dangerous place.



+ Post reading: Ask students to work in groups, discussing about the topic.

c) Why mustn’t children play with matches?=> Because playing with one match can cause the fire.d) Why must we cover electrical sockets?=> Because children often try to put something into

electrical sockets and electricity can kill. e) Why do we have to put all dangerous objects out of

children’s reach? => Because the dangerous objects can injure or kill

children.5/ Discussion:

a) Safety precautions in the street.b) Safety precautions at school.

E/ Homework: Practice in Why questions with Because answer by doing the exercise Language Focus 4.

Week 5: Date: Saturday, September 24th, 2012Period 15:

Unit 3: AT HOMELesson 4: WRITE Page: 32 - 33

A/ Aim: Writing a description of a room.



B/ Objective: By the end of the lesson, students will be able to write a description of a room in their house.



Content

+ Warm up: Ask something about the room on page 32.

+ Pre writing:- Bookshut.- Eliciting.- Recording.

. Check: Rub out and Remember. Ask students to read the description of Hoa’s room, then ask some comprehension questions. Give feedback.

+ While writing: Ask students to describe Hoa’s kitchen, using the given cues. Ask students to share with their partners. Correct the mistakes from some descriptions. Give feedback.

+ Post writing: Ask students to talk to their partners about their room/

1/ Chatting:a) Which room is this? b) What’s this? Where is it?

2/ Vocabulary:- a folder ['fouldə] : kẹp giấy(realia)- beneach [bi'ni:θ] (adj): ở phía dưới = under( translation )- a towel-rack ['tauəlræk] : giá khăn(picture)- a lighting fixture ['laitiη 'fikst∫ə] : đèn chùm(picture)Wardrobe (n) ['wɔ:droub] cái tủ quần áoCounter (n) (v) ['kauntə] quày hàng, trái ngược

3/ Answer the questions:a) What is there on the left of the room?=> There is a desk on the left of the room.b) Where is the bookshelf?=> The bookshelf is above the desk.c) What is there on the right side of the room?=> There is a window on the right side of the room.d) Where is the wardrobe? => The wardrobe is beside the window and opposite the

desk.4/ Writing:

Answer keys: “ This is Hoa’s kitchen. There is a refrigerator in the right corner of the room. Next to the refrigerator are the stove and the oven. On the other side of the oven, there is a sink and next to the sink is a towel rack. The dish rack stands on the counter, on the right of the window and beneath the shelves. On the shelves and on the counter beneath the window, there are jars of sugar, flour and tea. In the middle of the kitchen, there are a table and four chairs. The lighting fixture is above the table, and directly beneath the lighting fixture is a vase with flowers.”



living room/ kitchen. 4/ Speaking:

E/ Homework: Ask students to write a description of their bed room/ living room.

WEEK 6Period 16:

Unit 3: AT HOMELesson 3: LISTEN Page: 30 LANGUAGE FOCUS 2 Page: 35

A/ Aim: Listening and further practice in modal verb - ought to. B/ Objective: By the end of the lesson, students will be able to identify the right item by

listening and further practice in modal verb - ought to.C/ Teaching aids: Textbooks, posters.D/ Procedure:


Content

+ Warm up: Ask students to write down on their notebooks 5 things you can eat.

+ Pre listening: Get students to look at page 30 and guess 4 things they use to cook the “Special Chinese Fried Rice”. Give feedback.

+ While listening: Students listen to the tape and check their predictions. Give feedback.

+ Presentation:. Set the scene: “ Hoa is very sad because she failed her English test. What do you say

1/ Bingo:Suggested: chickens, beef, cake, candy, garlic, noodles, bread,rice, ham, peas, ……

2/ Prediction:Answer keys: a) Fried rice b) Pan c) Garlic and green peppers d) Ham and peasTape transcript:Lan: Can I help you cook dinner, Mom?Mrs Tu: Sure. You can cook the “ Special Chinese Fried

Rice” for me. Use the big pan, please.Lan: Okey. How much oil do I put in?Mrs Tu: Just a little. Wait until it’s hot and then fry the

garlic and the green peppers.Lan: Do I put the ham and the peas in now?Mrs Tu: Yes. And you can put the rice and a teaspoon of

salt in.Lan: Yummy! It smells delicious.

1/ Model sentences:a) Model sentences:- You should study harder.

OUGHT TO



to advise her?”. Can you tell me another word for “should”.

+ Practice: Ask students to give advice to people in the pictures on page 35. Get students to practice 4 exchanges in pairs.

+ Production: Ask students to practice in pairs. Give feedback.

- You ought to study harder.b) Form:

Ought to - infinitive …c) Use: “ought to” as well as “should” is used to give advice to someone.Meaning: “nên”

4/ Use “ought to” to give advice to these people:Answer keys:a) I failed my English test. => You ought to study harder.b) I’m late. => You ought to get up earlier.c) I’m fat. => You ought to eat less meet and more vegetables.d) My tooth aches. => You ought to see a dentist.

5/ Noughts and Crosses:his tooth/ ache Hoa/ late my room/ untidythe floor/ dirty Bao/ overweight she/ thinmy English/ bad

her grades/ bad the washing machine not work

Answer keys:a) His tooth aches. => He ought to go to the dentist’s.b) Hoa is late. => She ought to get up earlier.c) My room is untidy. => You ought to tidy your room.d) The floor is dirty. => You ought to clean it.e) Bao is overweight.=> He ought to eat less meat and do exercise more often.f) She is thin. => She ought to eat more.g) My English is bad. => You ought to study harder.h) Her grades are bad. => She ought to study harder.i) The washing machine doesn’t work. => You ought to fix it.

E/ Homework: Write some advice when your friend feels sick.



Week 6: Date: Saturday, September 24th, 2012Period 17:

Unit 3: AT HOMELesson 6: LANGUAGE FOCUS - 3 - 4 Page: 36

A/ Aim: Further practice in Reflexive Pronouns.B/ Objective: By the end of the lesson, students will be able to use the Reflexive Pronouns.C/ Teaching aids: Textbooks.D/ Procedure:


Content

+Warm up:

+ Activitive 1: Ask students to look at the

pictures and complete the dialogue between Nga and Lan, using must or have to together with the verbs given. Ask students to work in

pairs, practicing the dialogue.

+ Activitive 2:+ Presentation:

. Set the scene: “You do your homework and noone helps you. What do you say?” Explain the Reflexive

Pronouns.

I/ Brainstorming:Things you can do Things you can’t do

- tidy up - repair the machine- do our homework - fix the TV set- water flower - paint the house- clean the floor- cook

II/ LF 3 ( Model sentences) :a) Model sentence: - I do my homework myself.b)Form: - We use: I with myself. you youself he himself she herself it itself we ourselves they themselvesEmphrasis pronouns: Used to emphrasire a person of a thing.Eg: - She cut herself. - John saw himself in the mirror.

3/ Word cue drill:a) you/ do/ homework- Did you do your homework? => Yes. I did it myself.b) he/ fix/ washing machine- Did he fix the washing machine? => Yes. He fixed it himself.c) Mary/ cook/ dinner- Did Mary cook the dinner? => Yes. She cook it herself.



+ Practice: Ask students to run through

the vocabulary first (do your homework, fix the washing machine, cook dinner, paint the pictures, do our chore). Ask students to practice the

questions and then the answer. Ask students to work in

open pairs then closed pairs. Give feedback.

+ Further Practice: Ask students to fill in the

blanks the suitable reflexive pronouns or emphrasis pronouns. Give feedback. Ask students to practice

speaking in pairs.

+ Activitive 3: Ask students to look at the

pictures and ask and answer. Ask students to work in

pairs, practicing.

d) these students/ paint/ the pictures- Did these students paint the pictures?=> Yes. They painted them themselves.e) you/ do/ your chore- Did you do your chore? => Yes. We did ourselves.

4/ Complete the dialogue:a) Miss Lien: Did someone help Ba draw that picture? Bao: No. He did it (0) himself.b) Nga: The repairman cvan’t fix the washing machine

until tomorrow. Mrs Linh: Come on. We’ll have to try and do it (1)

ourselves.c) Aunt Thanh: What’s the matter, Hoa? Hoa: I cut (2) myself. Aunt Thanh: Let me see. Oh, it’s all right. You didn’t

cut (3) yourself badly.d) Lan: Why are you crying, Nga? Nga: I just watched the movie Romeo and Juliet. The

boy killed (4) himself and then the girl killed (5) herself as well.

Lan: Why did they kill (6) themselves? Nga: It’s a long story.e) Mr Nhat: Boys and girls, you’ll do this experiment this

afternoon. Students: Will you come to help us? Mr Nhat: Yes, I will. But you’ll have to do it (7)

yourself first. IV/ LF 4 (Answer the questions):

a) Why did Hoa go to school late this morning?=> Because she watched TV late last night.b) Why did Nam have to cook dinner?=> Because his mother was home late.c) Why was Mrs Vui, Nam’s mother home late?=> Because she had to come to see his (Nam’s)

grandmother, she was tired (sick).d) Why did Ha fail her English exam?=> Because she didn’t learn for her exam. She played

the computer games.e) Why didn’t Nga go to the movies?=> Because she had to do her chores. She had to clean

the kitchen and sweep the living-room.



E/ Homework: Write 3 sentences with Reflexive Pronouns and 3 sentences with emphasis pronouns.

Week 6: Date: Saturday, October 1st, 2012Period 18:

CONSOLIDATIONA/ Aim: Helping students to review the Present Simple tense, structure: “(not) adjective +

ENOUGH TO - infinitive”, future with BE GOING TO, Reflexive Pronouns, Modal verbs: MUST, HAVE TO, OUGHT TO, Why - Because,

B/ Language Focus:- The Present Simple tense.- The structure: “(not) adjective + ENOUGH TO - infinitive”.- The Future with BE GOING TO.- Reflexive Pronouns.- Modal verbs: MUST, HAVE TO, OUGHT TO.- Why - Because.

Week 7: Date: Tuesday, September 25tht, 2012Period 19:

THE FIRST MIDDLE TERM ENGLISH TESTTime: 45 minutes



A/ Aim: Helping students to review the Present Simple tense, structure: “(not) adjective + ENOUGH TO - infinitive”, future with BE GOING TO, Reflexive Pronouns, Modal verbs: MUST, HAVE TO, OUGHT TO, Why - Because,

B/ Language Focus:- The Present Simple tense.- The structure: “(not) adjective + ENOUGH TO - infinitive”.- The Future with BE GOING TO.- Reflexive Pronouns.- Modal verbs: MUST, HAVE TO, OUGHT TO.- Why - Because.

C/ Teaching aids: Paper test.D/ Procedure:E. Matrix: 8ATopics Nhận biết Thông hiểu Vận dụng Tổng

TN TL TN TL TN TLPronunciation số câu: 4

số điểm: 1số câu: 4số điểm: 1= 10%

Grammar BE GOING TO - infinitive;reflexive pronouns;số câu: 2số điểm: 0.5

Question words;số câu: 1số điểm: 0.25

ENOUGH TO - infinitive;số câu: 1số điểm: 0.25

BE GOING TO - infinitive;simple present;simple past;số câu: 4số điểm: 2

số câu: 8số điểm: 3 = 30%

Reading Answer about Mr Bao;số câu: 3số điểm: 1.5

số câu: 3số điểm: 1.5 = 15%

Write Write a passage;Rewrite the sentences;số câu: 8số điểm: 4.5

số câu: 3số điểm: 4.5 = 45%

E. Test: 8AFull name: ................................................................Class: 8 A

English Test (1)Time: 45 minutes

Score:

Section I: Choose the word that has the underlined part pronounced differently (1 m):1) A. enough B. sound C. countless D. found 2) A. sorry B. bored C. orphan D. cover 3) A. character B. chore C. choose D. child



4) A. demonstrate B. experiment C. emigrate D. excellent Section II: Choose the best word or phrase words and underlined (1 m):1) …………………………………………………… does Hoa look like? => She’s beautiful.A. What B. How C. Which D. Who2) They are going ………………………………………………….... their homework tonight.A. do B. does C. to do D. doing3) He is .............................................................................................. to ride his bike to school. A. enough not old B. not old enough C. not enough old D. enough old4) The children are old enough to look after ........................................................................... .A. them B. their C. themself D. themselvesSection III: Read the passage, then answer the questions: (1.5ms) Mr Bao is 37 years old. He has married and has got two children, a boy and a girl. He is a teacher of English at Truong Dinh High School. He’s very tall but rather slim. He loves his career and his students.1) What does he do? => …………………...…………………………………….………………………………... .2) Where does he work? => …………………...…………………………………….………………………………... .3) What does he look like? => …………………...…………………………………….……………………………… .Section IV: Combine the following sentences, use the structures

“ (not) adjective + ENOUGH TO - infinitive” (1.5ms):1) This coat isn’t warm. I don’t wear it in winter. => …………………...…………………………………….……………………………… .2) She is beautiful and intelligent. She can become Miss World. => …………………...…………………………………….……………………………… .3) The weather is fine. We could go camping. => …………………...…………………………………….……………………………… .Section V: Put the verbs in the brackets into the correct form or tense (2 ms):1) Bad driving (cause) ……………………………………………………… many accidents. 2) Nga and Hoa (see) ……………………………………………………… a movie tonight. 3) Sue can (speak) …………………………………………………… VietNamese very well. 4) Mozart (write) ……………………………………………….. more than 600 pieces music. Section VI: Find the mistakes and write the correct form (1 m):1) Why mustn’t children play by match? => …………………………………………………………………………………………… . Dương Quang Minh English 8 45


2) I’m going to being home late tonight. => …………………………………………………………………………………………… . Section VII: Rewrite the sentences using the words given (1 m):1) He is too young to drive a car. (enough) => …………………………………………………………………………………………… . 2) Let’s go on a picnic to the countryside this weekend. (shall) => ……………………………………………………………………………………………? Section VIII: Write a paragraph about your friend, using the following questions ( - What is his/ her name?/ - How ols is he/ she?/ - What does he/ she look like?/ - What is he/ she like?/ - Where does he/ she live?/ - Who does he/ she live with?/ - Who are his/ her friends?) (1 m): His/ Her name is …………………………………………………………………G. Matrix: 8B

Topics Nhận biết Thông hiểu Vận dụng TổngTN TL TN TL TN TL

Pronunciation số câu: 4số điểm: 1

số câu: 4số điểm: 1 = 10%

Grammar BE GOING TO - infinitive;reflexive pronouns;preposition;result of clause;số câu: 4số điểm: 1

Question words;số câu: 2số điểm: 0.5

ENOUGH TO - infinitive;số câu: 2số điểm: 0.5

BE GOING TO - infinitive;simple present;simple past;số câu: 4số điểm: 2

số câu: 12số điểm: 4= 40%

Reading Answer about Mr Bao;số câu: 3số điểm: 1.5

số câu: 3số điểm: 1.5= 15%

Write Write a passage; Rewrite sentences;số câu: 4số điểm: 3.5

số câu: 4số điểm: 2= 35%

H. Test: 8BFull name: ................................................................Class: 8 B


Score:



Section I: Choose the word that has the underlined part pronounced differently (1 m):1) A. enough B. sound C. countless D. found 2) A. sorry B. bored C. orphan D. cover 3) A. character B. chore C. choose D. child 4) A. demonstrate B. experiment C. emigrate D. excellent Section II: Choose the best word or phrase words and underlined (2 ms):1) …………………………………………………………………. does Lien live? => In Hue.A. What B. When C. Which D. Where2) …………………………………………………… does Hoa look like? => She’s beautiful.A. What B. How C. Which D. Who3) My brother isn’t old enough ……………………………………………… to school alone.A. go B. to go C. goes D. going4) They are going ………………………………………………….... their homework tonight.A. do B. does C. to do D. doing5) He is .............................................................................................. to ride his bike to school. A. not enough old B. enough not old C. not old enough D. enough old6) The children are old enough to look after .......................................................................... .A. them B. their C. themself D. themselves7) The calendar is ............................. the clock, ................................ the picture and the lamp.A. on/ next to B. under/ between C. behind/ between D. above/ on8) She worked hard .................................................................. she could pass the final exams.A. so that B. in order to C. as result D. so as toSection III: Read the passage, then answer the questions: (1.5ms) Mr Bao is 37 years old. He has married and has got two children, a boy and a girl. He is a teacher of English at Truong Dinh High School. He’s very tall but rather slim. He loves his career and his students.1) What does he do? => …………………...…………………………………….………………………………... .2) Where does he work? => …………………...…………………………………….………………………………... .3) What does he look like? => …………………...…………………………………….……………………………… .Section IV: Combine the following sentences, use the structures

“ (not) adjective + ENOUGH TO - infinitive” (1.5ms):1) This coat isn’t warm. I don’t wear it in winter. => …………………...…………………………………….……………………………… .2) She is beautiful and intelligent. She can become Miss World. Dương Quang Minh English 8 47


=> …………………...…………………………………….……………………………… .3) The weather is fine. We could go camping. => …………………...…………………………………….……………………………… .Section V: Put the verbs in the brackets into the correct form or tense (2 ms):1) Bad driving (cause) ……………………………………………………… many accidents. 2) Nga and Hoa (see) ………………………………………………………. a movie tonight. 3) Sue can (speak) ……………………………………………………. VietNamese very well. 4) Mozart (write) ……………………………………………….. more than 600 pieces music. Section VI: Write a paragraph about Trung, using the information in the box (2 ms):

Name: Nguyen Manh TrungAge: 15Appearance: tall, fat, short curly hairCharaters: sociable, generous, kindAddress: 24 Nguyen Du Street, Ho Chi Minh CityFamily: mother, father and two younger sistersHobbies: swimming, readingFriends: Nam, Thanh, Phong

His name is …………………………………………………………………………………...

Unit 4: OUR PAST

I/ Aim: Helping students:- To talk about the past events.- To express feelings.- To distinguish between facts and opinions.- To write a short imaginary story.

II/ Language Focus: 1. Past Simple tense2. Prepositions of time: in, on, at, after, before, between3. Use to

III/ Vocabulary: (to) look after, (to) shout, (to) tie, (to) appear, (to) escape, (to) graze, (to) own, cruel (adj), excited (adj), magical (adj), traditional (adj), upset (adj), magically (adv), an equipment, a festival (to), a folk tale, a mark, a rag, …


Lesson 1 Getting StartedListen and read

Reading the dialogue about life of many years ago.

Lesson 2 Speak Practice speaking about the way things used to be and the way they are now.

Lesson 3 Listen Listening the story.



Lesson 4 Read Reading the story “the lost shoe” for details.Lesson 5 Write Writing a short imaginary story.Lesson 6 Language Focus Revision and further practice in Past Simple tense. Further

practice in USE TO - infinitive and prepositions of time.


Unit 4: OUR PASTLesson 1: GETTING STARTED Page: 38 LISTEN AND READ Page: 38 - 39 LANGUAGE FOCUS 1 - 2 Page: 44

A/ Aim: Reading the dialogue about the life of many years ago.B/ Objective: By the end of the lesson, students will be able to tell the activitives people

used to do in the past.C/ Teaching aids: Textbooks, pictures. D/ Procedure:


Content

+ Warm up:


1/ Pelmanism:run fly take go havedo be ride eat sitcome flew went didrode sat came ranhad was/ were ate took

2/ Getting Started: Write the names of the things that do not belong to the past.Answer keys: - The TV- The radio- The mobile phone- The light fixture- Modern clothing/ school uniform

3/ Vocabulary:- (to) look after [luk 'ɑ:ftə] : chăm sóc(synonym)- an equipment [i'kwipmənt] : thiết bị(example)- traditional [trə'di∫ənl] (adj): truyền thống(translation)- a great grandmother ['greit'grændmʌđə] : bà cố(explanation)- a folktale ['foukteil] : chuyện cổ tích




+ While reading: Ask students to read the statements (on poster) and predict . Ask students to read the dialogue between Nga and her Grandma and check their prediction. Ask them to correct the false statements. Give feedback. Get students to work in pairs, asking and answering questions. Give feedback.

Have students read the statements part 3 on page 39 and decide which is fact and which is an opinion. Give feedback.

+ Post reading: Revision of Past Simple Tense.. Set the scene: Lan asks Nga about Nga’s yesterday activities.

Conversation (n) [,kɔnvə'sei∫n] cuộc nói chuyện, đàm phán

look after equipmenttraditional great grandma

4/ True - False statements:a) Nga used to live on a farm.b) Nga’s grandma didn’t go to school.c) She has an easy and happy life when she was young.d) There wasn’t any modern equipment at her time.e) “The lost shoe” is a short story.Answer keys:

a) F b) T c) F d) T e) Fa) Grandma used to live on a farm.c) She has a hard life.e) “The lost shoe” is an old folk tale.

5/ Answer the questions:a) Where did Nga’s grandmother use to live?=> She used to live on a farm.b) Why didn’t she go to school?=> Because she had to stay at home and help her Mom to

look after her younger brothers and sisters.c) What did Nga’s great Grandma do? => She used to cook the meals, clean the house and wash

the clothes.d) What did Nga’s great grandma and great grandfather do

after dinner? => Her great grandma used to lit the lamp and her great

gransfather used to tell stories.e) What did Nga ask her grandma to do at the end of the

conversation? => She asked her grandma to tell her the tale “The lost

shoe”.6) Fact or Opinion:

a) I used to live on a farm.b) There wasn’t any electricity.c) Mom had to do everything without the help of modern

equipment.d) My father used to tell us stories.e) The best one was The Lost Shoe.f) Traditional stories are great.Answer keys:

a) F b) F c) F d) F e) O f) O7/ Mapped dialogue:

Lan Nga



- …….. lunch?

- How …… school?

- Which subject …… ?

- When …… yesterday evening?

- No. I ate noodles.

- I …… bike to school.

- …… Math.

- …… home.Answer keys: Lan: Did you eat rice for noodle?Nga: No. I ate noodle.Lan: How did you get to school?Nga: I rode a bike to school.Lan: Which subject did you have yesterday?Nga: I had Math.Lan: When were you yesterday evening?Nga: I was at home.

E/ Homework: Ask students to do exercises Language Focus 1 - 2 into their notebooks.

Week 7: Date: Friday, October 27th, 2012 Period 21:

Unit 4: OUR PASTLesson 2: SPEAK Page: 40 LANGUAGE FOCUS 4 Page: 45

A/ Aim: Speaking about the ways things used to be and the way they are now.B/ Objective: By the end of the lesson, students will be able to use USED TO to talk about

the things they used to do.C/ Teaching aids: Textbooks, word cards for filling.D/ Procedure:


Content



+ Warm up:

+ Presentation: Recall the conversation between Nga and her grandma, then ask: “Where did Nga’s grandma always live?” - “She always lived on a farm.” Ask: “ Another word for always lived.” - Answer: “Used to live.” Ask students to use USED TO to make question and answer.

+ Practice: Get students to work in open pairs then closed pairs.

+ Production: Get students to work in open pairs then closed pairs. Compare two pictures on page 40, using “USED TO” to talk about the actions in the past. Elicit some ideas so that students can talk about them. Ask students to do exercise 4 on page 45. Have students work in pairs, looking at 4 pictures; using USED TO with the

1/ Jumble words:a) rieletcicty = electricity b) menttaenterin = entertaimentc) rkmaet = market d) permasuekt = supermarket

2/ Model sentences:a) Model sentence:- “Where did Nga’s grandma use to live?”+ “She used to live on a farm.”b) Form:(+) S + USED TO – infinitive ……(-) S + didn’t USE TO – infinitive ……(?) Did + S + USE TO – infinitive …… ?

c) Use: USED TO express a past habit, or an action usually happened in the past.

d) Meaning: Đã thường hay làm gì3/ Word cue drill:

a) live/ Hue/ Ha Noi - Did you use to live in Hue? => No. I used to live in Ha Noi.b) have/ long hairs/ short hairs- Did you use to have long hairs?=> No, I used to have short hairs.c) get up/ late/ early - Did you use to get up late?=> No. I used to get up early.d) walk to school/ bike - Did you use to walk to school? => No. I used to go to school by bike.e) study/ evening/ early morning - Did you use to study in the evening? => No. I used to study in the early morning.

4/ Speaking:a) Where did they live in the past? And now? => People used to live in small houses. Now they live in big

houses and buildings.b) How did they travel? => People used to walk. Now, they can go by cars or

motorbikes.c) What’s about the electricity? => Now, there is electricity everywhere. d) What’s about their life/ work? => People used to work hard all the time. Now, they have a

lot of time for entertaiment.e) Did children use to go to school? => Most children used to stay at home. Now, they all go to

school. Dương Quang Minh English 8 52


verbs live - stay - have - be to complete the dialogue between Nga and Hoa. Give feedback. Deliberate mistakes. Read aloud sentences and ask students to listen carefully and try to find out the mistake, When they hear a mistake, they stand up and say No then correct it.

f) What’s about their entertaiment? => Children used to play traditional games such as hide and

sick, skip rope …… outdoors. Now, they have a lot of modern games - video games.

5/ Complete the dialogue:Nga: Where is it? It isn’t Ha Noi.Hoa: No, it’ Hue. I used to stay there.Nga: Is that you, Hoa?Hoa: Yes. I used to have long hairs.Nga: Who is in this photos?Hoa: That is Loan. She used to be my next door neighbor.Nga: Are they your parents?Hoa: They’re my aunt and uncle. They used to live in Hue,

too.

E/ Homework: Write about the things you used to do last year. “Last year, I used to get up late. Now, I get up very early and do morning exercises.” And do Language Focus 4.

Week 8: Date: Tuesday, September 28th, 2012 Period 22:

Unit 4: OUR PASTLesson 3: LISTEN Page: 41

A/Aim: Listen and further practice in Past simple tense.B/ Objective: By the end of the lesson, students will be able to understand the main idea of

the story by listening and further practice in Past Simple tense.C/ Teaching aids: Textbooks, cards.D/ Procedure:


Content



+ Warm up:


. Check: What and Where. Predict the moral lesson of the story. Ask students to look at four titles and guess which is most suitable to the story. Give feedback.

+ While listening: Have students to listen to the tape twice and check their predition. Ask students what tense is used in the story. Past Simple tense.

Have students listen again and try to write as many verbs as possible. The student who more verbs get good marks. Ask students to give the information of these verbs.

+ Post listening:. Set the scene: Lan ask Nga about Nga’s yesterday

1/ Pelmanism:run ran fly flewride rode eat atesit sat come came

2/ Vocabulary:- foolish ['fu:li∫] (adj): ngốc nghếch(translation)- greedy ['gri:di] (adj): tham lam(translation)- gold [gould] (n): vàng(realia)- (to) lay/ laid/ laid [lei] : đẻ, sinh sản(picture)- amazement [ə'meizmənt] (n): sự sửng sốt(translation)

3/ Prediction:a) Don’t kill chickens. b) Don’t be foolish and greedy.c) Be happy with what you have. d) It is difficult to find gold.Answer keys:

Don’t be foolish and greedy.4/ Listening:

Tape transcript: “ Once a farmer lived a comfortable life with his family. His chickens laid many eggs which the farmer used to buy food and clothes for his family . One day, he went to collect the eggs and discovered one of the chickens laid a gold egg. He shouted excitedly to his wife: “We’re rich!”, “We’re rich!” . His wife ran to him and they both looked at the egg in amazement. The wife wanted more., so her husband decided to cut open all the chickens and find more gold eggs. Unfortunately, he couldn’t find any eggs. When he finished all, the chickens were dead. There were no more eggs of any kind for the follish farmer and his greedy wife.”

5/ Find out the verbs in the story:Answer keys:

- went - were - discorvered - ran - laid - looked - shouted - wanted - finished - decided - couldn’t

6/ Mapped dialogue:Lan Nga



activities.

- …… lunch?

- How …… school?

- Which subject …… ?

- Where …. Yesterday evening?

- No. I ate noodles.

- I …… bike to school.

- …… Math.

- ……. home.Answer keys:Lan: Did you eat rice for lunch?Nga: No. I ate noodles.Lan: How did you get to school?Nga: I rode a bike to school.Lan: Which subject did you have yesterday?Nga: I had Math.Lan: Where were you yesterday evening?Nga: I was at home.

E/ Homework: Write twenty irregular verbs on the notebooks.

Week 8: Date: Tuesday, October 4th, 2012 Period 23:

Unit 4: OUR PASTLesson 4: READ Page: 41 - 42 LANGUAGE FOCUS 3 Page: 44

A/ Aim: Reading the story “The Lost Shoe” for details. Further practice in prepositions of time.B/ Objective: By the end of the lesson, students will be able to understand and retell the

story “ The Lost Shoe” and further practice in prepositions of time..C/ Teaching aids: Textbooks, cards.



D/ Procedure:


Content

+ Warm up: Name some folk tales that you have read.

+ Pre reading:- Bookshut. - Eliciting.- Recording.

. Check: Rub out and Remember.. Set the scene: These statements are about the schools in the “The Lost Shoe”. Read these statements and guess. Ask students to work in pairs to guess. Give feedback.

+ While reading: Have students read the story “The Lost Shoe” on page 41 and check their prediction.and ask them to correct. Ask students to work in pairs answering the questions in exercise 2 on

1/ Brainstormimg:The folk tales

- One hundred - section bamboo (Cây tre trăm đốt) - Tấm Cám - The Frog Prince (Hoàng tử Cóc)- Snow White and seven Dwarfs (Bạch Tuyết và bảy chú lùn) - Seven - mile shoe (Đôi hìa bảy dặm)

2/ Vocabulary:- cruel ['kruəl] (adj): tàn ác, độc ác(translation)- upset [ʌp'set] (adj): bực mình(synonym)- a fairy ['feəri] (n): nàng tiên(translation)- magical ['mædʒikəl] (adj): thần bí(example)- magically ['mædʒikəli] (adv): thần bí(translation)- a rag [ræg] : áo quần rách(realia)- (to) fall in love with [fɔ:l in lʌv wiđ] : phải lòng ai(translation)- immediately [i'mi:djətli] (adv): ngay lập tức

3/ True - False statements:a) Little Pea’s father is a poor farmer.b) Her father got married again after his wife died.c) Her new mother was beautiful and nice to her.d) She worked hard all day.e) She didn’t have new clothes to take part in the festival.Answer keys:

a) T b) T c) F d) T e) Fc) Her new mother was crual to her.e) A fairy gave her beautiful clothes.

4/ Answer the questions:a) Who was Little Pea? => She was a poor farmer’s daughter.b) What did Stout Nut’s mother make Little Pea do all day? => She made her do the chores all day.c) How did Little Pea get her new clothes?=> Before the festival started, a fairy appeared and

magically changed her rags into beautiful clothes.



page 42. Give feedback.

Complete the sentences with words the story. Ask students to work in pairs, filling the blank with suitable words from the story. Give feedback.

+ Post reading: Ask students to work in pairs, telling the story again in details. They can look at the statements in the gap filling exercise and add more.

+ Presentation: Write some preposotions in a list on the left - hand side of the blackboard. Write the time/ date/ month … on the right - hand side of the blackboard. Give feedback. Ask students to read aloud each phrase.

+ Practice: Ask students to do exercise 3 on page 44 individually then compare with their partners. Give feedback.

d) Whom did the Prince decide to marry? Why? => He decided to marry Little Pea because the shoe (which

the Prince was keeping) fitted her.e) Is it a true story? How did you know?=> ( Students answer themselves.)

5/ Gap fiing:a) Little Pea’s father was a farmer.b) Little Pea’s mother died when she was young.c) Little Pea used to do housework all day after her father got

married again.d) The Prince wanted to marry a girl from Little Pea’s

village.e) Stout Nut’s mother did not make new clothes for Little

Pea.f) The Prince found Little Pea’s lost shoe.

6/ Retell the story: “ Little Pea’s father was a poor farmer. Unfortunately, Little Pea’s mother died when she was young and her father got married again. The new wife was very crual to her and made her work allday. One day, the Prince wanted to choose a wife from her village. Her new mother didn’t make new clothes for her, but the fairy did. She came to the festival and lost a shoe. The Prince found her shoe and decided to marry her.”

7/ (LF 3):a/ Matching:

A B1. in2. on3. at4. between5. after6. before

a. Januaryb. November 1997c. Wednesdayd. 3 pme. July 2nd f. 7 am and 9 am

Answer keys: 1 + a – b 2 + c – e 3 – 5 – 6 + d 4 + f

b/ Gap filling:a) I’ll see you on Wednesday.b) I’m going to Laos in January.c) We must be there between 8:30 and 9:15.d) The bank closes at 3 pm if you arrive after 3 pm the bank

will be closed.e) I’ll be home before seven because I want to see the seven

o’clock news.

E/ Homework: Have students rewrite the story and do Language Focus 3.



Week 8: Date: Saturday, October 15th, 2012 Period 24:

Unit 4: OUR PASTLesson 5: WRITE Page: 42 - 43

A/ Aim: Writing a short imaginary story.B/ Objective: By the end of the lesson, students will be able to use Simple Past tense to

write a folk tale.C/ Teaching aids: Textbooks, poster.D/ Procedure: Dương Quang Minh English 8 58



Content

+ Warm up: Ask students some questions about imaginary story.

+ Pre writing:- Bookshut. - Eliciting.- Recording.

. Check: What and where.

Ask students the meaning of the verbs in the box. Have students work in pairs using suitable verbs to fill in the blanks. Give feedback. Ask students to work in groups, answering the following questions. Get students to answer the questions.

+ While writing: Get students to do exercise 2. They have to imagine to be a man in order to write the story. Get students to change “the man – I, his – my”. Get students to write individually then share with

1/ Chatting:a) Do you want to read imaginary stories?b) Name some of them. c) Which story do you like best?d) Have you ever read the story “ How the Tigers got his stripes?”

2/ Vocabulary:- wisdom ['wizdəm] (n): trí khôn, sự khôn ngoan(translation)- a stripe [straip] : sọc, dây thừng(realia)- a straw [strɔ:] : rơm(realia)- a servant ['sə:vənt] : nô lệ, người đầy tớ(translation)- (to) escape [is'keip] : trốn thoát(translation)- (to) graze [greiz] : gặm cỏ(picture)- (to) light/ lit/ lighted [lait] : đốt(mime)

wisdom stripe straw servantescape graze light

3/ Complete the story:How the Tigers got his stripes

“ One day, as a farmer was in his field and his buffalo (0) was grazing nearby, a tiger (1) appear. The tiger wanted to know why the strong buffalo was the servant and the small man (2) was the master. The farmer (3) said he had something called wisdom, but he (4) left it at home that day. He (5) went to get the wisdom, but before that he (6) tied the tiger to a tree with a rope because he didn’t want it to eat the buffalo. When he returned, the farmer brought some straw with him. He said it was his wisdom. He (7) lit the straw and the fire (8) burned the tiger. The tiger (9) escaped, but it still has black stripes from the burns today.”

4/ Answer the questions:a) Where was the man? => He was in his field.b) What did the buffalo do when the tiger appeared?=> It grazed nearby.c) What did the tiger want to know?=> The tiger wanted to know why the strong buffalo was the



their partners and correct mistakes. Take some writings to correct in front of the class. Give feedback.

+ Post writing: They work in team, telling the story . Ask a volunteer from each team to tell the story infront of the class.

servant and the small man was the master.d) What did he do before going home? Why? => He tied the tiger to a tree with rope because he didn’t

want it to eat the buffalo.e) What did he do when he returned?=> When he returned, he lit the straw to burn the tiger.

5/ Rewrite the story:Answer keys: “ One day, as I was in a field and my buffalo grazed nearby, a tiger came. It asked why the strong buffalo was my servant and I was its master. I told tiger that I had something called wisdom. The tiger wanted to see it but I said that I left the wisdom at home that day. Then I tied the tiger to a tree with a rope because I didn’t want it to eat my buffalo. I went to get some straw and I burned the tiger. The tiger escaped, but today it still has black stripoes from the burn.”

6/ Tell the story:a) The tiger - I b) The buffalo - I

E/ Homework: Write the story again, imagine you are: the tiger and the buffalo.


CORRECT THE TEST

A/ Aim: Help students to be able to know mistakes in test about the Present Simple tense, structure: “(not) adjective + ENOUGH TO - infinitive”, future with BE GOING TO, Reflexive Pronouns, Modal verbs: MUST, HAVE TO, OUGHT TO, Why - Because,

B/ Objective: By the end of the lesson, students will be able to know more mistakes in test.C/ Teaching aids: Paper test.D/ Procedure:E/ 8ASection I: Choose the word that has the underlined part pronounced differently (1 m):1) A. enough [i'nʌf] B. sound [saund] C. countless ['kauntlis] D. found [faund]

2) A. sorry ['sɔri]B. bored [bɔ:] C. orphan ['ɔ:fən] D. cover ['kʌvə]

3) A. character ['kæriktə]B. chore [t∫ɔ:] C. choose [t∫u:z] D. child [t∫aild]

4) A. demonstrate ['demənstreit] B. experiment [iks'periment]

C. emigrate ['emigreit] D. excellent ['eksələnt]

Section II: Choose the best word or phrase words and underlined (1 m):1) A. What 2) C. to do 3) B. not old enough 4) D. themselvesSection III: Read the passage, then answer the questions: (1.5ms)



1) => He is a teacher of English. 2) => He teaches English at Truong Dinh High School.3) => He’s very tall but rather slim.Section IV: Combine the following sentences, use the structures

“ (not) adjective + ENOUGH TO - infinitive” (1.5ms):1) => This coat isn’t warm enough for me to wear it in winter.2) => She is beautiful and intelligent enough to become Miss World.3) => The weather is fine enough to go camping.Section V: Put the verbs in the brackets into the correct form or tense (2 ms):1) Bad driving (cause) causes many accidents. 2) Nga and Hoa (see) are going to see a movie tonight. 3) Sue can (speak) speak VietNamese very well. 4) Mozart (write) wrote more than 600 pieces music. Section VI: Find the mistakes and write the correct form (1 m):1) Why mustn’t children play by with match? 2) I’m going to being be home late tonight. Section VII: Rewrite the sentences using the words given (1 m):1) => He isn't old enough to drive a car. 2) => Shall we go on a picnic to the countryside this weekend? Section VIII: Write a paragraph about your friend, using the following questions ( - What is his/ her name?/ - How ols is he/ she?/ - What does he/ she look like?/ - What is he/ she like?/ - Where does he/ she live?/ - Who does he/ she live with?/ - Who are his/ her friends?) (1 m): His name is Nguyen Manh Trung. He is fifteen years old. He is tall and fat, and has short curly hair. He is sociable, generous and kind. He lives at 24 Nguyen Du Street in Ho Chi Minh City and with his mother, father and two younger sisters. His hobies are swimming and reading. His best friends are Nam, Thanh and Phong.F/ 8BSection I: Choose the word that has the underlined part pronounced differently (1 m):1) A. enough [i'nʌf] B. sound [saund] C. countless ['kauntlis] D. found [faund]

2) A. sorry ['sɔri] B. bored [bɔ:] C. orphan ['ɔ:fən] D. cover ['kʌvə]

3) A. character ['kæriktə]B. chore [t∫ɔ:] C. choose [t∫u:z] D. child [t∫aild]

4) A. demonstrate ['demənstreit] B. experiment [iks'periment]

C. emigrate ['emigreit] D. excellent ['eksələnt]

Section II: Choose the best word or phrase words and underlined (2 ms):1) D. Where 2) A. What 3) B. to go 4) C. to do5) C. not old enough 6) D. themselves 7) B. under/ between 8) A. so thatSection III: Read the passage, then answer the questions: (1.5ms)1) => He is a teacher of English. 2) => He teaches English at Truong Dinh High School.3) => He’s very tall but rather slim.Section IV: Combine the following sentences, use the structures

“ (not) adjective + ENOUGH TO - infinitive” (1.5ms):1) => This coat isn’t warm enough to wear it in winter.2) => She is beautiful and intelligent enough to become Miss World.3) => The weather is fine enough to go camping.



Section V: Put the verbs in the brackets into the correct form or tense (2 ms):1) Bad driving (cause) causes many accidents. 2) Nga and Hoa (see) are going to see a movie tonight. 3) Sue can (speak) speak VietNamese very well. 4) Mozart (write) wrote more than 600 pieces music. Section VI: Write a paragraph about Trung, using the information in the box (2.5 ms):

Name: Nguyen Manh TrungAge: 15Appearance: tall, fat, short curly hairCharaters: sociable, generous, kindAddress: 24 Nguyen Du Street, Ho Chi Minh CityFamily: mother, father and two younger sistersHobbies: swimming, readingFriends: Nam, Thanh, Phong

His name is Nguyen Manh Trung. He is fifteen years old. He is tall and fat, and has short curly hair. He is sociable, generous and kind. He lives at 24 Nguyen Du Street in Ho Chi Minh City and with his mother, father and two younger sisters. His hobies are swimming and reading. His best friends are Nam, Thanh and Phong.Bảng thống kê đ iểm :

LớpSỉ số

0 đến 2 > 2 đến < 5 5 đến < 7 7 đến < 9 9 đến 10SL % SL % SL % SL % SL %

8A 328B 31

Unit 5: STUDY HABITS

I/ Aim: Helping students:- To talk about school subjects.- To ask for and describe recess activities.



II/ Language focus:- Present progressive tense.- Adverbs of frequency.

III/ Vocabulary: (to) chat, (to) enjoiy, (to) fix, (to) relax, (to) repair, (to) score, (to) swap, energetic (adj), famous (adj), portable (adj), present (adj), an appliance, an atlas, a bell, a blind man’s bluff, a calculator, a drawing, an equation, an event, an experiment, a globe, a household, a marbles, a pen pal, an essay,


Lesson 1 Getting startedListen and read

Reading the dialogue between Jim and his Mom for details about his study.

Lesson 2 Speak Listen

Practice speaking about study.Practice listening about the study.

Lesson 3 Read 1 Reading for details about different ways of learning vocabulary.

Lesson 4 Read 2 Reading for details about different ways of learning vocabulary.

Lesson 5 Write Practice writing letters to friends.Lesson 6 Language focus

1 - 3 - 4 Further practice in adverbs of manner, the Modal: Should, commands, requests and advice in reported speech.


Unit 5: STUDY HABITSLesson 1: GETTING STARTED Page: 46 LISTEN AND READ Page: 46 - 47 A/Aim: Reading the dialogue for details.B/ Objective: By the end of the lesson, students will be able to understand the dialogue

between Jim and his Mom about his study.C/ Teaching aids: Textbooks.D/ Procedure:

Teacher’s and Students’ activites

Content

+ Warm up: Ask students to write as many subjects as they can on the blackboard. Ask students some questions.

1/ Network:Subjects at school

Possible answers: - Geography - Literature - Physics - Physical education - English - Biography - Music - Fine Arts - Civic education - Chemistry - Technology

2/ Chatting:a) What subjects are you good at? Bad at?b) What subjects do you like best? Why?



+ Pre reading:- Bookshut. - Eliciting. - Recording.. Check: Rub out and Remember. Ask students to read the statements (on posters) and predict they are true or false. Ask students to share with their partners.

+ While reading: Get students to read the dialogue and check their prediction. Give feedback. Ask students to correct false statements. Ask students to work in pairs, answering the questions on page 47. Ask students to work in open pairs then closed pairs.

+ Post reading: Ask students to work in group. Ask students to stand up and ask each other the question: “What subject do you need to improve?” They have to write the names and the subjects that their friends answer. Give feedback.

c) How often do you have Math? Literature? English? 3/ Vocabulary:

- a report card [ri'pɔ:t'kɑ:d] : phiếu điểm(realia)- pronunciation [prə,nʌnsi'ei∫n] (n): cách phát âm(mime)- (to) improve [im'pru:v] : trao dồi (situation)- (to) be proud of [bi: praud əv] : hãnh diện, tự hào (translation)- (to) try one’s best [trai wʌn’s best] : cố gắng(translation)

4/ True - False statements:a) Tim was out when his mother called him.b) Tim’s mother met his teacher at school.c) Tim’s report is poor.d) Tim needs to improve his Spanish grammar.e) Tim promised to try his best in learning Spanish. Answer keys:

a) F b) T c) F d) F e) Ta) Tim was in the living room/ at home.c) Tim’s report is excellent.d) Tim needs to improve his Spanish pronunciation.

5/ Answer the questions:a) Who is Miss Jackson? => She is Tim’s teacher.b) What did Miss Jackson give Tim’s mother?=> She gave Tim’s mother his report card.c) How did Tim study this semester? => He worked really hard.d) What did Miss Jackson say Tim should do? => She said Tim should work harder on his Spanish

pronunciation.e) What did Tim’s mother give him at the end of the

conversation? => She gave him a dictionary.

6/ Survey:Name What subjectMai Literature



Ask students who needs to improve the same subject work in groups and discuss how to improve.

E/ Homework: Write the way how to improve the subject that you are not good at.

Week 9: Date: Saturday, October 15th, 2012Period 27:

Unit 5: STUDY HABITSLesson 2: SPEAK Page: 47

LISTEN Page: 48

A/ Aim: Practicing speaking.B/ Objective: By the end of the lesson, students will be able to talk about their study habits.C/ Teaching aids: Textbooks, picture.D/ Procedure:


Content

+ Warm up: Ask students to write their ideas on the board. Ask students to work in pairs, asking their partners questions and taking notes of the answers.

+ Presentation:- Bookshut. - Eliciting. - Recording.

+ Practice:

I/ Speak:1/ Brainstorming:

speak English to friends in class exercises

do grammar watch English TVread English story listen to the English radio program

2/ Vocabular y :- civic education ['sivik edju:'kei∫n] (n) môn giáo dục công dân(translation)- technology [tek'nɔlədʒi] (n): môn công nghệ(translation)- biology [bai'ɔlədʒi] (n): môn sinh học(translation)- (to) watch films in English [wɔt∫film in 'iηgli∫] : xem phim

bằng tiếng Anh (translation)- (to) go to English clubs [gou tu: 'iηgli∫klʌbs] : đi đến câu lạc

bộ tiếng Anh (translation)


How to improve your English?


Ask students to work in groups of 4 or 5 to report what they have known about their partners’ study. Students can use this structure to talk.

+ Further practice: Have them work in pairs. Give feedback. Have students work in pairs, practicing asking and answering the questions.


. Check: Rub Out and Remember. Ask students to look at Sarah Chen’s report and predict the missing information and then compare with their partners.

+ While listening: Get students to listen to the tape and check their prediction. Ask students to answer some questions about Sarah

3/ Speaking:- Use the sentences on page 48, interview each other.- Notice the Commands, requests and advice in reported

speechEx: S1: How much time do you spend on your study

English? S2: I spend about one hour studying English

everyday. S1 will review in front of the class:- He / She (Nam) said (that) he spent about one hour

studying English everyday- In reported speech, verb “ spend” => spent

4/ Answer the questions:a) When do you do your homework?=> after school; after dinner; late at night; etc.b) Who helps you with your homework?=> your parents; your brothers/ sisters; a friend; etc.c) How much time do you spend on Math? English? History?

Literature, etc?=> half an hour; two hours; less/more than an hour;etc.d) Which subject do you need to improve?=> Biolology; Physics; Chemistry; Geography; etc.e) What do you do in improve your English?=> do grammar exercises; read English stories, etc.

5/ Speaking:II/ Listen:

1/ Vocabulary:- behaviour [bi'heivjə] (n): hành vi, cử chỉ(translation)- participation [pɑ:,tisi'pei∫n] (n): sự tham gia(explaination)- co-operation [kou,ɔpə'rei∫n] (n): sự hợp tác(translation)- satisfactory [,sætis'fæktəri] (adj): thoả mãn( translation)- unsatisfactory [,ʌn,sætis'fæktəri] (adj): không thoả mãn(antonym)

2/ Prediction: Answer keys:

1 + c 2 + d 3 + a 4 + e 5 + b3/ Open prediction:

a) days present (1)b) days absent (2)c) behavior - participant (3)d) listening (4)e) speaking (5)f ) reading (6)



Chen’s report card. Ask students to work on their own to answer the questions. Give feedback.

+ Post listening: Ask students to ask and answer

g) writing (7)4/ Listen:

Answer keys: (1) 87 days present(2) 5 days absent(3) participation: S(4) Listening: C(5) Speaking:A(6) Reading: A(7) Writing: BTape transcript: Miss Blake: Good evening, Mrs Chen.Mrs Chen: Good evening.Miss Blake: I’m pleased to tell you that Sarah has worked

very hard this year and her gradesare very good.Mrs Chen: I’m so pleased to hear that.Miss Blake: She missed 5 days of school mdue to sickness

but an attendance of 87 days for the whole term is acceptable. Both her participation and cooperation are safisfactory. So, there’re no problems there.

Mrs Chen: How is she doing in English?Miss Blake: Her speaking and reading are excillent and her

writing is good. If she works a bit harder on her writing skills, she should get an A for writing next term.

Mrs Chen: How about listening comprehension?Miss Blake: I’m afraid she’s not very good at that. I gave her

a C.Mrs Chen: How can we help her improve?Miss Blake: Get her to watch English TV if possible, and

encourage her to listen to English radio programs. Also, I have some cassettes here which you can borrow.

Mrs Chen: Thank you very much, Miss Blake. We really appreciate your help.

5/ Answer the question:a) Who are Nga’s parents? => Her parent is Mrs Chen.b) What’s Nga’s teacher name?=> Her teacher name’s Miss Blake.c) What subjectwasreported? For what term? => English. d) What subject helps you know different countries and their

people? => Speaking English quite well. However she does need to

improvew her listening skill. Dương Quang Minh English 8 67


e) What does S stand for? What about F, U, A, B, C, D? => S stands for Satisfactory, F for Fail, U for

Unsatisfactory, A for Excillent, B for Good, C for Fair, D for Poor .

6/ Survey:

E/ Homework: Ask students to write a short paragraph about their friends, using the information from the survey.

Week 10: Date: Tuesday, October 16th, 2012Period 28:

Unit 5: STUDY HABITSLesson 4: READ 1 Page: 49

A/Aim: Helping students to read the text for details.B/ Objective: By the end of the lesson, students will be able to understand the text and get

specific information.C/ Teaching aids: Textbooks.D/ Procedure:


Content

+ Warm up: Ask students some questions about their English learning.



Ask students to work in pairs to make a list of the

1/ Chatting:a) Do you like learning English?b) How many new words do you try to learn a day?c) What do you do when you read a new word?d) How do you learn/ remember new words?

2/ Vocabulary:- mother tongue ['mʌđətʌη] : tiếng mẹ đẻ(example)- (to) underline [,ʌndə'lain] : gạch dưới(example)- (to) highlight ['hailait] : làm nổi bật(example)- (to) come across [kʌm ə'krɔs] : tình cờ gặp(translation)- (to) stick [stick] : gắn, đính(mime)mother tongue underline stickhighlight come across

3/ Brainstorming:- learn by heart




ways how a language learner can learn new words.

+ While reading: Ask students to read the statements on page 50 then read the text and decide which is true and which is false. Give feedback.

- translate it into mother tongue - learn through example sentences- write each word on one piece of paper and put it into the

pocket to learn whenever- write it on a small piece of paper and stick everywhere in

the house4/ True - False statements:

a) All language leaners write the meaning of the new words in their mother tongue.

b) Some leaners writes examples of the words they want to learn.

c) Every learner tries to learn all the new words they come across.

d) Many learners only learn the new words that are inportant.Answer keys:

a) F b) T c) F d) Ta) Some language leaners write the meaning of the new

words in their mother tongue.c) Some learners try to learn all the new words they come

across.

E/ Homework: Write the ways of learning words that you think are the best for you.



Week 10: Date: Monday, October 15th, 2012Period 29:

Unit 5: STUDY HABITSLesson 4: READ 2 Page: 49

A/Aim: Helping students to read the text for details.B/ Objective: By the end of the lesson, students will be able to understand the text and get

specific information.C/ Teaching aids: Textbooks.D/ Procedure:


Content

+ Warm up: Ask students some questions about their English learning.

+ Pre reading: Ask students to work in pairs to make a list of the ways how a language learner can learn new words.

+ While reading: Have students work in pairs to answer the questions on page 50. Ask students to practice asking and answering questions in open pairs and closed pairs.

1/ Brainstorming:- learn by heart

- translate it into mother tongue - learn through example sentences- write each word on one piece of paper and put it into the

pocket to learn whenever- write it on a small piece of paper and stick everywhere in

the house2/ Answer the questions:

a) Do learners learn words in the same way? => No. They learn words in different ways.b) Why do some learner write example sentence with new

words? => Because they help them to remember the use of new

words.c) What do some learners do in order to remember new

words? => They write example, put the words and their meaning

on stickers, underline or highlight them.d) Why don’t some learners learn all the new words they

come across? => They may think they can’t do so. Instead, they learn

only important words.e) What is necessary in learning words? => Revision is necessary in learning words.f) How shopuld you learn words? => Learners should try different ways of learning words to




+ Post reading: Ask students to work in groups of 4 or 5 to interview one another and tick the ways they have used to learn new words.

Ask students to report about their group.

find out what is the best.3/ Survey:

Ways of learning words Nga Hoa …1. Make a list of words their meanings

and learn them by heart.2. Write sample sentences with new

words.3. Stick new words somewhere in the

house.4. Underline or highlight the words.5. Read story in English.6. Learn words through songs.

v

vExchange: “ Hoa learns words by making a list of words, their meaning and learning them by heart. She also reads stories in English.”

E/ Homework: Write the ways of learning words that you think are the best for you.

Week 10: Date: Friday, October 19th, 2012Period 30:

Unit 5: STUDY HABITSLesson 5: WRITE Page: 50 - 51

A/ Aim: Writing letters to friends.B/ Objective: By the end of the lesson, students will be able to know the format of a

friendly letter and practice writing a letter to a friend.C/ Teaching aids: Textbooks, posters, pictures.D/ Procedure:


Content

+ Warm up: Ask students some questions dealing with writing letters.


1/ Chatting:a) Have you ever written to someone?b) To whom do you usually write?c) What do you often write about?

2/ Vocabulary:- Lunar New Year Festival ['lu:nə 'nju:'jə: 'festivəl] : Tết

Nguyên Đán(explanation)



. Check: Rub out and Remember. Ask students to put the parts of the letter in the correct order. Give feedback. Ask students to read the letter on page 51 to check their order. Ask students to label each section with the correct letter. Ask students to work in pairs and answwer some questions. Ask students to practice asking and answering the questions.

+ While writing: Ask students to do exercise 2 on page 51, students have to imagine that they are Lan and write a letter to her penpal Donna in Sana Francisco, using the given information.

- enjoyable [in'dʒɔiəbl] (adj): thú vị(translation)- (to) celebrate ['selibretid] : kỷ niệm(example)

3/ Ordering:a) Opening b) Closingc) The date d) Body of the lettere) Signature f) Writer’s addressAnswer keys:

1 – f 2 – c 3 – a 4 – d 5 – b 6 – e4/ Labeling:

5/ Answer the questions:a) Who wrote the letter? To whom? => Hoa wrote a letter to Tim, her penpal.b) What are there in the heading ? => There are the writer’s name and the date.c) What is the main part of the letter? => The body of the letter is the main part.d) What did Hoa received a few day ago ? => She received her first semester report.e) Is Hoa good at Math? => No. She isn’t.f) What subject is Hoa good at? => Sciene, English and History.g) Where is she going to celebrate the Lunar New Year

Festival ? => She is going to Hue to celebrate the festival with her

grandmother.5/ Substitution writing:

Answers: "Tinh Phong Junier High School October 7th, 2009 Dear Donna, Thanks for your letter. I’m glad to hear you had an interesting, enjoyable Mother’s Day. We received our second semester report last month.i got good grades for Geography, Physics and Math but my English and History results were poor. My teacher advises me to improve English and History. I think I have to study harder next school year. In a few weeks, we’re going to celebrate the mid Autumn festival. That is an Autumn moom festival in VietNam. This



+ Post writing: Ask some students to read aloud their letters and correct the mistakes.

afternoon, I’m going to Ha Long Bay with my aunt and uncle by bus and I’m going to stay with them until the festival comes. I’ll send a postcard from there. Write soon and tell me all your news. Best, ........."

6/ Correction:

E/ Homework: Write a letter to your friend to tell him/ her about your second semester report card about your Summer holiday.

Week 11: Date: Friday, October 19th, 2012Period 31:

Unit 5: STUDY HABITSLesson 6: LANGUAGE FOCUS 1 - 3 - 4 Page: 52 - 53

A/ Aim: Further practice the modal “Should”and commands, requests and advice in reported speech.

B/ Objective: By the end of the lesson, students will be able to use modal “Should” as an advice and use reported speech with commands, requests and advice.

C/ Teaching aids: Textbooks, posters, pictures.D/ Procedure:


Content

+ Warm up: Ask students to find 8 words about study in the wordsquare.

+ Presentation:

1/ Wordsquare:P R O N O U N C E LR E A D I M O N C IA A I B T K A E P ST M W R I T E Z R EI C E S T U D Y D N

Answer keys: pronounce, study, read, write,speak, report card, practice, listen,

I/ Language Focus 1:



. Setting the scene: “Complete the following sentences with the words given”. Help students distinguish the use of adjectives and adverbs.

+ Practice: Ask students ti work in pairs to do the exercise 1 on page 52. Students use the adverbs in the box: Softly, well, fast, badly, hard to fill in the dialogue. Give feedback. Ask students to practice the dialogue in open pairs then closed pairs.

+ Presentation:. Set the scene: Introduce Tim’s mother and Tim’s teacher - Miss Jacson by drawing their faces (pictograms). They are talking about Tim’s study. Ask students to complete the dialogue between them. Ask some pairs of students to practice the dialogue. Introduce Tim and his mother. They are at home and talking about what Miss Jacson said.

1/ Model sentences:a) Complete the sentences:- Lan has a (1) ...... voice and she usually speaks (2) ...... .Answer keys: (1) soft (2) softly.b) Form:- S + V + a/ an + adjective + noun- S + BE + adjective- S + V + adverb

c) Use: - Adjective modifies ( the noun after it the subject).- Adverb modies the verb of the sentence.

2/ Complete the dialogue:a) Hoa: Does Mrs Nga speak English? Lan: Oh, yes. She speak English (0) well.b) Hoa: Ba always gets excellent grades. Lan: That’s because he studies (1) hard.c) Hoa: That’s our bus! Lan: Run (2) fast and we might catch it.d) Hoa: I’m very sorry. I know I behaved (3) badly. Lan: It’s all right.e) Hoa: I can’t hear you, Lan. Lan: Sorry, but I’m speaking (4) softly because I have a

sore throat.II/ Language Focus 3:

1/ Complete the dialogue:a) Miss Jacson: (1) Can you give Tim this (2) dictionary .Tim’s mother: Yes.(3) of (4)course. Thanks (5) a (6) lot.Miss Jacson: His grade are (7) good. But he (8) should work (9) harder on his Spanish (10) pronunciation.Answer keys:

(1) can (2) dictionary (3) of (4) course (5) a (6) lot (7) good (8) should (9) harder (10) pronunciation

b) Tim’s mother: Miss Jacson asked me (1)to give (2) you this (3) dictionary.

Tim: Yes, I know. Tim’s mother: Miss Jacson said (4) you (5)should work

(6) harder on (7) your Spanish (8) pronunciation.

Tim: I’ll try (9) my best on (10) improve.Answers:

(1) to (2) you (3) dictionary (4) you (5) should(6) harder (7) your (8) pronunciation

(9) my (10) improve*) Check understanding:- What did Miss Jacson say to Tim’s mother?“ Can you give Tim this dictionary?”- What did Tim’s mother report it to Tim?



+ Pratice: Ask students to work in pairs to do exercise 3 on page 53 ( explain the situation clearly).

Ask students to work with their partners to do exercise 4 on page 53. Ask students to report Miss Jacson’s advice to Tim’s mother in their conversation. Call on some students to practice in pairs and correct their pronunciation. Ask students to work in closed pairs.

“ Miss Jacson asked me to give you this dictionary.”**) Form:

ask/ tell + someone + to do something- What else did Miss Jacson say?

“ Tim should work harder on his Spanish pronunciation.”

- What did Tim’s mother report it to Tim? “ Miss Jacson said you should work harder on your Spanish pronunciation.”

2 / Language Focus 3:a) “Please wait for me outside my office.” => Miss Jacson asked me to wait for her outside her office.b) “Please give Tim his report card for this semester.” => Miss Jacson told me to give you your report card for

this semester.c) “Can you help Tim with his Spanish pronunciation?” => Miss Jacson asked me to help you with your Spanish

pronunciation.d) “Can you meet me next week?” => Miss Jacson told me to meet her next week.

3 / Language Focus 4:a) Tim should spend more time on Spanish pronunciation. => Miss Jacson said you should spend more time on

Spanish pronunciation.b) Tim should practice speaking Spanish every day. => Miss Jacson said you should practice speaking Spanish

every day.c) Tim should listen to Spanish conversation on TV. => Miss Jacson said you should listen to Spanish

conversation on TV. d) Tim should practice reading aloud passage in Spanish. => Miss Jacson said you should practice reading aloud

passage in Spanish.e) Tim should use this dictionary to find out how to

pronounce Spanish words. => Miss Jacson said you should use this dictionary to find

out how to pronounce Spanish words.

E/ Homework: Rewrite commands, requests and advice in Reported Speech.



Unit 6: THE YOUNG PIONEERS CLUB

I/ Aim: Helping students- To talk about the future.- To ask for favors and offer assistance.- To write a letter telling about the future plan.II/ Language focus:1. Present Simple with future meaning.2. Gerund.3. Modal verbs: may, can, could,III/ Vocabulary: (to) enroll, (to) fill out, (to) recycle, (to) tutor, (to) unite, an application, a citizenship, a drawing, a fund, an interest, a position, resources (n), a scout, a tire, a tutor, academic (adj), co-educational, IV/ Allocation unit:

Lesson 1 Getting StartedListen and Read

Reading a dialogue for details.

Lesson 2 SpeakListen

Practicing asking for favors and responding to favors.Listening for details and practicing offering and responding to assistance.

Lesson 3 Read Reading for details about the Youth Organization of the Boy Scouts of America.

Lesson 4 Write Write a letter about the future plan.Lesson 5 Language Focus 3

Week 11: Date: Friday,October 26th, 2012Period 32:

Unit 6: THE YOUNG PIONEERS CLUBLesson 1: GETTING STARTED Page: 54 LISTEN AND READ Page: 54 - 55

A/ Aim: Reading a dialogue for details.B/ Objective: By the end of the lesson, students will be able to understand the dialogue.C/ Teaching aids: Textbooks, posters.D/ Procedure:


Content

+ Warm up: Ask students some questions about their activities and their summer holidays.

1/ Chatting:a) What do you usually do on your summer holiday?b) Are you members of the Young Pioneers and Youth

Organization?c) Are there any activity programs for the summer?



Get students go to the board and write.

+ Pre reading:- Bookshut.- Eliciting.- Recordimg.

. Check: Rub out and Remember.

. Set the scene: Nga is a student in grade eight. She wants to enroll in the activities for the summer.

+ While reading: Ask students to listen and read the dialogue at the same time.

+ Post reading: Get students to work in pairs and complete Nga’s particulars. Have students to work in pairs to answer the questions on page 61. Have students work in pairs to practice asking and answering.

d) Do you take part in them?e) What activity do you like most?

2/ Vocabulary:- (to) enroll [in'roul] : đăng ký vào học (translation)- an application form [,æpli'kei∫n'fɔ:m] : đơn xin việc (visual)- (to) fill out [fil aut]: điền vào mẫu đơn(translation)- (to) sign [sain] : ký tên(translation) - interest ['intrəst] (n): sở thích(translation)

3/ Fill in the blanks:Name: Pham Mai Nga.Home adress: 5 Tran Phu Street.Phone number: No.Date of birth: April 22nd, 1989.Interest: drawing, out door activities and acting.

4/ Answer the questions:a) What’s her name? => Her name’s Pham Mai Nga.b) Where does she live? => She lives at 5 Tran Phu Street.c) Does she have a phone number? => No, she doesn’t.d) What’s her date of birth?=> Her date of birth is on April 22nd, 1989.e) What are her hobits?=> Drawing, out door activities and acting.

E/ Homework: Write their friend’s hobbies.



Week 11: Date: Friday , October 26th, 2012Period 33:

Unit 6: THE YOUNG PIONEERS CLUBLesson 2: SPEAK Page: 55 - 56 LISTEN Page: 61 - 62

A/ Aim: Practicing asking for favors.B/ Objective: By the end of the lesson, students will be able to ask for favors and respond

to favors. C/ Teaching aids: Textbooks, posters.D/ Procedure:


Content

+ Warm up:+ Presetation:

- Bookshut.- Eliciting.- Recordimg. Get students to practice speaking in pairs.

+ Production: Set the scene then ask students to make a dialogue between Mrs Ngoc and Hoa. Ask students to listen to the song and fill in the missing words then share with their partners. Ask students to practice the dialogue in pairs. Ask students to make similar dialogues about some of the following situations.

+ Presentation: Ask students to listen to

I/ Listen:1/ Listen to a song:

2/ Vocabulary:- (to) unite [ju:'nait] : đoàn kết(translation)- peace [pi:s] (n): hòa bình(translation)- (to) hold hands [hould hænd] : bắt tay(translation)- (to) shout out [∫aut aut] : hét to(translation)

3/ Guess the missing words:Tape transcript:“ Children of our land (1) unite, Let’s sing for (2) peace, Let’s sing for (3) right, Let’s sing for the (4) love between (5) North and (6) South, Oh, children (7) of our land , unite, Children of the (8) world hold hands, Let’s (9) show our love from (10) place to place, Let’s shout (11) out loud, Let’s make a (12) stand, Oh, children of the (13) world hold hands.”

4/ Listening:Answer keys:



the dialogue between a receptionist and a tourist. Ask some questions to check students understanding. a) What does the receptionist say? b) What’s a favor? c) Another way to offer assistance? d) How do you say to respond to assistance? Ask students to copy down the following phrases.

+ Production: Ask students to practice three dialogues in pairs. First, call on some pairs of students to play the roles of A and B. Then have students practice in close pairs. Give a situation, then write an open dialogue on the board. Ask students to complete the dialogue. Call on some students to practice the dialogue in front of the class. Ask students to work in closed pairs. Give another situation: You want to help a tourist who needs to find the nearest police station because he has lost money. Ask students to work in pairs to make a similar dialogue then practice with their partners. Move around the class and help students.

(1) unite (2) peace (3) right (4) love (5) North (6) South (7) of (8) world (9) show (10) place (11) out (12) stand (13) world

5) Speaking:Mrs Ngoc: Could you do me a favor, please?Hoa: Sure. What can I do for you?Mrs Ngoc: Can you help me carry my bag? I’ve hurt my arm.Hoa: Certainly. I’ll help you.Mrs Ngoc: Thank you very much.That’s very kind of you.

6/ Structure (b):Receptionist: May I help you?Tourist: Yes. Can you show me the way to the neartest bank?Receptionist: Sure. Turn right when you get out of the hotel. Turn left of the first corner. It’s on your right.Tourist: Thank you very much.Offering assistance Responding assistance+ May I help you?+ Do you need any help?+ Let me help you.

+ Yes. That’s very kind of you.+ Yes. Thank you.+ No. Thank you. I’m fine.

7/ Complete the dialogue:A: May I help you?B: Yes. Thank you. Could you fill in this form for me?A: Do you need any help?B: No. Thank you. I’m fine.A: Oh. This bag is heavy.B: Let me help you.A: Yes. That’s very kind of you.

8/ Speaking:Receptionist: May I help you?Tourist: Yes. Can you show me the way to the neartest bank?Receptionist: Sure. Turn right when you get out of the hotel. Turn left of the first corner. It’s on your right.Tourist: Thank you very much.



E/ Homework: Write on your notebook the dialogue between you and a tourist who lost money.


Unit 6: THE YOUNG PIONEERS CLUBLesson 4: READ Page: 57

A/ Aim: Reading comprehension the passage about the Boy Scout of America.B/ Objective: By the end of the lesson, students will be able to know more about a youth organization – the Boy Scouts of America (BSA).C/ Teaching aids: Textbooks, cards.D/ Procedure:


Content

+ Warm up: Write six words whose letters are in disorder.

+ Pre reading:- Bookshut.- Elciting.- Recording.

. Check: Slap the board.

Ask students to gues these statements.

+ While reading: Ask students to read the

1/ Jumbled words:a) racchtaer = character b) thauolgh = althoughc) mai = aim d) pexalin = explaine) nessmsibuan = businessman f) iojn = join

2/ Vocabulary:- (to) encourage [in'kʌridʒ] : cổ vũ(explanation: give the verb which means to give somebody support)- citizenship ['sitizn∫ip] : quyền công dân(translation: what’s “quyền công dân” in English)- coeducational [,kəʊedju: 'kei ∫(ə)n] (adj): giáo dục chung(translation)- (to) lead – led – led [led] : dẫn dắt(translation)- (to) establish [is'tæbli∫] : thiết lập( synonym: give the synonym of to start, to create an organization)- voluntary ['vɔləntri] (adj): tình nguyện

establish lead encouragecoeducational citizenship voluntary

3/ True – False statments:a) The Boy Scout of America is a youth organization.b) Scouting began in America.c) William Boyce is a businessman in London.



passage on page 57 and check their predictions. Give feedback.

Ask students to word in pairs to do exercise 1 on page 57.

Ask students to ask and answer in front of the class. Ask students to work in pairs.

+ Post reading: Interview a member of the BoysScouts of America. Call some pairs of students to play the roles of the interviewer and the member of BSA. Ask students to work in closed pairs.

d) Boys and girls can join BSA.e) The Scouting Association is the biggest voluntary youth organization in the world.Answers keys: a) T b) F c) F d) F e) Tb) Scouting began in England.c) William Boyce is an American businessman.d) BSA is mainly for boys.

4/ Fill in the missing dates:a) 1907 / the beginning of the Scout Association.b) 1909 / William Boys was introduced to scouting.c) 1910 / the founding of the Girl Guides Association and Camp Fire Boys and Girls.d) 1994 / over five million scouts in the BSA.

5/ Answer the questions:a) When did scouting begin in England?=> Scouting began in England in 1907.b) What led to the Scouts Association crossing the Atlantic in 1910? => The meeting between a boy scout and Mr William Boyce led to the Scout Association crossing the Atlantic in 1910.c) What are the scouting groups that girls can join? => Girls can join in the Girls Guides Association and Camp Fire Boys and Girls.d) What are the three aims of the scouting program? => They are building characters, good citizenship and personal fitness.

6/ Interview:a) When did scouting begin? => In 1907 in England.b) When were the aims established?=> They were escablished in 1907. They are bulding the characters, good citizentship and personal fitness.c) Can a girl join the BSA? => No. It os mainly for boys but girl can join similar organizations such as the Girl Guides Association or the Coeducational Camp fire Boys and Girls.d) Is it the largest voluntary Youth Organization in the World? => Yes, of course.e) Are you happy to join the BSA? => Yes. I’m happy to be a member of this organization.

E/ Homework: Write the summary of the BSA..



Week 12: Date: Wednesday, October 14th, 2011Period 35:

Unit 6: THE YOUNG PIONEERS CLUBLesson 5: WRITE Page: 58 - 59

A/ Aim: Write a letter.B/ Objective: By the end of the lesson, students will be able to write a letter about a future plan using “be going to”.C/ Teaching aids: Textbooks.D/ Procedure:


Content

+ Warm up: Ask students the usage of “be going to’ (to express a future plan). Get students to make the sentence: “I’m going to + verb”. The verb have to begin with a letter from A to Z. Give feedback.


Ask students to read the notice – To: All Y and Y members on page 58. Ask students some questions to check their understanding. Get students to work in pairs to answer questions. Give feedback and get some students to wotk in pairs.

1/ Revision of the structure:“be going to”

T: I’m going to accept their invitation.S1: I’m going to buy a new bicycle.S2: I’m going to clean the house.............

2/ Vocabulary:- (to) raise fund [reiz fʌnd] : gây quỹ(translation)- a bank [bæηk] : bờ (sông, hồ)(visual)- natural resources ['næt∫rəl ri'sɔ:s] : nguồn tài nguyên thiên nhiên(example: coal, oil, iron, ......under the ground or the sea.)

3/ Answer the questions:a) What do member of the Y and Y have to do in the

recycling program? => They have to collect glass, paper and cans to send them

for recycling.b) What is the purpose of the recycling program? => The purpose of the recycling program is to save

natural resources and to earn money for the organization.



Ask some questions to set the scene:. Who writes the letter?– Nga .. To whom does Nga write? – Linh. . Is Nga a member of Y and Y? – Yes. . What does Nga write to Linh about? – She writes about the programs of her school Y and Y that she is going to participate in. Get students to work in pairs to fill in the gaps in the letter. Give feedback.

+ While writing:. Set the scene: Hoa talk to her aunt about the Y & Y Green Group, about the activities that she is going to do. Ask students to read the dialogue between Hoa and her aunt. Ask them some questions to check their understand.- Why does Hoa look happy? – Because she is able to join in the Y & Y Green Group. - What is she going to do in the environment month? – She is going to clean the lakes banks, plant trees and flowers in the park and water them. - What are they doing to earn money for their school Y & Y? – They are going to plant young trees to sell to some schools.

+ Post writing: More around the letter and choose four letters from four

c) What other programs can menbers of the Y and Y participate in?

=> They can participate in other programs such as raising funds for the poor, helping street children, planting trees and flowers along the sidewalks or in the parks.

4/ Complete the letter:Answers keys:“Dear Linh, I’m glad to tell you that I’m going to have interesting activities. The Y & Y is (0) planting to help the (1) community. I will participate in its (2) recycling program. In this program, we will (3) collect glass, used paper and cans. Then we will (4) send them for (5) recycling. I hope I can (6) save natural resources and (7) raise (earn) some money for my school Y & Y in these activities. I also think about (8) participating in either (9) planting trees and flowers or (10) helping street children. It is really interesting, isn’t it? Write to me soon and tell me all your news. Love, Nga.”

5/ Answer the questions:a) Wat activities do VietNamese and American teenagers do the same? => They are watching TV, listening to some music, going to the movies, helping the old people, goimg shopping.b) Name some youth organization that VietNamese teenagers can attend.=> They are Youth peers, some clubs for teenagers.c) Which activity is the most popular?=> It is eating fast food restaurant.

6/ Writing:Suggested letter: “ Dear Mom and Dad, I’m very happy to tell you that I’m able to join in the Y & Y Green Group of my school. The Green Group is holding an environment month plan. We are going to clean the lakes banks on weekends. We are also going to plant trees and flowers in the park and water them every afternoon after class. We are planting young trees to sell to other schools. I hope that we can bring more green to the city and earn some money for the school Y &



groups. Ask them to stick their letters on the board. Get the whole class to read the four letters and correct them.

Y. The program is very interesting and useful, isn’t it? I’m still in a very good health. I will tell you more about the group activities later. With love, Hoa.”

7/ Correct:E/ Homework: Ask each students to help Hoa write a letter to her parents.


Unit 6: THE YOUNG PIONEERS CLUBLesson 3: Page: 56 LANGUAGE FOCUS 1 - 2-3 Page: 60 - 61

A/ Aim: Listening for details and practicing Present Simple Tense with future meaning and in gerund.

B/ Objective: By the end of the lesson, students will be able to complete a song and to practice Present Simple Tense with future meaning and in gerund.

C/ Teaching aids: Textbooks, posters.D/ Procedure:


Content

+ Warm up:+ Pre listening:

- Bookshut.- Eliciting.- Recordimg.

. Check: Rub out and Remember. Ask students to guess the words to fill in gaps in the song on page 56. Ask them to share with their partners. Give feedback.

+ While listening: Ask students to listen to the song and fill in the

II/ Language Focus 1:1/ Vocabulary:

- a rest home: nhà an dưỡng( explanation: a place where old or sick people are cared for)- a stadium: sân vận động( picture)- favor ['feivə] (n): sự giúp đỡ(translation)

2/ Complete the dialogue:Lan: (1) Where do we collect and empty garbage?Mai: At Dong Xuan Market.Lan: (2) When do we collect (3) an emplty garbage?Mai: On January 9.Lan: (4) What time do we start and (5) finis?Mai: (6) We start at 8 am and (7) finish at 5pm.Answer keys: (1) Where do (2) When do (3) an emplty garbage (4) What time do (5) finish (6) We start at (7) finish at

3/ Practice:



missing words then share with their partners.

+ Presentation:- Bookshut.- Eliciting.- Recordimg.

. Check: Rub out and Remember.. Set the scene: Introduce the dialogue, Lan and Mai are members of the Y &Y organization. They are talking about the summer activity program. Ask students to complete the following dialogue. Ask students to play the roles Mai and Lan to practice the dialogue.

+ Practice: Ask students to practice asking and answering about Y & Y activity program by using the following cues.

Ask students to look at the 6 pictures on page 61 and write the activities under such picture.

Ask students to ask in pairs.

+ Presentation:

a) collect and empty garbage/ Dong Xuan Market- Where do they collect and empty the garbage?=> At Dong Xuan Market.b) plant and water trees/ parks- Where do they plant and water trees? => In the parks.c) help elderly people/ March 26- When do they help the elderly people? => On March 26.d) clean up the streets/ June 2- When do they clean up the streets? => On June 2.e) water trees and flowers/ 6 am – 7 am- What time do they water trees and flowers?=> They start at 6 am and finish at 7 am.f) collect and empty garbage/ 8 am – 5 pm- What time do they collect and empty garbage?=> They start at 6 am and finish at 5 pm.

III/ Language Focus 2:1/ Modal sentences:

a) Modal sentence: - What are Nga’s hobbies? + She likes drawing, out door activities and she also enjoys acting.b) Form:S + Like + gerund ( V-ing) ……… Love Hate Enjoy

2/ Practice:a) play soccer / volleyball - What are your hobbies?=> I like playing soccer and volleyball.b) watch TV / listen to music - What are your hobbies?=> I love watching TV and listening to music.c) read books / do homework - What are his hobbies?=> He hates reading books and doing his homework.d) chat with friends / do the housework - What are her hobbies? => She enjoys chatting with her friends and doing the housework.e) cook meal / decorate the house - What are your hobbies?



Ask students to read the dialogue on page 54 again, then answer the question: - What is after “ likes”? - Drawing. - What is after “enjoys”? - Acting. - What do you call “drawing” and “acting”? - Gerund. - What is the form of “gerunds”? – V-ing. - When do you use “gerund”? – After some verbs: like, love, enjoy, hate, mind ......

+ Practice: Ask students to ask in pairs. Ask some pairs of students to practice asking and answering ( open pairs). Get the whole class to work in pairss ( closed pairs).

Ask students the meaning of the word FAVOR. a) What do you say to ask for a favor? b) When do you ask for favor? c) How do you say to respond to favor? Ask students to copy down the following phrases.

+ Practice: Ask students to work in pairs to do excercise 3a on page 61- 62. They have to use the expressionsin the

box (to ask for favor) to fill in the blanks in the

dialogue.

=> We like cooking meal and decorating the house.3/ Survey:

love like don’t like

hate

playing soccer Namwashing up Namcooking meals Namperforming musicgarderinggathering broken glasseswatching TVcampingplaying badnimtondoing homework

Example: Nam loves playing soccer. He doesn’t like cooking and especially hates washing up.

2/ Vocabulary:

3/ Structure (a):Asking for favor Responding for favor+ Can/ Could you help me?+ Could you do me a favor?+ I need a favor.+ Can/ Could you ...... ?

+ Certainly./ Of course./ Sure.+ no problem.+ What can I do for favor?+ How can I help you?+ I’m sorry. I’m really busy.

4/ Fill in the blanks:A. Woman: Can/ Could you help me, please? Man: Yes, certainly. Woman: Can you buy a tickat for me?B.Old woman: Could you do me a favor? Boy: What can I do for you? Old woman: Can you take me across the road?C. Boy: I need a favor. Girl: How can I help? Boy: Could you help me with this math problem?D. Grandpa: Can you help me, please? Niece: Yes. Of course. Grandpa: Can you water the flowers in the garden?



E/ Homework: Ask students to do the exercise in the notebooks.


CONSOLIDATION

Week 13: Date: Thursday, October 15th, 201Period 38:


A/ Aim: Helping students to review the Present Progressive tense, the time, prepositions of position, vocabulary of subjects, adverbs of frequency, making suggestions.



B/ Language Focus:- The Present Progressive tense.- The Future Simple tense.- Prepositions of positions.- The Present Simple tense.- Adverbs of frequency.- Time.- Vocabulary of subjects.C/ Teaching aids: Paper test.D/ Procedure:

Full name: ......................................................................Class: 8 ......


Score:

Section I: Listen and fill the missing words: ( 1.5 ms)(1) ....................................................................................................................... of our land uniteLet’s sing for (2) ...........................................................................................................................Let’s sing for (3) ............................................................................................................................Let’s sing for the (4) .................................. between (5) ............................................. and southOh, children of our land, (6) ......................................................................................................... Children of the (7) ............................................... hold (8) ............................................................Let’s (9) ......................................... our (10) ……......................................... from place to place.Let’s (11) ..................................................... (12) ................................................................. loud,Let’s (13) ...................................................... a (14) ......................................................................Oh, children of the (15) ............................................................................................., hold hands.Section II: Fill in the blanks with the correct prepositions :(1.5 ms)1. When do they arrived ...................... Ho Chi Minh City? => .................................. May 1st

.2. Life in the country is quite different ........................... life ..................................... a farm.3. We’ll go ............................... Ha Long Bay ........................................... bus this weekend.Section III: Complete the following sentences with the words provided in the box. Two words aren’t used :(2 ms)

collect – coeducational – better – regularly – moved – unde underline – improve – help – recycling – escaped

1. A school which educates girls and boys together is a ............................................. school.2. Nam does morning exercises ............................... to ......................................... his health.3. Y and Y members ................................................................................................ glass, used paper and cans then send them for ........................................................................... . Dương Quang Minh English 8 88


4. A lion ............................................................................. from its cage yesterday morning.5. In order to remember words ............................................ some learners write example, put the words and their meaning on stickers, ......................................... or highlight them.Section IV: Rewrite, using the words in brackets :(3 ms)1) I speak French badly. Minh speak French badly. ( as ...... as)2) He gets up early. He wants to review his lessons. (so as)3) “Shut the door but don’t lock it.” He said to us. ( He told)4) We usually lit our houses with candies. ( used to)5) Nga is putting on weight. (She should)6) Playing badminton and table tennis is very popular with students. (It)Section V: Read the text then write answer the questions belo :(2 ms)

My best friend My name’s John and my best friend is called Pamela. We meet thirty years ago when we were both five years old. It was my first day at school and I was very unhappy because I wanted my mother. Pamela gave a sweet and we became friends immediately. We were together nearly every day untill we left school twelve years later. Then I went to university but Pamela didn’t. She got married and had three children. I studied for eight years because I wanted to be an accountant. I had a lot of new friends so I didn’t see Pamela very often. Sometimes we didn’t meet for months but we often talked on the phone.1) How old were John and Pamela when they became friends?2) How often did they meet at school? 3) Why didn’t Pamela go to university?4) Did they still keep in touch later?

Week 13: Date: Friday, October 16th , 201Period 39:

CORRECT THE TESTA/ Aim: Help students to be able to know mistakes in test about thePresent Progressive tense, prepositons of position, vocabulary of subjects, adverbs of frequency, suggesstions sentences, the time. B/ Objective: By the end of the lesson, students will be able to know more mistakes in test.C/ Teaching aids: Paper test.D/ Procedure:Section I: Listen and fill the missing words: ( 1.5 ms)(1) Children of our land uniteLet’s sing for (2) peaceLet’s sing for (3) right Let’s sing for the (4) love between (5) north and south Oh, children of our land, (6) unite Children of the (7) world hold (8) hands Let’s (9) show our (10) love from place to place.Let’s (11) shout (12) out loud,Let’s (13) make a (14) stand



Oh, children of the (15) world, hold hands.Section II: Fill in the blanks with the correct prepositions :(1.5 ms)1) When do they arrived in Ho Chi Minh City? => On May 1st .2) Life in the country is quite different from life on a farm.3) We’ll go to Ha Long Bay by bus this weekend.Section III: Complete the following sentences with the words provided in the box. Two words aren’t used :(2 ms)

collect – coeducational – better – regularly – moved – unde underline – improve – help – recycling – escaped

1) A school which educates girls and boys together is a coeducational school.2) Nam does morning exercises regularly to improve his health.3) Y and Y members collect glass, used paper and cans then send them for recycling.4) A lion escaped from its cage yesterday morning.5) In order to remember words better some learners write example, put the words and their meaning on stickers, underline or highlight them.Section IV: Rewrite, using the words in brackets :(3 ms)1) => I speak French as badly as Minh (does) .2) => He gets up early so as to review his lesson.3) => He told us to shut the door but not to lock it. 4) => We used to light out houses with candies.5) => She should eat less ( eat more fruit and vegetables).6) => It’s very popular with students to play badminton and table tennis.Section V: Read the text then write answer the questions below :(2 ms)1) => They were both five years old when they became friends.2) => They met at school nearly every day.3) => Because she got married ( and had three children). ss4) => Yes, they did.

Unit 7: MY NEIGHBORHOODI/ Aim: Helping students:- To make comparisons.- To ask for information and assistance.- To write a community notice.II/ Language Focus:1. Present Perfect with FOR and SINCE.2. Adjectives: like, (not) as ...... as, (not) the same as, different fromIII/ Vocabulary: (to) contact, (to) notice, (to) serve, an air mail, comfort (n), iscount (n), a mall, a pan cake), a parcel, a product), a resident, a roof, a selection, a surface mail, a wet market, air – conditionaled (adj), convenient (adj), tasty (adj), IV/ Allocation unit:

Lesson 1

Getting StartedListen and Read

Read for specific information about places in the neighborhood.

Lesson 2

SpeakLanguage Focus 5

Practice speaking about how to send a parcel or to post a letter.



Lesson 3

Listen Lestening for details to complete the advertisement.

Lesson 4

Read Reading for details about the opening of a shopping mall in Nam’s neighborhood.

Lesson 5

Write Writing a notice and practice in making comparisons.

Lesson 6

Language Focus 1- 2 - 3 - 4

Practice in the Present Perfect Tense.

Week 14: Date: Saturday, October 17th , 2009Period 40:

Unit 7: MY NEIGHBORHOODLesson 1: GETTING STARTED Page: 63 LISTEN AND READ Page: 64A/ Aim: Helping students to know about the place in their neighborhood.B/ Objective: By the end of the lesson, students will be able to know more about Na’s new neighbor.C/ Teaching aids: Textbooks.D/ Procedure:


Content

+ Warm up: Ask students to match the names or places öith the suitable pictures.

+ Pre reading:- Bookshut. - Eliciting. - Recording.


. Set the scence: Nam and Na are talking about the place where they live. But Na is new there. Get two questions and ask students to work in pairs to guess the answers.

1/ Getting Started:Answer keys:a) grocery store b) stadium c) wet marke d) drug store e) hairdresser’s f) swimming pool

2/ Vocabulary:- close by [klous bai] (adv): gần bên(explanation: at a short distance)- (to) serve [sə:v] : phục vụ(give somebody food or drink)- a pancake ['pænkeik] : bánh xèo(translation)- tasty ['teisti] (adj): hợp khẩu vị(what means the same as “delicious”?)

close by servepancake tasty

3/ Pre – questions:a) How long has Nam live in that neighborhood?b) Where does Nam want to go?Answers keys:a) He has lived there for 10 years.b) Na wants to go a restaurant.

4/ Complete the sentences:



Ask students to listen and read silently the dialogue between Nam and Na then ask them if their answers correct or not.

+ While reading: Ask students to do exercise 2 on page 64. They work individually then compare with their partners. Give students some answers and ask them to make questions. Ask some students to ask and answer the questions.Teacher can correct their pronunciation. Get students to work in pairs.

+ Post reading: Ask students to write a passage about their neighborhood by answering the following questions. Students write, teacher moves around the class and helps students.

a) Na is new to the neighborhood.b) She and her family arrived last week.c) Na’s mother is very tired.d) There is a resaurant in the area.e) The restaurant serves food from Hue.f) Nam thinks the pancakes are tasty.

5/ Answer given:a) Nam has lived here 10 years.=> How long has Nam lived here?b) Yes. My mother is too tired to cook.=> Is Na’s mother tired?c) The restaurant serves Hue food.=> What kind of food does the restaurant serve?d) Hue food is very good. => What is the food like?

6/ Write: a) How long have you lived in your neighborhood? b) Do you like it? Why? (People are friendly/ the enveronment is good/ safe ...) c) Is there a restaurant / post office/ market/ bank/ shop is your neighborhood? d) How do you do to keep your neighborhood clean?

E/ Homework: Ask students to complete their writing.

Week 14: Date: Monday, October 19th , 201Period 41:

Unit 7: MY NEIGHBORHOODLesson 2: SPEAK Page: 64 - 65 LANGUAGE FOCUS 5 Page: 70 -71A/ Aim: Speaking about how to send a parcel of a letter.B/ Objective: By the end of the lesson, students will be able to talk about how to send parcels or letters. C/ Teaching aids: Textbooks.D/ Procedure:


Content

+ Warm up: I/ Speak:



Show a letter and ask students some questions.

+ Presentation:- Bookshut.- Eliciting.- Recording.. Check: Rub out and Remember.. Set the scene: Mrs Kim wants to send a parcel to Qui Nhon, so she has to go to the post office. Give students some questions. Ask students to read the dialogue and find out the answers. Give students to work in pairs to compare their answers.

+ Practice: Call on some students to ask and answer the questions. Call on a students to play the role of Mrs Kim and practice the dialogue with teacher. Call on some pairs of students to practice the dialogue. Teacher corrects their pronunciation. Ask students to practice the dialogue in pairs.

+ Futher Practice:. Set the scene and ask students to make the dialogue. Ask students to make the dialogue between Mrs Lan and the Clerk in the post office. Elicit and encourage students to make the dialogue themselves. Get students to practice the dialogue in pairs.

1/ Chatting:a) What is this? => ( a letter) b) Where can I post it to my friends?=> (at the post office)c) How can I post it? => ( Stick stamp on it)d) How much? => ( 80 VN dong)e) Is it more expensive when I send a parcel? => ( Yes, of course)f) Have you ever sent a letter or a parcel?

2/ Vocabulary:- an airmail ['eə'meil] : thư bằng đường hàng không(explanation: letter or a parcel sent by air)- surface mail ['sə:fis'meil] : thư bằng đường bộ(explanation: letter or a parcel sent by bus, train or ship, ....)- (to) charge [t∫ɑ:dʒ] : phí(translation)- a charge [t∫ɑ:dʒ] : lệ phí(translation)

3/ Reading comprehension:a) Does Mrs Kim send the parcel air mail or surface mail? Why? => Mrs Kim send the parcel surface mail because it is very cheaper.b) What’s the weight of her parcel?=> Her parcel is five kilograms.c) How much does she pay? => She pays 19,200 dongs.

4/ Speaking:a) Mrs Lan wants to post a letter air mail.Expected dialogue:Clerk: Can I help you?Mrs Lan: I want to send a letter to Kontum.Clerk: Do you want to send it air mail or surface mail?Mrs Lan: I send it surface mail. How much is it? Clerk: Let me see. Mmm, 20 grams, it’s only 800 dongs.Mrs Lan: Here you are.Clerk: Thank you.b) postcard/ Ho Chi Minh City/ air mail/ 15gc) parcel/ Ca Mau/ air mail/ 2 kgsd) parcel/ Buon Ma Thuot/ surface/ 5 kgs



Give other situations and ask students to make similar dialogue. The box on page 65 will help students know the price. Divide class into 3 groups, each prepares a dialogue. Ask students 2 pairs from each group to practice their dialogue. Teacher correct their pronunciation. Get students to work in pairs, practicing three dialogues. Teacher moved around and help students. Give feedback.

+ Presentation: Show students 3 books, a red bokk and a yellow one which have the same size and a bigger brown dictionary then ask students to make comprehensions. Write the form on the board.

+ Practice: Ask students to do the exercise 5 on page 70 – 71 .

II/ Language Focus 5:1) Fill in the blanks:

a) The book is the same as the yellow one.b) The red book is as big as the yellow book.c) The yellow book is different from the brown dictionary.

2) Form:+) ...... the same as ......+) ......( not) as + adj/ adv + as ......+) ...... different from ......

3) Practice:a) The magazine is not as large as the new paper.b) Lipton tea is different from Dilmah tea.c) The red dictionary is different from the blue dictionary.d) The bag on the left is the same as the bag on the right.e) The toy cat is not as big as the toy dog.f) Hoa’s backpack is the same as Lan’s backpack.g) The snake is as long as the rope.h) The pocket - watch is not as modern as the wristwatch.i) The ruler is not as cheap as the eraser.

E/ Homework: Ask students to write a dialogue on their notebooks.


Unit 7: MY NEIGHBORHOODLesson 3: LISTEN Page: 65 - 66A/ Aim: Listening for specific information.B/ Objective: By the end of the lesson, students will be able to know what Na is going to do on the weekend by listening.



C/ Teaching aids: Textbooks, posters.D/ Procedure:


Content


Ask students to look at 4 advertisements of “what’s on this week?” and get students to guess what is in the blanks 2-3- 4.. Set the scene: “Na is new in the neighborhood. She is talking to Nam about what she’s going to do on the weekend”. Ask students to listen to the tape and fill in the blacks in each advertisement.

+ White listening: Let students to listen to the tape twice and give the answers.Give feedback. Ask students to read the statements in the exercises 2 on page 66. Get students to guess. Ask students to share their ideas with their friends.Give feedback. Let students listen to the conversation again and tick in the correct boxes.

1/ Brainstorming and Guessing:1. Movies: The new comer ( has been done)2. Place: Stadium/ School ground/ City/ Town ground3. Activity: drama/ play/ English speak Club/ Contest/ Dancing/ Picture exhibition/ Music4. Place: Gallery/ Culture house/ School/ City Hall

2/ Listening task 1:. Tape transcript:Na: Hi, Nam.Nam: Hello, Na. What are you going to do this weekend?Na: I’m not sure. I just don’t know what to do and where to go in this new neighborhood.Nam: Why don’t we look at “What’s on this week?” in the newspaper?Na: Good idea. Can you suggest what I should do?Nam: Do you like movies? There’s a new film at the Millennium Cinema.Na: What’s that? The Newcomer, an Australian film. I’ve seen this film before, I saw it on Star Movies channel.Nam: You did?Na: Yes.,(pause). Here, the photo exhibition at the Culture House sounds exciting!Nam: But it does not open during the weekend. And you cannot go to the English Speaking Contest either. It is at Nguyen Khuyen School, and it is on Thursday. ( pause) Ah, yes. Here, the soccer, a match between Le Do School and Quang Trung School – the best U15 teams in our province. I’ll go and see it because my brother plays in the match.Na: Where do they play?Nam: At the Town Ground. Would you like to join us?Na: Oh, yes. I’d love to. I’ve never been to a soccer match before. It must be fun to watch a real match at the stadium. And I’d like to visit the Town Ground, too.Nam: Great, I’ll tell Minh and Ba to come to your home, and we all go together. Remember the match starts at 4 pm, but we must be there by 3:30 if we don’t want to miss the opening show.Answer keys:a) The new comer



Ask students some questions to check their understanding of the conversation. Let students listen again if necessary.

+ Post listening: Ask students to work in groups to talk to their friends about what Na is going to do this weekend. Ask the volunteer from each group to tell the whole class about Na.

b) Town Groundc) English Speaking Contest d) Culture House

3/ Listening task 2:a) Na does not know the neighborhood very well.b) Na doesn’t like movies.c) Na will go to the photo exhibition this weekend.d) Na won’t go to English Speaking Contest.e) Na will go to the soccer match with Nam.f) Nam is soccer fan.Answer keys: a) T b) F c) F d) T e) T f) Nob) Na likes movies.c) Na will go to the soccer match with Nam.

4/ Answer the questions:a) Does Na like movies? => Yes, she does.b) Why won’t she go to see the film “The Newcomer”? => Because she has seen it before.c) Why won’t Na go to the photo exhibition?=> Because it doesn’t open during the weekend.d) Who will Na go to the soccer match with?=> Nam, Ba and Minh.e) What time does the match start? => At 4 pm.

5/ Speaking: “ Na looks at the advertisements to dicide what to do and where to go this weekend. She likes movies but she won’t see the film at Millennium Cinema because she has seen it before. She won’t go to the photo exhibition becayse it doesn’t open at weekends. She cannot go to to English Speaking Contest either because it is on Thursday. Finally, she decideds to go to the soccer match with Nam because she thinks it must be fun to watch a real match at stadium and she wants to visit the Town Ground too.”

E/ Homework: Ask students to write a short passage about what Na is going to do.

Week 15: Date: Wednesday, October 21st, 201Period 43:

Unit 7: MY NEIGHBORHOODLesson 4: READ Page: 67 - 68A/ Aim: Reading for details about Tran Phu Shopping Mall.B/ Objective: By the end of the lesson, students will be able to understand the passage about a new shopping mall.





Content

+ Warm up: Give the definitions and get students to find out the words as quickly as possible. Give students good marks if they have correct answers.

+ Pre reading:- Bookshut.- Elciting.- Recording.


. Set the scene: In Nam’s neighborhood, there is a new shopping mall. Ask students to think about the convenience of the mall.

+ While reading: Ask students to read the text silently and compare their ideas or get more infirmation. Give feedback. Have students to look at

1/ Guessing the words:a) A place where you can buy everything. => ( Supermarket)b) A place where you can buy vegetables and fruit. => (Grocery store)c) A place where you can buy books. => ( Bookstore)d) A place where you can come to eat. => ( Restaurant)e) A place where you can come to see the movies. => (Movie Theater)f) A person who comes to the stor and buys somethings. => ( Customer)

2/ Vocabulary:- a roof [ru:f] : mái nhà(picture)- convenient [kən'vi:njənt] : thuận tiện(translation)- a selection [si'lek∫n] : sự lựa chọn(explanation: a process of choosing carefully)- available [ə'veiləbl] (n): có sẵn(translation)- a mall [mɔ:l] : khu thương mại ( synonym: many stores, restaurants even movies theaters are under on roof)- a resident ['rezidənt] : cư dân(translation)

roof convenient selectionavailable resident mall

3/ Brainstorming:the convenience of the new shopping mall

Answer keys: - customers don’t care of the weather - shop in comfortable - wide selection of goods- lower prices - buy many things at the same time- have fun or relax while shopping

4/ True False statements:a) A mall is open six days a week.b)There are more than 50 stores in the mall.c) Everyone in the neighborhood is pleased about the new



the statements in the exercise 1 on page 68. Make sure understand the statements. Get them to read the text again and dicide. Have students to correct false statements. Ask students to work in pairs to answer the questions in the exercise 2 on page 68. Ask some students to ask and answer the questions. Get all students to work in pairs.

+ Post reading: Give a situation and ask students to discuss it.

mall.d) It will be more comfortable to shop in the mall than in the present shopping area.e) Some of the stores on Tran Phu Street may have to close.Answer keys: a) F b) F c) F d) T e) Ta) A mall is open daily.b)There are 50 stores in the mall.c) Not everyone is pleased. The owner of the small stores on Tran Phu Street are not happy.

4/ Answer the questions:a) What is special about the new shopping mall?=> It is different from the present shopping area. All the shops are under one roof. So customers will shop comfort and won’t notice the weather, especially during the hot and humid summer months..b) What facilities are available in the shopping mall? => There are 50 air conditioned specially stores, 4 movie theaters and 10 restaurants. There is also a children’s play area.c) What do the small stores owners think about the new shopping mall? => They think the mall will take their business.d) What kinds of goods will the stores in the mall offer? => The stores in the mall will offer a wider selection of products, some goods are at the lower prices.

6/ Discussion: “ Do you weant to have a new in your neighborhood? If there is one, what will happen to the residents?”

E/ Homework: Ask students to write the meanings of these phrases into their notebooks: “under one roof, shop in comfort, take their buseniss, offer a wider selection, specially stores, have been concerned about”.

Week 15: Date: Thursday, October 22nd, 201Period 44:

Unit 7: MY NEIGHBORHOODLesson 5: WRITE Page: 68A/ Aim: Helping students to write a notice.B/ Objective: By the end of the lesson, students will be able to write a notice .C/ Teaching aids: Textbooks, cards, pictures.D/ Procedure:


Content

+ Warm up: 1/ Pelmanism:



+ Pre writing:. Set the scene: “ The residents and store owners on Tran Phu Street are going to hold a meeting to discuss the effects of the new mall.” Get students to read the notice and answer the questions to check their understanding.

+ While writing: Let students know the way to write a notice, not write full sentences. Ask students to read passage 2 on page 68. Ask some questions to check students’ understanding and get them to use short answers. Get students to write the notice individually. Monitor and help them write.

+ Post writing: Ask students to share with their partners. Check some notices and correct them. Write the model notice on the board ( Elicit students to write.)

1. be 2. go 3. eat 4. live 5. attend

a) gone b) lived

c)attended

d) been e) eaten

Answer keys: 1 + d 2 + a 3 + e 4 + b 5 + c

2/ Answer the questions 1:a) Why are the residents and store owners on Tran Phu Street going to hold a meeting?=> To discuss the effects of the new mall.b) When will they hold a meeting? What time? => They will hold the meeting on May 20 at 8 pm.c) Where will they hold the meeting? => They will hold the meeting at 12 Hang Da Street, Binh’s hardware store.

3/ Answer the questions 2:a) What is the English Speaking Club going to hold?=> A Speaking Contest.b) Where and when will it be held?=> At hall 204 on November 15th.c) What time? => From 7:30 pm to 10:00 pm.d) Who is the person to contact?=> Tran Thi Thu Hang of class 8H.

4/ Writing:The School English Speaking ClubHOLDING A SPEAKING CONTEST TO CELEBRATE

TEACHERDAYDate: November 15Time: 7:30 pm to 10:00 pmPlace: Hall 204, Building GPlease contact: Ms Tran Thi Thu Hang of class 8H at the above address for more information.

E/ Homework: Ask students to write a noptice .

Week 15: Date: Friday, October 23rd, 201Period 45:

Unit 7: MY NEIGHBORHOODLesson 6: LANGAGUE FOCUS 1 – 2 – 3 – 4 Page: 69 - 70A/ Aim: Practice in Present Perfect Tense.B/ Objective: By the end of the lesson, students will be able to use Present Perfect Tense.



C/ Teaching aids: Textbooks, poster, cards.D/ Procedure:


Content

+ Warm up:

+ Presentation:. Set the scene: Na is new in Nam’s neighborhood. They are talking to each other. Give students an open dialogue between Nam and Na then ask them to complete it. Ask students to repeat the dialogue and ask some students to practice in pairs.

+ Practice: Ask students to look at exercise 2 on page 69 and decide which is the length on the time and which is starting point. Teacher reads out a phrase, students add SINCE or FOR. Go on untill students can remember how to use FOR or SINCE. Give the cues written on cards and ask students to make full sentences. Teacher corrects their pronunciation..

+ Production:

1/ Matching:1. be 6. see a)

collectedf) live

2. work 7. go b) done g) seen3. eat 8. attand c) writen h) been4. write 9. collect d) worked i)

attended5. do 10. lived e) eaten j) gone

Answer keys: 1+h 2+d 3+e 4+c 5+b 6+g 7+j 8+i 9+a 10+h

2/ Fill in the blanks:Na: How long (1) have you (2) lived in this neighborhood?Nam: I (3) have (4) lived here (5) for 10 years.Na: Really. It’s a long time.Answer keys:(1) have (2) lived (3) have (4) lived (5) for

3/ Form:S + have/ has + Past participle ...

. Use: to talk about something which started in the past and continues up to the present.. We often use “For” and “Since” with the Present Perfect Tense. FOR + length of time ( khoảng thời gian) SINCE + starting point ( mốc thời gian)

4/ Substitution Drill:Answer keys: - For five minutes - Since 1990- Since the summer - For three hours- For 10 weeks - Since Friday- For 20 years - Since January

5/ Write:a) I / live/ here/ last week => I have lived here since last week.b) we/ not eat/ in that restaurant/ 2 years=> We haven’t eaten in that restaurant for 2 years.c) I / not see/ her/ yesterday=> I have’t seen her since yesterday.d) they/ attend/ Quang Trung School/ last year => They have attended Quang Trung School since last year.e) my Dad/ work/ for his company/ 20 years=> My Dad has worked for his company for 20 years..f) Ba/ collect/ stamp/ 1985=> Ba has collected stamps since 1985.

6/ Complete the conversation:



Ask students to do exrcise 4 on page 70 in pairs. Get students to work in pairs to practice the conversation between Ba and Tom.

Ba: Hi. My name’s Ba.Tom: Nice to meet you, Ba. I’m Tom.Ba: Are you a newcomer here?Tom: Yes. I (1) have been here since last week.Ba: I’m sure you’ll love this place.Tom: I (2) hope so. How long have you (3) lived here?Ba: For 15 years.Tom: So you must know the area very well. (4) Is there a post office near here?Ba: Yes. There’s one next to my house. Why?Tom: Ah! I (5) want to send this postcard to my parents.Ba: Let me have a look. Oh! It (6) looks very beautiful. Where’s your house?Tom: In London. Have you ever (7) been there?Ba: Not yet. But I (8) have seen it through films and magazines.Tom: That’s great. I hope to see you again over there.

E/ Homework: Ask students to do exercise 3 on page 69 on their notebooks.

ENGLISH TEST 8. Time: 15 minutes. School Year: 20... – 201...Full name: ............................................................Class: 8 .........


Score:

Section I: Choose the correct answer (5 ms):1) I started (to learn/ to learning/ having learnt/ learnt ) English when I was 3 years old.2) Have you finished (do/ did/ doing/ does) your homework yet?3) Companies in the world today are now trying (to recycle/ recycling/ recycle/ recycled).4) I don’t feel like (to go/ going/ went/ go) to the cinema with him.5) Julia is ( like/ fond/ interested/ excited) of listening to music in her free time.6) What do you think of (study/ studied/ studying/ studies) aboard?7) Could you please stop (talk/ to talk/ talks/ talking)so loudy?8) I will buy that dress as soon as I (am having/ have/ had/ will have)enough money.9) The fun has helped poor children in this region (living/ live/ lived/ lives) a better life.10) I enjoy (enroll in/ to enrolling in/ enrolls in to/ enrolling in) our school’s summer camp.Section II: Turn the verbs in brackets into present perfect tense, using “for” or “since” (3 ms):1) We (not eat) .................................................... in that restaurant (for/ since) 2 years.2) She (live) ..................................................................... here (for/ since) a long time.3) ................................. Ba (collect) ................................. stamps (for/ since) January?Section III: Rewrite these sentences, using the words given (2 ms):1) It’s two years since I was last in HaNoi. => I haven’t .............................................................. .2) This book is very interesting and so is that one. => This book is as ......................................... .



Unit 8: COUNTRY LIFE AND CITY LIFEI/ Aim: Helping students:- To about differences.- To talk about future events and changes.- To write a letter to a friend.II/ Language Focus:1) Present Progressive.a) To talk about the future.b) To discribe changes with get and become.2) Adverbs of frequency.III/ Vocabulary: (to) face, (to) prefer, (to) struggle, a drought, a facility, a flood, a mirgant, a nature, a train, a tragedy, a typhoon, accessible (adj), adequate (adj), plentiful (adj), rural (adj), urban (adj), permanently (adv) IV/ Allocation unit:

Lesson 1


Reading for details about the differencesbetween the city and the countrylife.

Lesson 2

SpeakLanguage Focus 3

Speaking about the changes, using the Presnt Progressive Tense with GET and BECOME.

Lesson 3

ListenLanguage Focus 1-2

Listening for details and Further practice in Present Progressive Tence .

Lesson 4

Read Reading the text for details about the problems of farmers moving to the city.

Lesson 5

Write Writing a letter to a friend about their neighborhood

Lesson 6

Language Focus 4-5

Further Practice in Comparative and Surperlative adjectives

Week 16: Date: Saturday, October 24th, 201..Period 46:

Unit 8: COUNTRY LIFE AND CITY LIFELesson 1: GETTING STARTED Page: 72 LISTEN AND READ Page: 72 - 73A/ Aim: Reading for details about the differences between city life and the country life.B/ Objective: By the end of the lesson, students will be able to talk about the city life and the country life.C/ Teaching aids: Textbooks.D/ Procedure:




Content

+ Warm up: Talk to students about life in the city and life in the country by asking some questions.

+ Pre reading:- Bookshut. - Eliciting. - Recording.

. Check: Rub out and Remember. Get students to talk

1/ Chatting:a) Where do you live?b) Do you want to live in the city? Why?c) Do you want to live in the country? Why?

2/ Vocabulary:- a relative: bà con(example: uncles, aunts, cousins…)- peaceful (adj): yên bình(synonym: the synonym of quiet and calm)- permanently (adv): lâu dài(explanation: its means existing alll the time)- accessible (adj): áo thể đếm được(translation)- a medical facilities: phương tiện y tế(translation)

3/ Brainstorming: Dương Quang Minh English 8 103


about city life and country life. The words is box of getting started may help them. Ask students to read the dialogue between Na and Hoa and compare their ideas.

+ While reading: Get students to work in pairs to answer the questions in erxercise 2 on page 73. Ask students to work in pairs to answer the questions. Ask some pairs to practice the dialogue.

+ Pre reading: Ask students to work in groups to answer the questions. Show their ideas before class.

Country life City lifePosible answers: - tall building - beautiful views - plenty kinds of goods - fresh food - polluted air - fresh air - traffic jams - friendly - entertainment - peaceful - busy

4/ Answer the questions:a) Where has Na been? => Na has been to Kim Lien Village.b) How long was she been? => She was there for the weekend.c) What is her opinion of the countryside?=> To her, the countryside is the peaceful and quiet and there is nothing to do.d) Na say “ there is nothing to do” , what does she mean by this? => There is no libraries, no movies, no supermakets, no zoos, …e) What are some of the changes that Hoa mentions? => Country life is becomingbetter. Many remote area are getting electricity. People can now have things like refrigerators and TV, medical fscilities are more accessible.

4/ Discussion:Do you prefer the city life or the country life? Why?

E/ Homework: Ask students to write as short passage about why they prefer the city life or the country life.

Week 16: Date: Monday, October 26th, 201..Period 47:

Unit 8: COUNTRY LIFE AND CITY LIFELesson 2: SPEAK Page: 73 LANGUAGE FOCUS 3 Page: 78A/ Aim: Practice in Present Progressive Tense to describe changes with GET and BECOME..B/ Objective: By the end of the lesson, students will be able to practice speaking about the changes of a place.C/ Teaching aids: Textbooks, pictures, poster.D/ Procedure:


Content



+ Warm up: Ask students to find 7 adjectives.

+ Presentation:. Set the scene: “ hoa’s grandmother is 78.” Five years ago, she was 73 and she was stronger than she is now. Ask students to make a sentence about her health. Explain the form – use of the Present Progressive Tense.

+ Practice: Model first two cues, the whole class repeat chorally, then some students read out individually. Give a new cue, ask new student to repeat. Go on until most of the students in class can remember the structure.

+ Production: Ask students to look at the two pictures on page 73 and talk to their parents about the changes of the town. The words in the box under the pictures may help students. Write the word prompts on the board so that students can speak easily. Get students to work in pairs. Monitor and help students speak. Ask students to work in groups and talk about changes in their hometown/ neighborhood. Call on volunteer from each group to show their

1/ Pelmanism:E X P E N S I BO A M D N U V EU B O I S V E AI C D R T R Z UY L E T L L A TS M R Y H G Y IU O N O I S Y FB P T F D E L U

Answers keys: modern, dirty busy noisy tall expensive beautiful

2/ Structure:- “ Hoa’s grandmother is getting weaker.”. Form:am/ is/ are + V-ing ( GET or BECOME)

. Use: Used to describe changes with “GET” and “BECOME”.

3/ Drill:a) the boys/ get/ tall => The boys are getting tall.b) the old men/ become/ weak=> The old men are becoming weak.c) it/ become/ dark => It is getting dark.d) the weather/ get/ cold => The weather is gettingcold.e) the students/ get/ better => The students are getting better.f) the school yard/ become/ cleaner=> The school yard is becoming cleaner.

4/ Speaking:Answer keys:a) The traffic is getting busier.b) There are more tall buildings and houses.c) The houses are getting more modern.



ideas before the class. Other groups can add in their ideas.

d) The town is becoming more beautiful.e) There are more green trees.f) The streets are becoming cleaner/ larger/ noisier.

E/ Homework: Ask students to write about what they do in New Year’s Day.

Week 17: Date: Tuesday, October 27th, 201..Period 48:

Unit 8: COUNTRY LIFE AND CITY LIFELesson 3: LISTEN Page: 74 LANGUAGE FOCUS 1 - 2 Page: 77 - 78A/ Aim: Listening for details to complete the dialogue and Further Practice in Present Progressive Tense.B/ Objective: By the end of the lesson, students will be able to complete the dialogue by listening and Further Practice in Present Progressive to talk about the future.C/ Teaching aids: Textbooks, cards.D/ Procedure:


Content


Ask students to use the suitable verbs in the Present Progressive Tense to complete the dialogue in the exercise 2 on page 78. Get students to work in pairs. Call some pairs to practice the dialogue before class and teacher corrects.. Concept checking: a) What tense do we ise in 6 dialogues? – Present Progressive Tense. b) What is the form? – am/ is are + V-ing c) Look at the adverbs of time in the dialogue. Are they at present or in the future? – In the future. d) Present Progressive

1/ Matching:Answer keys:play table tennis do my homeworkwatch a program go to violin lessonclean the house have a meetingphone my aunt, Mrs Hang speak to Mom

2/ Complete the dialogue:a) Nam: What are you doing tonight? Bao: I’m playing (0) table tennis.b) Uncle Thach: Would you and Lan like to go to the movies? Hoa: Sorry, we can’t. We (1) are doing homework.c) Mrs Vui: Are you watching the seven o’clock news? Mr Nhat: No,. I (2) am watching a program on rainforests.d) Hoa: I’m goimg to the bench on Sunday. Lan: Lucky you! I (3) am going to my violin lesson.e) Mrs Thao: Are you free on Sunday afternoon? Na: No, Mom and I (4) are cleaning the house.f) Nga: Can you fix my computer on Friday afternoon? Mr Lam: I’m afraid not. I (5) am having a meeting that afternoon.

3/ Complete the dialogue: (Listening)Tape transcript and answer keys:Lan: Hello.Mrs Hang: Herllo. Is (1) that Lan?Lan: Yes. Who is (2) this?



Tense is used to talk about the future.

+ While listening:. Set the scene: “ Aunt Hang is talking to Lan on the phone. She is coming to visit Lan in Ha Noi.” Ask students to listen to the tape and complete the dialogue on page 74. Let students listen twice and find out the missing wirds individually. Ask students to share their answers with their friends.

+ Post listening: Ask students to do exercise 1 on page 77. Call on some students to practice the dialogue on page 77. Give them the shipping information and ask them to make similar dialogues.

Mrs Hang: (3) It’s Aunt Hang. How are you?Lan: I’m fine. (4) Where are you phoning (5) from?Mrs Hang: Hue. I’m calling to tell you uncle Chi and I are (6) coming to visit you next (7) week.Lan: Great! When are you (8) arriving?Mrs Hang: On (9) Thursday. We’re arriving in Ha Noi in the (10) late (11) afternoon.Lan: OK. Do you want to (12) speak to (13) my Mom?Mrs Hang: Yes, please.Lan: Hold on a moment and I’ll (14) get her.

4/ Speaking:a) Mrs Vui: Is the boat to Dong Hoi leaving at 10:25? Clerk: Is that Lady of the Lake? Mrs Vui: That’s right. Clerk: I’m very sorry, madam., but it’s been delayed. Mrs Vui: Oh, no! Clerk: Now, it’s leaving at 10:40.b) Mr Hung: Is the boat from Hai Phong arriving at !0:30? Clerk: Are you talikng about Bright Sky? Mr Hung: Yes. Clerk: It’s arriving on time,sir.

E/ Homework: Ask students to write 5 sentences, using Present Progressive Tense about what they are doing next week.

Week 17: Date: Wednesday, October 28th, 201..Period 49:

Unit 8: COUNTRY LIFE AND CITY LIFELesson 4: READ Page: 75A/ Aim: Reading comprehension about the problem of people from the countryside moving to the city.B/ Objective: By the end of the lesson, students will be able to understand the text about one of the social problems.C/ Teaching aids: Textbooks, posters. D/ Procedure:


Content

+ Warm up: 1/ Jumble words:a) fulentipl = plentiful b) taneru = nature





+ While reading: Ask students to think of the difficulties of farmers’ life. Ask students to guess how farmers deal with difficulties. Let students read the text silently and answer the questions. Ask students to work in pairs to complete summary 1 on page 75, using the information from the passage. Ask students to do exercise 2 on page 75. Let them read the text again and work with their partners. Give feedback.

+ Post reading: Give a situation: If you were a Minister, what would you do for

c) loofd = flood d) roestdy = destroy e) laputipoon = population f) viroped = provide g) suertl = result h) ciliestiaf = facilites

2/ Vocabulary:- rural (adj): thuộc về miền quê(explanation: something deals with the countryside)- urban (adj): thuộc về thành phố(antonym)- a stain: trạng thái căng thẳng(translation)- a typhoon: bão( synonym)- a drought: cơn hạn hán(explanation: hot and dry weather for a long time)- (to) struggle: đấu tranh(translation)- a migrant: ngöôøi di cö( explanation: a person who moves from one place to another expecially in order to find work)- (to) increase: tăng cuwowfng, phát triển

3/ Brainstorm:difficulties of farmers’ life

Answer keys: - droughts - the weather - hard work - insects destroy harvests - no vocations - lack of clean water/ electricity

4/ Answer the question: - “ What do many farmers do to solve their problem?” + They move to the city so that they can get well – paid jobs.

5/ Gap filling: “ People from the countryside are (1) leaving their (2) home to go and live in the (3) city. Farming can sometimes be a difficult life and these people from (4) rural areas feel the (5) city offers more opportunities. Howerver, many people coming to the city create (6) problems. There may not be enough (7) schools or (8) hospitals, while water and electricity supplies may not be adequate. This is a (9) problem facing goverments around the (10) world.”

6/ Finding the words:Answer keys: a) of the countryside = rural b) as many as needed = plentiful c) become greater or larger = increase d) a great presure = strain e) a terrible event = tragedy f) of the city or city life = urban



farmers? Ask students to work in groups and discuss. Ask 4 volunteers from 4 groups to show their ideas before the class.

7) Discussion:a) Build streets, theaters, stadium in the country.b) Build schools, hospitalsc) Provide clean water, electricity,facilitiesd) Build factory

E/ Homework: Get students to write 5 things that the government should do for the rural areas.

Week 18: Date: Thursday, October 29th, 201..Period 50:

Unit 8: COUNTRY LIFE AND CITY LIFELesson 5: WRITE Page: 76A/ Aim: Writingletters to friends about the neighborhood.B/ Objective: By the end of the lesson, students will be able to know more about a farmer’s work and get further practice in comparatives with “ more, less, fewer”.C/ Teaching aids: Textbooks. D/ Procedure:


Content

+ Warm up: Ask students to put the outlinefor an informal letter in the correct order.

+ Pre writing: Ask students to work in pairs to answer the questions in exercise 2 on page 76. Give feedback.

1/ Revision:a) heading 1. Writer’s address 2. Date 3. Dearb) Openingc) Body of letterd) Closing

2/ Answer the questions:a) Where do you live? => I live in a small town/ big city/ village.b) What does your house look like? => My house looks very nice/ small with 4/5 rooms and a nice/ small garden.c) What can you see from your bedroom window? => From my bedroom window, I can see a small park with many green trees and colorful flowers.d) How far is it from your house to school? => It’s far from my house so I have to ride my bike./ It’s very near so I can walk.e) What kinds of facilities are there in your neiborhood? => There is a park/ a swimming pool/ some restausants, a post office/ a library.f) What things in your neighborhood do you like best? Why? => I like the park best because I can walk with my sisters after dinner/ every morning/ I like the library best because I



+ While writing: Ask students to write letters to friends about their neiborhood. Let students write individually. Ask students to compare with their partners and correct if they can.

+ Post writing: Choose some letters to correct before class ( using projector if possible)

can read many interesting books, or study or learn how to use the computer there.

3/ Write a letter:Suggested letter: (Writer’s address) (date) Dear ......, I live in ......, a small town. My family has a large with four rooms and a small garden. My sister and I share one bedroom. From the bedroom window , I can see a beautiful park with green trees, flowers and a pond. We don’t live far from my school so I usually walk there. In my neighborhood, there is a swimming pool and a beautiful park. On the weekend, I often go swimming with my friends. Early in the morning , I always’ jog with my sister around the park. But the thing I like best in my neighborhood is the public library near my scool. There I not only can study and read books but also watch and learn how to use the computer. Do you have a library like that in your neighborhood? Is there anything interesting in the place where you live? Write to me. I’d like to say goodbye now. I’m looking forwards to hearing from you soon. Love, (Signature)

4/ Correction:E/ Homework: Ask students to write their letter ( after corection) on their notebooks.

Week 18: Date: Friday, October 30th, 201..Period 51:

Unit 8: COUNTRY LIFE AND CITY LIFELesson 6: LANGUAGE FOCUS 4 - 5 Page: 79A/ Aim: Further Practice in comparative and superlative adjective.B/ Objective: By the end of the lesson, students will be able to use comparative and superlative adjective.C/ Teaching aids: Textbooks, red and yellow chalk. D/ Procedure:


Content

+ Warm up: Ask students find out short adjectives and long adjectives they have

1/ Brainstorming:Long adjectives Short adjectives

Answer keys:- accessible - busy



learnt. Get students to go to the blakboard and write down the adjectives.

+ Presentation: Remind students of the forms of comparative and superlative adjectives.

+ Practice: Ask students to do exercise 4 on page 79. They have to work in pairs to make comparitions between the city and the country about : food, traffic, transport, air, entertament, medical facilities, schools, electricity with the adjectives: easy, expensive, cheap, good, bad, pooor, buig, accessible, fresh. Give some examples. Let students make any sentences they want, only focus on the structures, not on the meaning.

+ Further Practice: Ask students to do exercise 5 on page 79. Ask them read some

- beautiful - easy- convenient - cheap- difficult - good- intelligent - bad- comfortable - poor- delicious - fresh- interesting - small

2/ Revision:a) Comparative:Short adj.-ER + THAN + objectMORE long adj. + THAN + object

b) Superlative:THE + short adj.-ESTTHE MOST + long adj.

c) Irregular adjectives:good/well better the bestbad worse the worstmany more the mostlittle less the least

3/ Practice:Answer keys:a) The air in the country is fresher than in the city. b) The madical facilities in the city are more accessible than in the country.c) The food in the city is more expensive than in the country.d) The school in the city is bigger than in the country.e) Electricity in the city is better than in the country.f) The entertament in the country is poorer than in the city. g) The traffic in the city is busier than in the country.h) The transport in the country is worse than in the city.

4/ Answer the questions:a) What are advertised? => an apartment, a villa and a houseb) How old are they? => The apartment is 2 years old, the villa is 5 years old and the house is new.c) How much do we pay per month?=> 900,000 dongs for the apartment; 6,6 million dongs for the house and 7,8 million dongs for the villa.

5/ Noughts and Crosses:old expensive bigexpensive small hotbig beautiful old

Answer keys:a) The villa is older the apartment.b) The house is more expensive than the apartment.



questions to check their understanding. Students can make more sentences.

c) The villa is bigger than the apartment.d) The villa is the most expensivee) The apartmet is smaller than the villa.f) The apartment is hotter than the house.g) The is the biggest.h) The villa is the most beautiful.i) The apartment is older than the house.

E/ Homework: Ask students to write 5 sentences comparing their house with their neighbors.

Week 19: Date: Saturday, October 31st, 201..Period 52:

Unit: REVIEWĐỀ CƯƠNG ÔN TẬP TIẾNG ANH 8 HỌC KỲ I - NĂM HỌC: 2011 -

2012A. Theory: (Lý thuyết)I. Vocabulary: Unit 1 => Unit 8II. Đọc hiểu: Xem lại các bài đọc hiểu từ Unit 1 => Unit8 (SGK)III. Viết: Xem lại các dạng bài viết: một bức thư, một đoạn văn, tả người, tả căn phòng, một lời nhắn, một thông báo từ Unit 1 => unit 8IV. Tense of verbs:1. The Simple present tense: *) Use: - Hành động xảy ra nhiều lần hoặc thói quen ở hiện tại (đi với các trạng từ chỉ sự thường xuyên: every - Diễn tả một quy luật, một hành động theo lịch trình*) Form: (+) S + V(-s/ -es) ……(-) S + don’t/ doesn’t + infinitive ……(?) Do/ Does + S + infinitive ……?2. The Simple past tense: *) Use: Diễn tả một hành động đã xảy ra và chấm dứt ở quá khứ (thường đi với: yesterday/ last/ ago/ …) *) Form: (+) S + V(-ed/ cột 2) …… (-) S + didn’t + infinitive ……(?) Did + S + infinitive ……?3. The Simple Furture tense: *) Use: Hành động sẽ xảy ra ở tương lai (thường đi với: tomorrow/ next/ …) *) Form: (+) S + WILL + infinitive …… (-) S + won’t + ìninitive ……(?) WILL+ S + ìninitive ……?4. The near furture tense (Thì tương lai gần) : *) Use: Hành động sẽ xảy ra ở thời điểm rất gần với hiện tại hoặc một dự định (thường đi với: tomorrow/ next/ tonight/ …) *) Form: (+) S + am/ is/ are + going to + infinitive …… Dương Quang Minh English 8 112


(-) S + am/ is/ are + not + going to + ìninitive ……(?) Am/ Is/ Are + S + going to + ìninitive ……?5. The Present Perfect tense: *) Use: Hành động xảy ra ở quá khứ, vẫn tiếp tục ở hiện tại và có thể tiếp tục ở tương lai, hoặc hành động vừa mới kết thúc (thường đi với: since/ for/ already/ just/ not … yet/ ever/ …) *) Form: (+) S + have/ has + Past Participle …… (-) S + have/ has + not + Past Participle ……(?) Have/ Has + S + Past Participle ……?6. The Present Progressive tense: *) Use: - Hành động đang xảy ra trong lúc nói (thường đi với: now/ at this time/ at present/ at the moment/ …) - Diễn tả một hành động sắp tới hoặc một sự thay đổi với “get/ become/ …”*) Form: (+) S + am/ is/ are + V-ing …… (-) S + am/ is/ are + not + V-ing ……(?) Am/ Is/ are + S + V-ing ……?V. Adverbs:1. Adverb of place: (Answer question: Where?) here/ there/ outside/ insite/ downstairs/ upstairs/ near/ far/ …2. Adverb of manner: (Answer question: How?) 3. Adjective + -LY => adverb of manner (note: hard - hard, far - far, late - late, straight - straight, early - early, …)4. Adverb of frequency (Answer question: How often?) always, usually, often, sometimes, never, …VI. Reported speech: 1. Commonds in reported speech: Thuật lại mệnh lệnh của người khác*) S + TOLD/ ORDERED + someone + TO – infinitive ……*) S + TOLD/ ORDERED + someone + NOT + TO – infinitive ……2. Requests in reported speech: Thuật lại lời yêu cầu của người khác *) S + ASKED/ BEGGED + someone + TO – infinitive ……*) S + ASKED/ BEGGED + someone + NOT + TO – infinitive ……3. Advices in reported speech: Thuật lại lời khuyên của người khác*) S + ADVICED + someone + TO – infinitive ……*) S + ADVICED + someone + NOT + TO – infinitive ……*) S + SAID + S + SHOULD/ SHOULDN’T + TO – infinitive ……VII. Some structures:1. Model verbs: MUST/ HAVE TO/ OUGHT TO/ CAN/ COULD/ + infinitive2. Used to: Diễn tả thói quen ở quá khứ*) Form: (+) S + USED TO + infinitive ……(-) S + DIDN’T USE TO + infinitive ……(?) DID + S + USE TO + infinitive ……?3. Enough: ai đó đủ/ không đủ …… để làm việc gì đó*) Form: (NOT) + adj. ENOUGH (+ FOR + someone) + TO - infinitve ……4. Gerund: (V-ing):- Khi nó làm chủ ngữ đứng đầu câu.- Hoặc đi sau các giới từ hoặc một số động từ như: like/ dílike/ hate/ ẹnoy/ …… Dương Quang Minh English 8 113


VIII. Comparision of adjectives: 1. Comparision with like/ as … as/ (not) the same/ different from*) LIKE + noun*) AS + adj. + AS = THE SAME + noun + AS*) NOT AS (SO) + adj. + AS = NOT + THE SAME + noun + AS = DIFFERENT FROM2. Comparitive: (so sánh hơn/ kém) giữa hai vật hoặc hai người- S1 + be + MORE + long adj. + THAN + S2. - S1 + be + short adj.-ER + THAN + S2. 3. Superative: (so sánh bậc nhất) - S + be + THE MOST + long adj. + in/ on/ of … . - S + be + short adj.-EST + in/ on/ of … . 4. Irregular:

Adj. Comparitive Superativegood/ well better the best

much/ many more the mostlittle less the leastfar farther/ further the farther/ the further

B. Exercises:

ĐỀ KIỂM TRA HỌC KỲ I NĂM HỌC: 2009 - 2010 (Huyện Sơn Tịnh) (tham khảo)

Section 1: (2 ms) Math A and BA B

0. mobile phone a. Oh, yes. Very much.1. Fax machine b. to become or make something better2. Do you love your home town?

c. an equipment used and receive copies of documents.

3. Why were you late? d. Because I miss the bus.4. To improve. e. A telephone you can around with you.

Answer: 0. + e. 1. + … 2. + … 3. + … 4. + …Section 2: (2 ms) Choose the best answer1. Would you ……………………………………………………… to go to the movie with me?A. do B. like C. please D. mind2. Which one is …………………………………………………………... milk or orange juice?A. good B. well C. better D. the best3. They have study ………………………………………………………………… six o’clock.A. at B. to C. for D. since4. My teacher advised me ………………………………………………………………….. late.A. not B. not be C. not to be D. beingSection 3: (2 ms) Make the questions in A to the answer in B:

A B0. What …? => What is his name? 0. His name is Nguyen Tuan kiet.



1. How old …………………………………?

a. He is fifteen.

2. Where …………………………………...?

b. I live at 345 Hung Vuong Street.

3. When ……………………………………?

c. We have English class on Monday.

4. What …………………………………….?

d. She is tall, thin but very beautiful.

Section 4: (1 m) Supply the correct form of the verb: 1. Most river (flow) ……………………………...………………………………… into the sea.2. His father (work) ……………………………………………….. in this company since 1999.3. They (wash) …………………………………………………... the dishes in the kitchen now.4. She was very tired, so she (go) …………………………………………………. to bed early.Section 5: (2 ms) Fill the gaps with the words in the box:

fluently - planet - restaurant - must1. The Earth is the name of the ……………………………………………………... we live on.2. The school children …………………………………………………. were uniform at school.3. We can speak English ……………………………………………………………………... .4. The …………………………………………………………………………. serves Hue food.Section 6: (1 m) Rewrite as the direction in the parentheses: 1. He is tall. He can play volleyball. (Use: adjective enough) (Kết hợp hai câu thành một câu)=> ……………………………………………………………………………………………... .2. Linh is studying medecine. ( be a doctor – Use: be going to) (Sử dụng “be going to” và “be a doctor) => ……………………………………………………………………………………………... .3. The villa/ old home/ this area. (Use: superlative) (Sử dụng so sánh bậc nhất để hoàn thành câu)=> ……………………………………………………………………………………………... .4. You/ know/ her/ 3 months/? ( Make the question – Use present Perfect tense) (Viết câu hỏi với thì hiện tại tiếp diễn)=> ……………………………………………………………………………………………... .Section 7: (2 ms) Read the pasage and answer the questions:



The Y & Y is planing to help the community by encouraging all menbers to save the Earth because many people are destroying the world. The seas and the rivers are too dirty. There is so much smoke in the air. They have cut down many trees. If possible, we should participate in the problems such as collecting and recycling used paper, bottles and cans, planting trees, preserving natural resources … Nowadays, saving the Earth is very important and necessary. We must act right now. Questions:1. What program is the Y & Y planing?=> ……………………………………………………………………………………………... .2. What do we do with used paper, bottles and cans? => ……………………………………………………………………………………………... .3. Should we destroy natural resources?=> ……………………………………………………………………………………………... .4. What is the most important thing nowadays?=> ……………………………………………………………………………………………... .

ĐỀ KIỂM TRA HỌC KỲ I NĂM HỌC: 2008 - 2009 (Huyện Sơn Tịnh) (tham khảo)

I. Combine two sentences into one sentence, using “enough”: (1 m) 1. He is very strong. He can carry that suicase. => ……………………………………………………………………………………………... .2. We have time. We can go on a picnic. => ……………………………………………………………………………………………... .II. Complete the sentences with suitable prepositions: (1 m) 1. I’m going to Da Nang City ……………………………………………………….. December.2. The class begins ……………...… 7 am. So I have to go to the class …….…………… 7 am.3. They must be there ………………………………………………………... Monday morning.III. Complete the sentences from the words given: (1.5 ms) 1. Nile/ be/ longest/ river/ in/ worl/.=> …………………………………………………………………………………………….. .2. I/ be/ going/ visit/ my grandparents/ tomorrow/. => …………………………………………………………………………………………….. .3. Lan/ like/ learn/ English/ very much/.=> …………………………………………………………………………………………….. .



IV. Supply the correct form of the verb: (2.5 ms) Five years ago, Minh (go) ……………… to Ho Chi Minh City. He (live) ……………… there for 5 years. Now he returns home and (live) ……………… in Quang Ngai City with his family. Last Sunday, he and his friends (not, go) ……………… to school so they had time to go on a picnic and they (go) ……………… to visit their old teachers next Sunday.V. Fill in each of the gap in the following passage with one correct word: (1 m) natural - sidewalk - collect – recycling - community

The Y & Y is planning to help the (1) ……………… by encouraging all menbers to participate in a (2) ……………… program. All you have to do is to (3) ……………… used glass, paper and cans, and send them for recycling. By doing this, we can help save (4) ……………… resources and earn some money for the organization. Answer the questions:1. What is the Y & Y planing to do?=> ……………………………………………………………………………………………... .2. What do the students participate in? => ……………………………………………………………………………………………... .3. How can they save natural resources and earn money for the organzation?=> ……………………………………………………………………………………………... .VI. Change the following sentences into reported speech: (1 m) 1. “Please help Nam with this exercise.”=> Miss Nga told me …………………………………………………………………………. .2. “Can you tell me the way to the rainway station?” => The man ask Mai ………………………………………………………………………….. .3. “You should improve your English pronunciation.”=> The teacher said Lan ……………………………………………………………………… .

Week 19: Date: Saturday, October 31st, 201..Period 53:Unit:

ĐỀ KIỂM TRA HỌC KỲ I NĂM HỌC: 2009 - 2010Section 1: (2 ms) Math A and B

A B0. mobile phone a. Oh, yes. Very much.1. Fax machine b. to become or make something better2. Do you love your home town?

c. an equipment used and receive copies of documents.

3. Why were you late? d. Because I miss the bus.



4. To improve. e. A telephone you can around with you.Answer: 0. + e. 1. + … 2. + … 3. + … 4. + …Section 2: (2 ms) Choose the best answer1. Would you ……………………………………………………… to go to the movie with me?A. do B. like C. please D. mind2. Which one is …………………………………………………………... milk or orange juice?A. good B. well C. better D. the best3. They have study ………………………………………………………………… six o’clock.A. at B. to C. for D. since4. My teacher advised me ………………………………………………………………….. late.A. not B. not be C. not to be D. beingSection 3: (2 ms) Make the questions in A to the answer in B:

A B0. What …? => What is his name? 0. His name is Nguyen Tuan kiet.1. How old …………………………………?

a. He is fifteen.

2. Where …………………………………...?

b. I live at 345 Hung Vuong Street.

3. When ……………………………………?

c. We have English class on Monday.

4. What …………………………………….?

d. She is tall, thin but very beautiful.

Section 4: (1 m) Supply the correct form of the verb: 1. Most river (flow) ……………………………...………………………………… into the sea.2. His father (work) ……………………………………………….. in this company since 1999.3. They (wash) …………………………………………………... the dishes in the kitchen now.4. She was very tired, so she (go) …………………………………………………. to bed early.Section 5: (2 ms) Fill the gaps with the words in the box:

fluently - planet - restaurant - must1. The Earth is the name of the ……………………………………………………... we live on.2. The school children …………………………………………………. were uniform at school.3. We can speak English ……………………………………………………………………... .4. The …………………………………………………………………………. serves Hue food.Section 6: (1 m) Rewrite as the direction in the parentheses:



1. He is tall. He can play volleyball. (Use: adjective enough) (Kết hợp hai câu thành một câu)=> ……………………………………………………………………………………………... .2. Linh is studying medecine. ( be a doctor – Use: be going to) (Sử dụng “be going to” và “be a doctor) => ……………………………………………………………………………………………... .3. The villa/ old home/ this area. (Use: superlative) (Sử dụng so sánh bậc nhất để hoàn thành câu)=> ……………………………………………………………………………………………... .4. You/ know/ her/ 3 months/? ( Make the question – Use present Perfect tense) (Viết câu hỏi với thì hiện tại tiếp diễn)=> ……………………………………………………………………………………………... .Section 7: (2 ms) Read the pasage and answer the questions: The Y & Y is planing to help the community by encouraging all menbers to save the Earth because many people are destroying the world. The seas and the rivers are too dirty. There is so much smoke in the air. They have cut down many trees. If possible, we should participate in the problems such as collecting and recycling used paper, bottles and cans, planting trees, preserving natural resources … Nowadays, saving the Earth is very important and necessary. We must act right now. Questions:1. What program is the Y & Y planing?=> ……………………………………………………………………………………………... .2. What do we do with used paper, bottles and cans? => ……………………………………………………………………………………………... .3. Should we destroy natural resources?=> ……………………………………………………………………………………………... .4. What is the most important thing nowadays?=> ……………………………………………………………………………………………... .

PHÂN PHỐI CHƯƠNG TRÌNH THCS - MÔN TIẾNG ANH 8 - NĂM HỌC 2011 - 2012

Học kỳ II: 18 tuần = 52 tiết Trong đó: Từ tuần 20 đến tuần 35: 16 tuần x 3 tiết = 48 tiết Từ tuần 36 đến tuần 37: 2 tuần x 2 tiết = 4 tiết



Units Weeks Periods ContentsUnit 9: A first – aid course 20. 55. Getting Started - Listen and Read

56. Speak - LF3 - LF457. Listen - LF2

21. 58. Read - LF 159. Write

Unit 10: Recycling 60. Getting Started - Listen and Read 22. 61. Speak

62. Listen - LF463. Read

23. 64. Write65. Language Focus 1 - 2 - 3

Unit 11: Traveling around VietNam

66. Getting Started - Listen and Read 24. 67. Speak - LF3 - 4

68. Listen - LF 1 - 2 69. Read

25. 70. Write71. Ôn tập72. Kiểm tra 1 tiết

Unit 12: A vacation abroad 26. 73. Getting Started - Listen and Read - LF3

74. Speak75. Listen - LF 1 - LF 2

27. 76. Read77. Write 78. Sửa bài kiểm tra

Unit 13: Festivals 28. 79. Getting Started - Listen and Read 80. Speak81. Listen

29. 82. Read83. Write84. Language Focus 1 - 2

30. 85. Language Focus 3 - 4 Unit 14: Wonders of the world 86. Getting Started - Listen and Read

87. Speak 31. 88. Listen

89. Read 90. Write

32. 91. Language Focus 1 - 2 - 3 - 4 92. Ôn tập 93. Kiểm tra 1 tiết

Unit 15: Computers 33. 94. Getting Started - Listen and Read 95. Speak 96. Listen (Unit 16)

34. 97. Read



98. Write 99. Language Focus 1 - 2 - 3 - 4

35. 100. Sửa bài kiểm tra 101. Ôn tập

36. 102. Ôn tập103. Ôn tập

37. 104. Kiểm tra Học kỳ II105. Ôn tập

Unit 9: A FIRST – AID COURSEI/ Aim: Helping students:- With the knowledge of the situations which repaire first - aid.- To make and respond to offers, promises and respond.- To write a thank – you note.II/ Language Focus:1) in order to, so as to2) Making requests, offers and requests using modal “will”.3) Further Simple with “ will/ shall”.III/ Vocabulary: (to) bleed, (to)elevate, (to) minimize, (to) lit flate,(to) lower, (to) overheat, (to) ease, a bite, a burn, a crutch, an emergency, an eye chart, fainting (n), injection, promise (n), shock (n), sting (n), a stretcher, treatment (n), a victim, wound (n), an ambulance, parademic (n), a whellchair, tissue damage, concious (adj), sterile (adj), IV/ Allocation unit:

Lesson 1


Reading a dialogue for details about the situation which requires first – aid.

Lesson 2

SpeakLanguage Focus 3 - 4

Practice in making and responding to offers, requests and promises.Further Simple with “will/ shall”.

Lesson 3

ListenLanguage Focus 2

Listening for specific information about what is happening at a hospital.

Lesson 4

ReadLanguage Focus 1

Reading for instructures about the situations which require first – aid.Using ‘ in order to/ so as to to express purposes.

Lesson 5

Write Write a thank – you note.

Week 20: Date: Saturday, January 9th , 201..Period 54:

Unit 9: A FIRST – AID COURSELesson 1: GETTING STARTED Page: 80

LISTEN AND READ Page: 80 - 81A/ Aim: Reading for details about the situations which require first – aid..“Where is…….?” questions and prepositions of places to describe the position of a place. B/ Objective: By the end of the lesson, students will be able to know what they would do in the situations which require first – aid.



C/ Teaching aids: Textbooks, pictures. D/ Procedure:


Content

+ Warm up: Ask students to open their books and to look at the things on page 80. Tell them these things are open used for first – aid. Ask students to close their books and to go to the board to write the names of the things they’ve just seen from memory. Have students open the books again and go through the words in English. Ask students to discuss and to wirte down what they would do in these situations which require first – aid. Call on some groups to give their answers and correct.

+ Pre reading:- Bookshut.- Eliciting.- Recording. . Check: Slap the board. Ask students to predict the words in the gaps. Call on some students to go to the board and to write their words.

+ While reading: Have students open their books, listen to the tape while reading the dialogue. Ask students to read the

I/ Getting Started:1/ Kim’s game:

Answer keys:1. emergency room 2. sterile dressing 3. medicated oil 4. ice 5. water pack 6. alcohol Answer keys:1. A girl has a burn on her arm => Use cold water/ ice to ease the pain.2. A boy has a bad cut on his leg => Use alcohol/ medicated oil/ sterile dressing.3. A girl has a nose bleed => Use a handkerchief to stop the bleeding/ tell her to lie down.

II/ Listen and Read:1/ Vocabvulary:

- an ambulance: xe cứu thương(draw an ambulance)- an emergency: sự cấp cứu(When do we need an ambulance? – When there is an emergency.)- unconscious (adj) – conscious (adj): bất tỉnh – tỉnh táo(What’s “ bất tỉnh” in English?)- (to) bleed: chảy máu( When you have a cut, the cut will ...... ?)

3/ Gap fill prediction:“ There was an emergency at Lan’s school. A student (1) ...... off her bike and hit her head on the road. She was (2) ...... but she cut her head and the (3) ...... was (4) ...... badly. Lan telephoned Bach Mai Hospital and asked the nurse to send an (5) ...... to Quang Trung School. Lan was asked to keep the student (6) ...... while waiting for the ambulance.”Answer keys: (1) fell (2) conscious (3) cut (4) bleeding (5) ambulance (6) awake

4/ Select the topics: Dương Quang Minh English 8 122


dialogue again and select the topics coveredin the dialogue on page 81. Tell students ( in groups) to write their answers on a sheet of paper and hand on after finishing.

+ Post reading: Have students in turns play the roles to demonstrate the dialogue. Ask students to write a story using the information from tha dialogue.

a) describing the condition of the injured personb) asking for the addressc) asking about the condition of the injured persond) asking for advicee) giving first – aid f) arranging for an ambulanceg) saying the injured person’s nameAnswer keys: a) b) c) e) f )

5/ Role play:6) Write it up:

“ Yesterday there was an emergency at ....... ?”

E/ Homework: Let students to do exercise in their workbook.

Week 20: Date: Tuesday. January 12, 2010..Period 55:

Unit 9: A FIRST – AID COURSELesson 2: SPEAK Page: 81 - 82 LANGUAGE FOCUS 3 – 4 Page: 87 - 88A/ Aim: Practice in making and responding to offers, promises and requests.B/ Objective: By the end of the lesson, students will be able to make and respond to requests, offers and promises.C/ Teaching aids: Textbooks, posters, pictures. D/ Procedure:


Content

+ Warm up:

+ Presentation: Ask students questions to elicit the models. Have students repeat 2 or 3 times before writing them on the board. Underline the key words.

Network:Situations which requires first - aid

Answer keys: have a nose bleed have a burnhave a cut have a bee sting

I/ Speak:1/ Set the scene:

a) I want you to get me a bandage. How can I say?b) I'd like you to come to my party. How can I say?c) I tell my mother that I'll surely finish my work before bedtime. How can I say?

3/ Model sentences:a) Will you ( please) get me a bandage?



. Concept checking: Get students to work out the rules for themselves by asking questions. After formulating the model sentences, elicit some more phrases with the same use from students.

+ Practice: Ask students to look at the pictures on page 82 and match the situations with the statements.

Identify the situations in the pictures. Model picture a) then get students to repeat. Call on one student to demonstrate Picture b) with the teacher.

b) Would you like to come to my party??c) I promise I'll finish my homework before bedtime.

4/ Structure:a) To make a request: WillWould you (please) + infinitive ( without TO) ... ? Could Can

Responses: + Sure./ + OK./ + All right.- I'm sorry I can't./ - I'm afraid not.b) To make an offer:Will/ Won't you Shall I + infinitive (without TO) ... ? Can I Would you like + TO infinitive ... ?What can I do/ get for you?Can I get you ... ?

Responses: + Yes, please./ That would be nice.- No, thank you.c) To make a promise: I promise I'll/ I won't ...I will ... I promise ...I promise to ...

Responses: I hope so./ Good./ I'm glad./ Don't forget.5/ Matching:

1. The girl has a burn on her hand.2. The girl has a bad fever.3. The boy has just broken the vase4. The boy has a headache.5. The boy has a snake bite.Answer keys: 1.+ a 2.+ d 3.+ e 4.+ b 5. + c

6/ Picture Drill:Picture a) request - Could you give me a bandage, please?=> Sure. Here you are. Picture b) offer/ request- Can I get you some medecine? => Yes, please.Picture c) offer/ request- You are bleeding. What can I do for you?=> Can you get me some bandage? Picture d) offer- You must have a fever. Can I get you some medecine? => Yes, please.Picture e) promise



+ Production: Ask students to look at the pictures and dialogues on page 87, 88 and fill in the gaps with the right words. Monitor and correct. Call on some pairs to play the roles in front of the class.

Ask students to make requests, offers or promises.

- I promise I won't play soccer in the house again.=> I hope so.

II/ Language Focus 3 - 4:1) Language Focus 3:

a) Nga: Are you hot, Grandma? Mrs Tuyet: Yes. Will you open the window, please, Nga?b) Mrs Tuyet: My book is on the floor. Will you give to me, please?c) Mrs Tuyet: Will you answer the telephone, please?d) Nga: Do you want to listen the radio? Mrs Tuyet: No, thanks. I always watch the news at 7 pm. Will you turn on the TV, please,Nga?e) Mrs Tuyet: I'm thirsty. Will you pour a glass of water for me, please? Nga: Of course.f) Nga: Are you comfortable? Mrs Tuyet: No, I'm not. Will pou get me a cushion, please?

2) Language Focus 4:a) Will you empty the garbage can, please?b) Will you paint the door, please? I will paint the door tomorrow.c) Will you study harder, please?/ I will study harder.d) Will you carry the bag for me, please? Shall I carry the bag for you?e) Will you hang the washing, please? Shall I hang the washing for you ?f) Will you cut the grass, please? I will cut the grass for you.

E/ Homework: Let students do exercises in the workbook.

Week 20: Date: Tuesday, January 12, 201..Period 56:

Unit 9: A FIRST – AID COURSELesson 3: LISTEN Page: 82 LANGUAGE FOCUS 2 Page: 86A/ Aim: Listening to a paragraph for details about the activities talking placein an emergency room.B/ Objective: By the end of the lesson, students will be able to listen for details.C/ Teaching aids: Textbooks, pictures on page 82, cassette, a chart. D/ Procedure:


Content

+ Warm up: Guess from contest:



Ask students to look at the picture on page 82 and write out all the verbs describing the actions of the people in it.


. Check: What and Where. Ask students to look at the picture in their books again and match the letter A, B, C, D, E, F to the correct words in the box.

+ While listening: Rub out the letters (A, B, ...) but leave the words. Tell students they are going to listen to a paragraph about the activities taking places in an emergency room which contains the words on the board. Put the words in the table. Have students copy and guess the order of the words.

What action?Answer keys: (to) drive, wheel, move/ push, weigh, wait, lie, stand, lean

I/ Listen:1/ Vocabvulary:

- an eye chart: bảng đo thị lực(use the picture)- a parademic: điều dưỡng viên(He takes care of patients but he isn't a doctor nor a nurse.)- a wheelchair: xe lăn(use the picture)- (to) wheel: lăn đẩy(to push a wheelchair) - a stretcher: (cái) cáng(picture)- a crutch/ crutches: (cái) nạng( picture)eye chart parademic wheelchairstretcher crutches

2/ Matching:Answer keys: A + ambulance B + wheelchair C + crutches D + eye chart E + scale F + stretcher

3/ Order prediction:You guess On tape

ambulancewheelchair

crutchereye chart

scalestretcher

326451

4/ True - False statements:a) A doctor is wheeling a patient into the emergency room. b) The patient's head a bandaged.c) A nurse is pushing a wheelchair with a patient sitting on it.d) The eye chart consists of 28 letters ranging in the different size.e) The baby's mother is trying to stop the nurse from weighing her baby.Answer keys: a) F b) T c) F d) T e) Fa) A parademic is wheeling a patient into the emergency room. c) A nurse is pushing an empty wheelchair . e) The baby's mother is trying to stop her baby from crying.

5/ Write it up:



Ask students to listen.and give their answers then correct. Ask students to read the statements carefully and check if they understand the meaning of the statements. Ask students to work in pairs to decide which of the statements. Ask students to listen. Ask students to give their answers and correct.

+ Post listening: Ask students to write the story about the activities in the pictures, using the Present Continuous Tense. Ask students to complete the dialogue.

Tape transcript: This is the emergency room in a large hospital. A parademic is wheeling a patient on a strtcher into the emergency room where a doctor is waiting to treat the patient. The patient doesn't look well. His head is bandaged and his eyes are closed. A nurse is pushing an empty wheelchair towards the exit. She is probadly taking it to a patient in the ambulance. The eye chart on the wall is used to checkpeople's eyesight. The chart consists of about 28 letters ranging in size from about 5 centimeters in height at the top of the chart to about 1 centimeter at the bottom. A doctor is trying to weigh a crying baby on the scale. The baby's mother is standing nearly. She's trying to stop her child from crying. The crutchers, which are for someone with a broken leg, are leaning against the wall.

5/ Write it up: "This is the emergency room in a large hospital ...."

II/ Language Focus 2:Complete the dialogue:Ba: What time (0) will Aunt Mai be here?Mrs Nga: She (1) will be here in two hours.Ba: (2) Will Uncle Sau be with her?Mrs Nga: No, he (3) won't. He has to stay in Ho Chi Minh City.Ba: (4) Shall I come to the airport with you?Mrs Nga: OK. It (5) will be a nice trip for us both.Ba: Great, I (6)'ll be ready in two minutes.

E/ Homework: Ask students to rewrite the above story in the Past Tense.

Week 21: Date: Friday, January 15, 201..Period 57:

Unit 9: A FIRST – AID COURSELesson 4: READ Page: 83 - 84 LANGUAGE FOCUS 1 Page: 86A/ Aim: Reading for the instructionss about some more situations requiring first - aid.B/ Objective: By the end of the lesson, students will be able to use "in order to" and "so as to" to indicate purposes.C/ Teaching aids: Textbooks, pictures, chart, drawing. D/ Procedure:


Content

+ Warm up: Bingo:



Ask students to give nouns for emergencies which require first - aid and write them on the board.


. Check: Rub out and Remember. Ask students to think of what to do in these emergency cases. Have students open their books and read the instructions on page 83. Ask students to go the blackboard and add the missing information.

+ While reading: Ask students to read the statements on page 84 and math the three Leading A, B, C, ... to them. Ask students to read the instructions again and fill in the information. Call on some students to the board to write their answers. Have students copy the grid in their notebooks.

Suggested words: burn, cut, bee sting, snake bite, faiting, shock, nose bleed, ...

I/ Read:1/ Vocabvulary:

- (to) lie flat: nằm duỗi thẳng(mime/ drawing)- (to) elevate: nâng cao(gesture)- (to) lower: hạ xuống(gesture)- a victim: nạn nhân(person who needs first -aid)- (to) overheat: sưởi ấm(make something too hot)- tissue damage: mô hư( translation)- ( to) ease: làm dể chịu( translation)

3/ Network:first - aid

burn shock fainting- cool the burn with ice - Don't give the victim any food - Let the victim lie down

4/ Matching:a) The victim should not sit or stand.b) Victim cannot drink wine or beer.c) The victim's head should be below the level of the heart.d) You should case the paint with ice or cold water packs.e) The victim should drink a cup of tea when reviving.A. Fainting B. Shock C. BurnsAnswer keys: A + a, c, e B + b C + d

5/ Grid:Cases Do Don'tFainting - Leave the patient

lying flat.- Elevate the patient's feet, or lower his/ her head below the level of the heart.- Give the victim a cup of tea when he/ she revives.

- Don't force him/ her to sit or stand.- Don't let the victim get cold.



Ask the questions to elicit the answer.

+ Post reading:

Shock - Don't overheat the victim blankets or coat.- Don't give the victim any food or drink.- Don't give the victim drugs or alcohol.

Burns - cool the burns immediately so as to minimize tissue damage.- Put the affected part under a running cold tap.- Ease paint with ice or cold water packs.- Cover the burned area with a thick sterile dressing.

6/ Model sentences:A: Why should we cool the burn immediately?B: We should do it so as to minimize the tissue damage. in order to * Form: so as to / in order to + infinitive without TO** Meaning: để*** Use: to indicate purposes.

II/ Language Focus 1:A B1) I always keep the window open2) mary wrote a notice on the board3) Mr Green got up early this morning4) My elder brother studies hard this year5) People use first - aid 6) You should cool the burns immediately

a) case the victim's pain and anxiety.b) get to the meeting on time.c) inform her classmates about the change in schedule.d) minimize tissue damage.e) pass the entrance exam to the university.f) let fresh air in.

Answer keys: 1 + f 2 + c 3 + b 4 + e 5 + a 6 + d1. I always keep the window open in order to let fresh air in.2. Mary wrote a notive on the board so as to inform her



classmates about the change in schedules.3. Mr Green got up early this morning in order to get to the meeting on time.4. My elder brother studies hard this year so as to pass the entrance exam to the universary.5. People use first - aid in order to ease the victim's pain and anxiety.6. You should cool the burns immediatelyso as to minimize tissue damage.

E/ Homework: Ask students to write the sentences ( LF 1) in their notebooks.


Unit 9: A FIRST – AID COURSELesson 5: WRITE Page: 84 A/ Aim: Writing a thank - you note.B/ Objective: By the end of the lesson, students will be able to write a thank - you note.C/ Teaching aids: Textbooks, posters. D/ Procedure:


Content

+ Warm up:+ Pre writing:

- Bookshut.- Eliciting.- Recording. . Check: Slap the board.. Set the scene: Nga was sick and she had to go to hospital. After she left the hospital, she wrote a thank - you note to Hoa. Why and what did she write. Ask students to read the statements and predict. Ask students to read the whole letter and check their prediction.

+ While writing: Tell students they are going to write a thank - you note to a friend and invite him/ her to go on a

1/ Shark Attack:EASE

2/ Vocabulary:- (to) thank s.o. for s.th.: cảm ơn ... về ...( example: She thanked me for helping her)- (to) cheer s.o. up: làm phấn khởi( to make s.o. feel happier)- (to) come over: đến thăm(translation)

3/ True - False statements:a) Nga writes to thank Hoa for some candy.b) Hoa's gift cheered Nga up.c) Nga'd like Hoa to see her at the hospital.d) Nga is very bored now.e) Nga writes the letter at the hospital.Answer keys: a) F b) T c) F d) T e) F a) Nga writes to thank Hoa for some flowres.c) Nga'd like Hoa to see her at her house. e) Nga writes the letter at her house.

4/ Complete the letter: Dear Hoa, Thank you very much for the flowers you (0) sent ( send) me



picnic with them. Ask some students to answer the questions orally. Have students practice speaking to each other. Ask students to join the sentences into a paragraph ( not put any numbers, eg: 1, 2, 3, ...) to make it a thank - you note. Tell students to write their letters on a sheet of paper to hand in or in their exercise notebooks.

+ Post writing: Divide the class into 4 groups and choose a letter randomly in each group. Ask 4 groups to copy 4 chosen letters on posters then put them on the board. Compare the posters and correct. Call on some more students to read their letters for the class. Give feedback and correct.

while I (1) was (be) in the hospital. They (2) were ( be) beautiful and they really (3) helped ( help) to cheer me up. I (4) came (come) out of the hospital on Monday morning. Now (5) am (be) very bored. Will you come over to my place on the weekend? I'd love to see you. I'll (6) telephone (telephone) you on Friday afternoon. Your friend, Nga.

5/ Questions and answers:- What did your friend give/ send you?- On what occasion?- What was/ were it/ they like?- How did you feel when you received the present?- How do you feel now?- Do you want to invite your friend to somewhere?- If so , then when?- How will you contact your friend?

6/ Write:Answer keys: " Dear ..., I want to thank - you for the lovely flowers you sent me while I was in hospital. They helped to cheer me up on several gloomy days because they reminded me of a good friend's thought fulness. I'm fine now and my family has decided to go on a picnic to my native village next weekend and I can't help remembering you. Will you join us? I think you say " Yes" to me. Right? I'd love to see you then. Your friend."

E/ Homework: Ask students to use the same format to write another letter to another friend for another occasion.

Unit 10: RECYCLINGI/ Aim: Helping students:- To give and respond to instructions.- To talk about feelings.- To write a set of instructions.II/ Language Focus:1) Passive forms.



2) Adjectives followed by - an infinitive - a noun clause- Present Simple.- Future Simple. III/ Vocabulary: (to) decompose, (to) recycle, (to) reduce, (to) refill, (to) reuse, (to) protect, (to) contact, natural resource (n), compost (n), deposit (n), fabric (n), fertilizer (n), glassware (n), metal (n), representeative (n),IV/ Allocation unit:

Lesson 1


Reading a dialogue for details about how to protect the environment and save nature resources.

Lesson 2

Speak Practice in giving and respond to instructions.

Lesson 3

ListenLanguage Focus 4

Listening for specific information about making compost.

Lesson 4

Read Reading for details about how things are recycled.

Lesson 5

Write Write a set of instructions on how to recycle used things.

Lesson 6

Language Focus 1- 2 - 3

Passive form in Present Simple and Future Simple.Adjective followed by - a to infinitive, - a noun clause


Unit 10: RECYCLINGLesson 1: GETTING STARTED Page: 89 LISTEN AND READ Page: 89 - 90A/ Aim: To give students information about the environment problems. B/ Objective: By the end of the lesson, students will be able to do something to protect the environment and save natural resources.C/ Teaching aids: Textbooks, poster. D/ Procedure:


Content

+ Warm up: Ask students to think of ways to reduce the amount of garbage they produce. Give feedback.


I/ Getting Started (Branstorming):Ways of reduce the amount of garbage

Possible answers: Use cloth bags, use tree leaves to wrap things, make garbage into fertilizer, make vegetable matter into animal food, ...

II/ Listen and Read:1/ Vocabulary:

- a representative: người đại diện(translation)- (to) protect: bảo vệ- (to) protact (s.o./ s.th.) from (s.o/ s.th.)(to keep s.o./ s.th. safe from danger)



. Check: Jumble words.

. Set the scene: A representative form Friends of the Earth, Miss Blake, is talking to the students of Quang Trung School. Friends of the Earth shows people how to protect the environment and save natural resources. Ask students to work in pairs to decide if the statements are true or false.

+ While reading: Ask students to open their books, listen to the tape while reading the dialogue. Call on students to correct the false statements. Ask students to look at the questions on page 90 and work in pairs. Call on some pairs to ask and answer the questions. Give feedback.

- natural resource (n): tài nguyên thiên nhiên( translation/ explanation: coal mines, oil/ gold/ mineral deposite are …)- (to) recycle: tái chế(translation/ denfinition: to communicate ưith someone by telephone or letter ...)

2/ Jumble words:a) tconatc = contact b) psentreretivea = representative c) ceresoru = resource d) ralnatu = natural e) ropttce = protect f) cyrecel = recycle

3/ True - False statements:a) Friends of the Earth is an organization to help people make friends with each other.b) Miss Blake asks the students to remember 3 things: reduce, reuse, recycle.c) Reduce means buying the products which are overpacked.d) We cannot reuse things like envelopes, glass, plastic bottles, old plastic bags.e) Miss Blake says that we should use cloth bags and shouldn't use plastic bags at all.f) Recycling means not just throwing things away but trying and finding another use for them.Answer keys: a - F b - T c - F d - F e - T f - T a) Friends of the Earth is an organization to help people protect the environment and save natural resources.c) Reduce means not buying the products which are overpacked.d) We can reuse things like envelopes, glass, plastic bottles, old plastic bags.

4/ Comprehension questions:a) What does Miss Blake mean by reduce?=> Reduce means not buying products which are overpacked.b) What things can we reuse? => We can reuse things like envelopes, glass, plastic bottles and old plastic bags.c) What does recycle mean? => Recycle means not just throwing things away. Try and find another use for them.d) Where can we look for information on recycling things?=> We can look for information on recycling things by having a contact with an organization like Friends of the Earth, going to the local library or asking your family and friends.



+ Post reading: Ask students to express their opinions/ ideas on this topic. Write the students' ideas on the board into a list.

e) Why Miss Blake tell Lan that we shouldn't use plastic bags at all? ( studnets' answers) => ( Possible answer: We shouldn't use plastic bags because when we throw them away, they could stay very long and could not be sefl destroyed/ self demolished.)

6/ Discussion:How was the recycling?

E/ Homework: Write the questions and full answers in your exercise notebooks.

Week 22: Date: Friday, January 22, 201..Period 60:

Unit 10: RECYCLINGLesson 2: SPEAK Page: 90 - 91A/ Aim: To help students practice in giving and responding to instructions.B/ Objective: By the end of the lesson, students will be able to give and responding to instructions.C/ Teaching aids: Textbooks, pictures. D/ Procedure:


Content

+ Warm up:

+ Pre speaking:- Bookshut.- Eliciting.- Recording.

. Check: Bingo.

1/ Kim's game:Answer keys: used paper, old newspapers, books, cardbook boxes, bottles, glasses, jars, plastic bags, food cans, drinking tins, vegetable matter, clothes, shoes, schoolbags, ...

2/ Vocabulary:- fertilizer (n): phân bón(explanation: Farmers often use this thing to make their plants or trees grow well. What is it?)- (to) fertilize: bón phân - compost (n): phân xanh(question: What do you call the fertilizer made from spoiled food, leaves, vegetable matter, ...)- fabric (n): sợi vải(arealia: clothes; What are these clothes made of?)- leather (n): da (giày, dép)(question: Our shoes, sandals, are often made of ... ?)fertilizer, compost, leather, fabric , plastic, glass, metal, paper, cardboard, tin, ...



+ While speaking: Tell students they are going to listen to the words for items and put them into the right groups. Draw the table on the board and ask students to copy it. Tell students to listen to the words and put them in the right columns. Read the words (in the table below) aloud, slowly and jumble them up. After listening, ask students to work in pairs and give their answers. Raed the words again and correct. Elicit the exchanges from students. Have some pairs practice each exchange before going on to another exchange. After finishing the dialogue, ask a good pair to demonstrate the whole dialogue. Ask some pairs to demonstrate the dialogue. Ask students to work in pairs, replacing the information ( in brackets) with the words in the dictation list.

+ Post reading:

3/ Dictation list:Group Items

Paper used paper (old newspaper, books, cardboard boxes)

Glass ( bottle, glasses, jars)Plastic (plastic bags, plastic bottle)Metal (food cans, drinking tins)Fabric clothes (cloth bags, metarial)Leather ( shoes, sandals, schoolbags)Vegetable matter

fruit peels (vegetables, retten, fruits)

4/ Mapped dialogue:Mai Nam

- Which group (do clothes) belong to?

- What can we do with (those clothes)?

- Is/ Are ( furit vegetable matter)?

- What will we do with ( it)?

- Put (them) in (fabric)

- We can ( recycle them and make them into paper or shopping bags).

- That's right.

- We make ( it into compose and fertilize our field).

Exchange dialogue:Mai: Which group do clothes belong to?Nam: Put them in fabric.Mai: What can we do with those clothes?Nam: We can recycle them and make them into paper or shopping bags.Mai: Is furit vegetable matter?Nam: That's right.Mai: What will we do with it?Nam: We make it into compose and fertilize our field.

E/ Homework: Practice the dialogue with your partner, replacing the information..


Unit 10: RECYCLING Dương Quang Minh English 8 135


Lesson 3: LISTEN Page: 91 LANGUAGE FOCUS 4 Page: 97

A/ Aim: Listening for specific information about making compost and practice the purpose.B/ Objective: By the end of the lesson, students will be able to use the structure with adjectives. C/ Teaching aids: Textbooks, poster, cards. D/ Procedure:


Content

+ Presentation:. Set the scene: Nam passed the English exam and his grandparents are delighted at it. What did they write to him? Elicit the model. Get students to copy.

+ Practice: Ask students to read the letter on page 97 and match the words. Call on some students to go to the board to draw the lines. Ask students to copy the vocabulary.

+ Production: Ask students to work in pairs to complete the letter using the words in the box. Get some students to give their answers. Give feedback and correct.

+ Pre listening: Ask students to predict the answers in the listen on the page 91.

I/ Language Focus 4:1/ Structure:

a) Model sentence: - We are delighted that you passed the English exam.b) Form:

S + be + adjective + that / noun clause2/ Matching:

1. relieved (adj) [ri'li:vd]

2. congratulations [kən,grætju'lei∫n]

3. (to) look forward to [luk 'fɔ:wəd tu]

4. (to) confirm [kən'fə:m]

a. xin chúc mừngb. xác nhận lạic. nhẹ nhõmd. trông chờ

Answer keys: 1 + c 2 + a 3 + d 4 + b

3/ Gap fill: "Dear Nam, Your grandfather and I (0) are delighted that you passed your English exam. Congratulations! Aunt Mai (1) was happy that you remembered her birthday last week. She told me you gave her a beautiful scarf. I (2) am relieved that your father is feeling better. Please give her my love We're looking forward to seeing you in June. However, grandfather (3) is afraid that the day is wrong (4) Are you sure that you're arriving on Saturday 20th? I (5) am certain that there are no trains from Ha Noi on Saturdays. Write soon and confirm you arrived date and time. Love, Grandma."Answer keys: (0) are delighted (1) was happy (2) am relieved (3) is afraid (4) Are ... sure (5) am certain

II/ Listen:1/ Prediction:

a) What type of garbage can you put in the compost?A. all vegetable matter B. meat or grain products



+ While listening: Tell students they are going to listen to an expert who gives the instructions to make compost. Ask students to open their books and read the multiple choice questions on page 91. Check if students understand the questions. Play the tape 2 or 3 times, students listen and do the exercise. Have students give their answers and correct.

+ While listening:

b) Where is the best place for a compost heap?A. a place that gets no sun B. a place that gets sun and shadec) Should you water the compost?A. Yes B. Nod) How long does it take you can use the compost?A. after it rains B. six monthsAnswer keys: a) A b) B c) B d) B

2/ Listening:Tape transcript:a) What type of garbage can you put in the compost?=> Today, I'm going to explain how to start a compost heap. First of all you must use only vegetable matter, which includes tea leaves, egg shells - but wash the shells first - and tissues. Don't use any meat or grain products because this attracts rats.b) Where is the best place for a compost heap?=> Find a place in your garden that gets a few hours of sunlight each day. Use picks or shovels to turn the compost regularly so it gets plenty of air.c) Should you water the compost? => The compost also needs moisture, but it will get this from condensation. Cover the heap with a sheet of strong plastic if the weather is very wet.d) How long does it take you can use the compost?=> Keep adding to the pile and after about six months, your compost will be ready to use as fertilizer.

E/ Homework: Ask students to finish the exercie on the page 97 in their notebooks.


Unit 10: RECYCLINGLesson 4: READ Page: 92 - 93A/ Aim: Reading for details about, how things are recycle.B/ Objective: By the end of the lesson, students will be able to understand the recycling. C/ Teaching aids: Textbooks, pictures, chart. D/ Procedure:


Content

+ Warm up: Ask students to write their answers on a piece

1/ Wordsquare:E N V I R O N M E N TN B C G A R B A G E R



of paper and hand in when they finish. Tell students the group with the most right words is the winner.


. Check: Rub out and Remember. Tell students they are going to read the dialogue a page in a newspaper giving some recycling facts to protect the environment. Write the questions on the board and ask students to guess what they're going to read. Write the students' guesses on the board.

+ While reading: Ask students to open their books and read the text. Ask students to work in pairs to make a list of recycling facts mentioned in the text. Call on some students to write the information in the grid on the board. Ask students to work individually to answer

V E D R D O P P U R EE J U E Y I L A R S CL U S E D P A P E R YO S T N O T S E D E CP R O T E C T R U U LE A B R C A I S C S ER E C E E N C A E E KD E E E F G H G I J L

Answer keys: environment, garbage, pure, used paper, protect envelope, dust, green tree, can, plastic, paper bag, reduce, reuse, recycle,

2/ Vocabulary:- a tire ['taiə]: lốp xe(picture)- a pipe [paip]: ống nước(drawing)- a deposit [di'pɔzit] : tiền đặt cọc(translation)- (to) refill ['ri:fil]: làm đầy lại(explanation/ to fill something empty again)- (to) melt [melt] > < (to) freeze [fri:z]: làm chảy, tan > < làm đông đặc

3/ Pre questions:a) What do people do with used things?b) What can they make from them?

4/ Grid:Used things Recycling facts

Car tires

Milk bottle

Glass

Drink cansHousehold and garden waste

are recycling to make pipes and floor coverings are cleaned and refilled ( with milk) is broken up, melted and made into new glassware are bought back for recycling is made into compost

5/ Comprehension questions:a) What do people do with milk bottles?=> People cleaned and refilled empty milk bottles.b) What happens to the glass when it is sent to the factories?=> The glass is broken up, melted and made into new glassware.c) What did Oregon government do to prevent people from throwing drink cans away?=> The Oregon government made a new law that there mustbe a deposit on all drink cans. The deposit is returned when people



the questions on page 93. Let students compare their answers with their partners. Call on some students to answer. Give feedback.

+ Post reading:

brings the cans back for recycling.d) What is the compost made from?=> Compost is made from household and garden waste.e) If you have a recycling story to share, how can you share it? => If we have a recycling story to share , we can call or fax the magazine at 5265456.

5/ Discussion:E/ Homework: Ask students to write the answers into their notebooks.

Week 23: Date: Saturday, January 30, 201..Period 63:

Unit 10: RECYCLINGLesson 5: WRITE Page: 93 - 94A/ Aim: Writing a set of instructions on how to recycle used things..B/ Objective: By the end of the lesson, students will be able to write a set of instructions, using the sequencing.C/ Teaching aids: Textbooks, pictures. D/ Procedure:


Content

+ Pre reading:- Bookshut.- Eliciting.- Recording.. Check: Slap the board.. Set the scene: Tell students they are going to read a text about how to recycle used paper. Put the verbs on the board randomly in a flow chart. Ask students to work in groups to guess the order of the actions. Call on about 2 pairs to write their answers on the board. Explain the process of recycling, using mimes or VietNamese and correct.

+ While reading:

2/ Vocabulary:- (to) soak [souk]: thấm ướt(explanation: to put s.th. in liquid for a time so that it becomes completely wet.)- (to) mash [mæ∫]: nghiền nát(mine)- a wire mesh [waiə me∫]: tấm lưới sắt(translation)- a bucket ['bʌkit]: thùng, xô(drawing)

3/ Ordering:a) soakb) dryc) pull outd) mixe) pressf) mashAnswer keys: 1 - a 2 - f 3 - d 4 - c 5 - e 6 - b

4/ Gap fill:First, (0) soak some old newspapers in a bracket of water overnight. Then (1) use a wooden spoon to mash the paper. Next, (2) mix the mashed paper and the water together in



Have students to open their books, read the text on page 93 and fill in the verbs. Minitor and correct the exercise in the text book. Ask students to close their books. Write the sequencing on the board and have students to practice speaking first. Call on students to say the sentences from memory. Get students to write the text in brief using the sequencing. Monitor and help students with their work. Call on some students to read their writing for the class. Give feedback and correct.

+ Post writing: Stick the photocopied pictures on the board randomly. Ask students listen and work in groups to rearrange the picutures according to the instructions on how to prepare the tealeaves. Read the instructions aloud. Get students to give their answers and correct.

another butket. (3) Place a wire mesh in the mixture then pull it out. Then put the mesh with mixture on the cloth and (4) press it down firmly. Take the mesh off the cloth. (5) Wrap some heavy books in a plastic bag and put them on the cloth. (6) Wait about 5 minutes. Finally, put the books away and take the paper out of the cloth to (7) dry in the sunlight.

6/ Recall:- First, ..................................................................................... .- Then, .................................................................................... .- Next, .................................................................................... .- After that, .............................................................................. .- Finally, ................................................................................. .

Answer keys:- First, soak some old newspapers in a bracket overnight.- Then, mash the paper by a wooden spoon.- Next, mix the mashed paper with water.- After that, use a wire mesh to pull the mixture out, put it on the cloth and press it down firmly.- Finally, take the mesh ot of the cloth and dry it in the sun.

7/ Ordering pictures:a) First, take the used tealeaves from the tea pot.b) Next, scatter the tealeaveson a trayc) then, dry the tealeaves in the sun.d) Finally, put the dry tealeaves in a pot for future use.

E/ Homework: Write the instructions on how to make a thing you have ever made using the sequencing.

Week 23: Date: Tuesday, February 2, 201..Period 64:



Unit 10: RECYCLINGLesson 6: LANGUAGE FOCUS 1 - 2 - 3 Page: 95 - 96A/ Aim: Further practice in the Passive and in expressing their feelings using Adjectives.B/ Objective: By the end of the lesson, students will be able to form the Passive in Future Simple and the structures with Adjectives.C/ Teaching aids: Textbooks, cards, posters. D/ Procedure:


Content

+ Presentation: Elicit the model sentences from students then have students repeat. Have to copy. Ask students to read the instructions and look at the pictures on page 95. Tell them to put the pictures in the correct order according to the instructions. Call on some groups to give their answers.

+ Practice: Ask students to rewrite the sentences (LF 1) in the passive form. Let them compare their writing and ask some students to go to the board and write their sentences.

+ Presentation: . Set the scene: Ask students to listen to the

I/ Language Focus 1:1/ Model sentence:

a) Model sentence:- Car tires are recycled to make pipes and floor coverings.- Glass is recycled into new glassware.b) Form:

S + be + past participle + by Object.c) Use: It is used when the subject is affected by the action of the verb ( VietNamese can be used for weaker students).- How to change an active sentence to a passive one.Active: S V O Passive: S BE + PP by OEg: I love my parents.

My parents are loved by me.

2/ Ordering pictures:Answer keys: a + 1 b + 4 c + 3 d + 5 e + 2 f + 6

3/ Rewriting:a) Break the glass into small pieces. => The glass is broken into small pieces.b) Then wash the glass with a detergent liquid.=> Then the glass (it) is washed with a detergent liquid.c) Dry the glass pieces completely.=> The glass pieces are dried completely.d) Mix them with certain specific chemicals.=> They are mixed with certain specific chemicals.e) Melt the mixture until it becomes a liquid.=> The mixture is melted until it becomes a liquid.f) Use a long pipe, dip it into the liquid, then blow the liquid into intended shapes.=> A long pipe is used. It is dipped into the liquid, then the liquid is blown into intended shapes.



situation. A famous inventor, Dr Kim, is going to build a time machine. One of his assistants, Hai, is asking him questions about the invention. He wants to know when Dr Kim will start the project. How can he say the sentence in the Passive? (Use VietNamese for weaker students.)

+ Practice: Have students copy down. Show students the questions (prepared on a poster) and ask them to fill in the gaps, using the Passive.

+ Production: Prepare 2 separate large cardboards, one for Dr Kim; one for Hai. Tell students haft of them are going to play the role of Hai to interview Mr Kim, and the others are Mr Kim.. Model: give one of the cardboards to a good student and ask him/ her to demonstrate. Deliver hand - outs (same content as 2 cardboards) to the whole class and ask them to do pairwork. Monitor and correct.

+ Presentation: . Set the scene: Ba gives Nam a lot of directions at a time so Nam find it difficult to follow Ba's directions. What does he say to Nam? Have students to copy.

+ Practice: Ask students to open their books and complete the dialogue on page 96.

II/ Language Focus 2:1/ Strutures:

a) Model sentence:- When will the project be started?b) Use: Pasive Form in the Future Simplec) Form:

WILL + BE + Past participle2/ Gap fill:

a) It ( show) will be shown to the public when it is finished.b) Will it ( build) be built by the end of the year?c) It ( finish) will be finished before Tet.d) Will it ( make) be made by you?Answer keys: a) will be showed ( shown) b) Will ... be built c) will be finished d) Will ... be made

6/ Interview:Hai Mr Kim

1. When/ will/ the project/ start/ ?2. Many people/ want/ see/ time machine/3. Will/ it/ build/ by the end/ year/?4. Will/ it/ make/ by you/ ?5. Let's begin/ tomorrow/

1. Very soon.

2. Yes./ It/ show/ to the public/ when/ it/ finish/3. I'm afraid not./ but/ it/ finish/ before Tet/4. No./ I/ need you/ build it/5. When can you start?

Answer keys: Hai: When (0) ( started) will the project be started, Doctor?Dr Kim: Very soon.Hai: Many people want to see the time machine.Dr Kim: Yes. It (1) (show) will be shown to the public when it is finished.Hai: (2) (build) Will it be built by the end of the year, doctor?Dr Kim: I'm afraid not, but it (3) (finish) will be finished before Tet.Hai: (4) (make) Will it be made by you?Dr Kim: No, I need you to build it. When can you start?Hai: Let's begin tomorrow.

II/ LF 2:1/ Strutures:

a) Model sentence:- It is difficult to follow your directions.b) Form:



Call on some pairs to demonstrate the dialogue and correct.

IT + BE + adj. + TO - infinitive 2/ Gap fill:

Answer keys: a) Ba: Turn right, then left, then right and then left again. Nam: It's (0) difficult to follow your directions. Can you start again, please?b) Mr Dao: Can you do the exercise, Hoa? Hoa: Yes, Mr Dao. It's (1) easy to understand.c) Lan: In the future, mankind might live on the moon. Nga: Really? It's (2) hard to believe.d) Mrs Thoa: Stop, Tuan! It's (3) dangerous to go near the store. Tuan: Sorry, Mom.e) Hoa: Should I stir the mixture, Aunt Thanh? Aunt Thanh: No. It's (4) important to wait for five minutes.

E/ Homework: Ask students to do exercises in their notebooks.

Full name: ............................................................Class: 8 .........


Score:

Section I: Choose the best answer and underlined ưords( 4ms):1) He talked softly (so as not to/ to not/ as not to/ in order to) wake up his children.2) He always drives carefully ( in order to/ in order/ in order to not/ in order not to) cause accedents. 3) He promises he ( is/ be/ has been/ will be) back in about haft an hour.4) - I don't know how to use this computer. => OK, I ( am going to help/ am helping/ will help/ could help). 5) The girl fell ( of/ off/ out/ from) her bike and hit her head on the road.6) It's too cold outside. ( Would you like to shut the window/ Will you shut the window/ Shall I shut the window/Can I shut the window)? => Sure. I'll do it right now. 7) We were delighted ( get/ to get/ getting/ got) your letter last week. 8) Would you like ( me doing/ me do/ me to do/ that I do) that for you? Section II: Complete the second sentence so that it has the similar meaning to the first sentence ( 4 ms):1) I want you to help me solve this problem. => Can you help me solve this problem?2) I took off my shoes so that I couldn't make any noise. ( so as to) => I took off my shoes so as not to make any noise.3) Do you want me to empty the backet? => Shall I empty the backet?4) We moved to the front row because we wanted to get a better view. ( in order to)=> We moved to the front row in order to get a better view.Section III: Fill in the blanks with the appropriate form of the words in parentheses ( 2ms):1) Mary is very (conciousness) concious of those problems.



2) Cover the burn area with a thick sterile ( dress) dressing.3) Linda is one of the ( represent) representatives from Friends of the Earth.4) Compost is a wonderful ( fertilize) fertilizer. It helps plants grow.

Unit 11: TRAVELING AROUND VIET NAMI/ Aim: Helping students:- To express intervest.- To make and respond to formal requests.- To make suggestions.- To complete a narrtive.II/ Language Focus:1) Making requests with - Would / Do you mind if I ... ?

- Would/ Do you mind + infinitive ?2) -ed and -ing participles.III/ Vocabulary: (to) inport, (to) recognize, (to) sunbathe, accommodation (n), a canoe, corn (n), a crop, departure (n), florist (n), institute (n), limestone (n), stream (n), a sugar cane, tribe (n), a water buffalo, a waterfall, giant (adj), magnificent (adj), IV/ Allocation unit:

Lesson 1


Reading dialogue fot details about how to express interest.

Lesson 2

Speak Practice in making and responding to formal requests using MIND.

Lesson 3

ListenLanguage Focus 3 - 4

Listening for details about place directions and places of interest.Practice in making and responding to formal requests using MIND.

Lesson 4

Read Reading for information about places of interest in Viet Nam and making suggestions

Lesson 5

Write Complete a narrative.

Lesson 6

Language Focus 1 - 2

Practice in using -ed and -ing participle.


Unit 11: TRAVELING AROUND VIET NAMLesson 1: GETTING STARTED Page: 98 LISTEN AND READ Page: 99 - 100A/ Aim: Reading for details about how to express interest.B/ Objective: By the end of the lesson, students will be able to use some expressions to express their interest.C/ Teaching aids: Textbooks, posters. D/ Procedure: Dương Quang Minh English 8 144



Content

+ Warm up: Ask students to open their books on the page 98 and match the name with the pictures. Call on some students to give their answers.

+ Pre reading:- Bookshut.- Eliciting.- Recording.. Check: Bingo.. Set the scene: Put the chart with the questions on the board. Check if students understand the questions and have them a few minutes to think about the questions. Ask students to listen to the tape while reading the dialogue on page 99.

+ While reading:Have students work in pairs to answer the questions. Call on some pairs to give their answers. (It should be used as a listening task for good students, if not, use the text books.) Ask students to listen and say out True or False. Read the sentences aloud and wait for students answers. Ask some students to correct the false sentences and have students write their notebooks.

+ Post reading:

I/ Getting Started:Answer keys: a) Ngo Mon Gate b) Nha Rong Harborc) The Temple Liturature d) Ha Long Bay


- a crop [krɔp] : vụ mùa(translation/ explanation: something such as grain, rice, fruit, ...is grow in one season)- a sugar - cane ['∫ugə'kein] : cây mía(What is used to make sugar?)- a water - buffalo ['wɔ:tə'bʌfəlou] : con trâu(translation)

2/ Pre questions:a) Where does Hoa meet The Jones?b) Is it the first The Jones have visited Viet Nam?c) How do they travel to Ha Noi?d) What do they see along the road to Ha Noi?e) What would Tim like to do?Answer keys:a) Hoa meets The Jones at the airport.b) Yes, it is.c) By taxi.d) They see a boy riding a water buffalo, rice paddles, corn and sugar cane fields.e) He'd like to take a photo.

3/ True False statements:a) This is the first time Hoa has met Tim's familyb) Hoa helps Mrs Jones with her luggage.c) The Jones family is traveling from the airport in a bus.d) Shanon has never seen rice paddles before.e) The car is traveling past farmland.f) Only rice and corn are grown around Ha Noi.Answer keys: a) T b) T c) F d) T e) T f) Fc) The Jones family is traveling from the airport in a taxi.f) Not only rice and corn but also sugar canes are grown around Ha Noi.

5/ Discussion:*) to express interest:- I'd like you to meet my parents ...- It's nice to meet you ...- It's great to be in Viet Nam ...- I'd like to sit with Tim ...



Ask students to read the dialogue again, discuss with them and ask them to pick out the sentences containing the situations mentioned below.

*) to express a request:- Would you mind sitting in the front seat ...- Would you mind if I took a photo?

E/ Homework: Ask students to practice the dialogue in group of 5.

Week 24: Date: Saturday, February 6, 201..Period 66:

Unit 11: TRAVELING AROUND VIET NAMLesson 2: SPEAK Page: 100 - 101A/ Aim: To help students practice in making suggestions and using "mind" to make requests..B/ Objective: By the end of the lesson, students will be able to make and respond to formal rtequests using "mind" and make suggestions.C/ Teaching aids: Textbooks, posters, pictures. D/ Procedure:


Content

+ Warm up: Choose a students and ask him/ her to go to the front of class with his/ her back to the board so that he/ she cannot see what is written on the board. Write the information on the board. Ask the rest of the class try to help the student guess what is written on the board by asking questions until he/ she says out right the word's on the board.

+ Presentation:. Set the scene: Remind students of the exchanges between Hoa and Mr Jones and between Hoa and Tim in the last dialogue and elicit the sentences from students.. Concept check:

1/ Game ( What does it say?):Eg: On the board: Yes, I do. Ss ask: Do you like teacher? ........Or on the board: Every day.Ss ask: How often do you have a shower? .....

2/ Structures:a) Model sentences:1. A: Would you mind sitting in the front seat of the taxi? B: No problem.2. A: Would you mind if I took a photo? B: Not at all.b) Use: To make and respond to formal requests.c) Form: 1. WOULD YOU MIND + V-ing .............. ? DO YOU MIND 2. WOULD YOU MIND IF I + V-ed/ V-2 .............. DO YOU MIND IF I + V-s/-es/ infinitive .........

. Responses:1. Agreement:- No, I don't mind./ No, of course not./ Not at all./ Please do./ Please go ahead.2. Dissagreement:- I'm sorry, I can't./ I'm sorry, it's impossible./ I'd prefer you didn't./ I'd rather you didn't.



+ Practice: Prepare 4 cardboards ưith cues including check (v) and crose (x). Model the first cue 2 or 3 times. Call on 2 or 3 students to repeat it and correct. Go on with the same steps for the second cue. Ask students to work through the rest of the cues: new cue - new sentence.

+ Production: Demonstrate how to put the exchange together, using a good student. Open pairs: Get 3 or 4 pairs to demonstrate the exchanges. Stick all the cardboards on the board. Closed pairs: Get the whole class to practice all the exchanges. Monitor and correct.. Set the scene: You are a tourist on vacation in Ho Chi Minh City. You want to visit a market. This is the conversation between you and the tourist officer. Put the dialogue chart on the board. Elicit the exchanges from students and have them repeat. Open pairs: Ask some paies to demonstrate the dialogue. Closed pairs: Have students open their books and use the information on page 101 to practice other dialogue. Students in pairs should be assigned to work on dirrerent information each. Monitor and correct.

d) Meaning: Xin bạn cảm phiền ...........3/ Cardboard drill:

a) move/ car/ (v) c) get/ coffee/ (x)b) put out/ cigarette/ (v) d) wait/ moment/ (x)

a) Would you mind moving your car?=> No, of course not.b) Would you mind if I put out cigarette?=> No, of course not.c) Do you mind getting coffee?=> I'm sorry, I'm too busy right now.d) Do you mind if I wait me a moment?=> I'm sorry, I can't. I'm already late for work.

4/ Mapped dialogue:You Tourist officer

- Excuse me!

- I'd like to visit a market. Would you mind suggesting one?

- That sounds interesting. Thank you.

- Yes?

- Not at all. How about going to Thai Binh Market? It opens from about 5 am to 8 pm.

- You're welcome.Exchange dialogue:You: Excuse me!Tourist officer: Yes?You: I'd like to visit a market. Would you mind suggesting one?Tourist officer: Not at all. How about going to Thai Binh Market? It opens from about 5 am to 8 pm.You: That sounds interesting. Thank you.Tourist officer: You're welcome.

E/ Homework: Choose the information on page 101 and write down 2 complete dialogues, using your own words. Dương Quang Minh English 8 147



Unit 11: TRAVELING AROUND VIET NAMLesson 3: LISTEN Page: 102 LANGUAGE FOCUS 3 - 4 Page: 109 - 110A/ Aim: Listening for detailsabout the place directions and information about some places of interst in Viet Nam.B/ Objective: By the end of the lesson, students will be able to get information from simple tourist advertisements.C/ Teaching aids: Textbooks, cassette pictures. D/ Procedure:


Content

+ Warm up: Ask questions and call the student who puts his/ her hand up first to answer. Tell students each place consists of 3 questions; 3 points for the first question; 2 points for the second and 1 point for the third.

+ Pre listening:. Set the scene: The Jones family are going around Ha Noi and they are talking about the directions to 5 places in the maps. Listen to them and match the places to the correct positions on the map.

*/ Quiz ( What's this place?):a) Da Lat: 1. It is called the city of Eternal Spring. 2. It has a lot of waterfalls and lakes. 3. You can find the most kinds of flowers here.b) Nha Trang: 1. It's a seaside resort. 2. It has a very big monument of Buddha. 3. It has an Oceanic Institute.c) Sa Pa: 1. It is a mountainous resort. 2. It has tribal villages. 3. Sometiomes it has snow.d) Ha Long Bay: 1. It is recognized as a World Heritage Site by UNESSCO. 2. It has a lot of caves. 3. It consists of a lot of islands.

I/ Listen:1/ Prediction:2/ Listening:

Answer keys: a) restaurant b) hotel c) bus station d) pagoda e) templeTape transcript:Tim: Mom, I'm tired.Mrs Brown: All right. You go back to the hotel and we'll go and look at the pagoda.Tim: Okay, but how do I get to the hotel?Mrs Brown: Let me check the map. Oh, yes. It's Phong Lan



Put the map on the board and ask students to identify the places.

+ While listening: Ask students to listen. Play the tape 2 or 3 times. Tell students to work in pairs to compare their answers. Get students to give their answers and correct.

+ Post listening: Ask students to make and respond to requests. Give feedback.

Ask students to ask and give suitable responses.

Road, just off the highway. Tim: I remember. See you later.Mrs Brown: Bye.Shanon: I'm hurry, Mom.Mrs Brown: Can you wait until after we've seen the pagoda, Shanon? The restaurant's in Ho Tay Road. It's in the oppsite the direction from the pagoda.Shanon: Please, Mom. I'm starving.Mr Brown: I'll take you to the restaurant and get something to eat, Shanon. We'll let your mother go to the pagoda.Shanon: Thanks, Dad. Perhaps we can get some food at the restaurant and eat it beside the river.Mrs Brown: As you are going in the direction of the bus station, can you book seats on topmorrow's bus to Ho Chi Minh City? The bus station is just opposite the tourist information center.Mr Brown: All right.Mrs Brown: I'll se you back at the hotel.Shanon: How are you going to get to the pagoda, Mom?Mrs Brown: I'm going to walk ever the bridge and take the first road on the left. If I have time, I'll also visit an old temple, which is just past the pagoda in the road.Shanon: Bye, Mom. Have a nice time.Mrs Brown: I will, bye.

II/ Langue Focus 3 - 4:1/ Language Focus 3:

Answer keys: a) Would you mind moving your car?=> No, of course not.b) Would you mind if I put out cigarette? => No, of course not.c) Do you mind getting coffee?=> I'm sorry, I'm too busy right now.d) Do you mind if I wait me a moment?=> I'm sorry, I can't. I'm already late for work.

2/ Language Focus 4:a) Do you mind if I sit down? => Please do.b) Would you mind if I smoked? => I'd rather you didn't.c) Do you mind if I postpone our meeting? => Not at all.d) Do you mind if I turn off the stereo? => I'd rather you didn't.e) Would you mind if I turned on the air - conditioner?=> Please do.f) Do you mind if I watch TV while eating lunch?



=> No, of course not.E/ Homework: Ask students to do their exercises Language Focus 3 - 4 in their notebooks.


Unit 11: TRAVELING AROUND VIET NAMLesson 4: READ Page: 102 - 103 - 104 - 105 A/ Aim: Reading for details about the place directions and information about some places of interest in Viet Nam.B/ Objective: By the end of the lesson, students will be able to get information from simple tourist advertisements.C/ Teaching aids: Textbooks, posters, pictures. D/ Procedure:


Content

+ Warm up: Put the wordsquare poster on the board and inform the topic. Ask students to find 13 hidden words and write them on a poster of paper. Tell students to find out, the most right words will get 2 points.


. Check: Bingo.

1/ Wordsquare:A D D Y R E S O R TD C A T G B E A C HK N L R Y S A P A EB U A I M K S A P CA H T B V B I P J I`C A V E S L D K I TH L N L A K E C T AM O U N T A I N R DA N H A T R A N G EA G D E F G X C U L

Answer keys: resort, beach, Sa Pa, caves, lake,mountain, Nha Trang Bach Ma, Ha Long, Da Lat, trible, seaside, The Citadel

2/ Vocabulary:- accommodation (n) [ə,kɔmə'dei∫n]: thích nghi ( a place to live, work or stay in)- giant (adj) ['dʒaiənt]: khổng lồ(translation)- trible (n) [traib]: bộ tộc, bộ lạc(translation)- slope [sloup]: dốc, đường dốc, chỗ dốc, độ dốc( visual)- a jungle ['dʒʌηgl] : rừng nhiệt đới ( a very thick forest)- limestone (n) ['laimstoun] : đá vôi (translation)



+ While reading: Put the poster on the board, and ask students to match the words or phrases in column A to column B. Ask students to go to the board and draw the lines to conect the words.

Get students to open their books, read the text on page 105 and check (V) the boxes. Monitor and correct.

+ Post reading: Ask students to ask and answer the questions, then write down their notebooks . Give feedback.

3/ Matching ( vocabulary):1. mountain - climbing ['mauntin 'klaimiη]

2. sunbathe ['sʌn'beiđ]

3. florist ['flɔrist]

4. import ['impɔ:t]

a. người bán hoab. hàng nhập khẩuc. leo núid. tắm nắng

Answer keys: 1 + c 2 + d 3 + a 4 + b

4/ Matching ( interest or places):1. Nha Trang2. Da Lat

3. Sa Pa4. Ha Long Bay5. Nha Rong Harbor

a. tribal villages, mountain climbingb. The place where President Ho Chi Minh left Viet Nam in 1911.c. sưimming and sunbathingd. Oceanic Institutee. flower gardens

Answer keys: 1 + d 2 + e 3 + a 4 + c 5 + b

5/ Grid:Nha Trang

Da Lat

Sa Pa

Ha Long Bay

caves Vflight to Ha Noi Vhotels V V V local transport V V V Vmini - hotels V Vmountain - slopes Vrailway Vrestaurantssand beaches Vtourist attraction V V V Vtypes of foodvillages Vwaterfalls VWorld Heritage V

6/ Answer the questions:a) Where should Andrew go? => He should go to Sa Pa because there are tribal villages there.b) Where should Mary go?=> She should go to Nha Trang because there is railway there.



c) Where should John go? => He should go to Ho Chi Minh City because there is Nha Rong Harbor there.d) Where should Joanne go? => She should go to Ha Long Bay because there is sand beach there.e) Where should Donna go?=> He should go to Da Lat because there are flowers there.

E/ Homework: Have students to do exercises in their notebooks.

Week 25: Date: Saturday, February 20, 201..Period 69:

Unit 11: TRAVELING AROUND VIET NAMLesson 5: WRITE Page: 105 - 106 - 107A/ Aim: To help students practice in writing a narrative using a guided composition. B/ Objective: By the end of the lesson, students will be able to know how to write a narrative.C/ Teaching aids: Textbooks, charts, cardboards. D/ Procedure:


Content

+ Warm up: Get students to study the definition of a narrative by a gap fill. Put the missing words in a box on the board and have students to study first ( Use VietNamese). Show the chart and ask students to fill in the gaps with the words in the box. Ask students of each group to go to the board and write the words as fast as possible. Explain the definition in VietNamese.

+ Pre listening:- Bookshut.- Eliciting.- Recording.. Check: Jumble words.

+ While listening:

1/ Which word?written - climax - attention - brief - events

" A narrative is a sequence of (1) events. These events are usually ( 2) written in chronological order and often lead to a (3) climax. The first sentence of a narrative should get the reader's (4) attention and the ending should be (5) brief.Answer keys: (1) events ( 2) written (3) climax (4) attention (5) brief

2/ Vocabulary:- a canoe [kə'nu:] : xuồng(picture/ drawing)- (to) paddle ['pædl] : chèo xuồng( mime)- a paddle: mái chèo( a thing used to paddle)- (to) hire ['haiə]: cho thuê(translation)- (to) overturn ['ouvətə:n] : sự lật đổ, đảo lộn



. Set the scene: Last week, while on vocation in Da Lat. The Jones family had quite an unforgetable adventure on Xuan Huong Lake. What did they do and what happened to them? Ask students to open their books, read the first part of the story on page 105 and rearrange the sentences on page 106 to complete the story. Call on some pairs to give their answers and correct. Get some students to read the story aloud for the class and correct pronunciation errors. Have students look at the pictures on page 106 and 107 and gues the meaning of the new words. Write the vocabulary on the board and ask students to match them. Get students to copy. Ask students to look at the pictures again rearrange the events in the correct chronological order to make it a story. Call on some students to give theior answwers and correct. Ask students to use the pictures already rearranged and the given words to write the story about Uyen. Monitor and help students with words or structures while they are writing. After students finish, call on some students to read their story aloud for the class. Give feedback and correct. Ask students to notice the Past Simple tense in often used in a narrative.

(drawing ) - (to) rescue ['reskju:] : giải thoát, cứu, cứu nguy(definition/ to save somebody's life from danger)a) cusere = rescue b) enaco = canoe c) apdled = paddled) erhi = hire e) ventuader = adventure f) erovutrn = overturn

3/ Ordering statements:a) The canoe moved up and down the water.b) A boat appeared and rescued them.c) The wind started to blow and the rain became heavier.d) She leaned over and tried to pick it up.e) The family was very lucky.f) The canoe overturned and everyone fell into the deep and dangerous water.g) Shannon dropped her paddle.Answer keys: 1. c 2. a 3. g 4. d 5. f 6. b 7. e

4/ Matching (vocabulery):1. (to) stumble ['stʌmbl]

2. (to) go off ['gou'ɔ:f]

3. (to) realize ['riəlaiz]

a) lúc xuất phát, văng lênb) nhận rac) trượt chân

Answer keys: 1.c 2.a 3.b

5/ Ordering pictures:Answer keys: 1. d 2. b 3. e 4.h 5. a 6. f 7. c 8. g

6/ Write it up:Answer keys:“ Uyen had a day to remember last week. d) She had a Math exam on Friday but she got up late.b) She realized her alarm clock did not go off. e) As she was leaving home, it started to rain heavily. h) Uyen tried to run as fast as she could. a) Suddenly, she stumbled against a rock and fell (onto the road).f) Her schoolbag went into a pool ( of water) and everything got wet.c) Strangly, the rein stopped as she got to her classroom.g) Luckily, Uyen had enough time to finish her exam.

E/ Homework: Get students write the whole story in their notebooks. Dương Quang Minh English 8 153



Unit 11: TRAVELING AROUND VIET NAMLesson 6: LANGUAGE FOCUS 1 - 2 Page: 108 - 109A/ Aim: To help students practice in using -ED and -ING participles.B/ Objective: By the end of the lesson, students will be able to use present and past participles to describe things and people.C/ Teaching aids: Textbooks, posters, pictures cardboards. D/ Procedure:


Content

+ Warm up: Ask students to open their books and observe the picture on page 109 carefully.

+ Presentation: Ask students to open their books and look at the picture on page 108.. Set the scene: It's time for recess and the people at Quang Trung School are in the school yard. What are they doing? Ask questions and call on students to answer then correct.

Elicit the target language by asking the question below then have students repeat. Have students to copy.

+ Practice: Show the cardboards and have students run through the situations again.

*/ Memory game:Answer keys: box, lamp, truck, doll, flowers, elephant, bear, rabbit,

I/ Language Focus 1:1/ Answer the questions:

T: What's Mr Quang doing?S: He's walking up the stairs.T: What's Miss Lien doing?S: She's carrying a bag./ talking to Nam.T: What's Nam doing?S: He's standing next to Miss Lien./ talking to Miss Lien.T: What's Ba doing?S: He's sitting under the tree./ reading a book.T: What's Lan doing?S: She's standing by the table.T: What are Nga and Hoa doing?S: They are playing chess.

2/ Structure:a) Model sentence:Who is the man walking up the stairs? - The man walking up the stairs is Mr Quang.b) Form: V-ing ( Present participle)c) Use: A present participle ( phrase) can be used as an adjective to quality a noun with active meaning..

3/ Word cue drill:a) Mr Quang/ walking up the stairs=> The man walking up the stairs is Mr Quang.b) Miss LIen/ carrying a bag=> The woman carrying a bag is Miss Lien.c) Nam/ standing next to Miss Lien=> The boy standing next to Miss Lien is Nam.



+ Presentation: Ask students to look at the words in the box and the pictures on page 109 to do the matching.

Ask students to look at the pictures on page 109 again and answer the questions.

Elicit the target language by asking the question below then have students repeat. Get students to copy.

+ Practice: Have students to look at their books, listen to the questions and answer. Ask students to work in pairs, asking and answering

d) Ba/ sitting under the tree=> The boy sitting under the tree is Ba.e) Lan/ standing by the table=> The girl standing by the table is Lan.f) Nga on the right and Hoa on the left/ playing chess => The girls playing chess are Nga on the right and Hoa on the left.

II/ Language Focus 2:1/ Matching:

1. box2. truck3. lamp4. doll5. flowers6. toys

a. wrap inb. dress inc. recycled fromd. keep ine. make inf. paint

Answer keys: 1. f 2. c 3. e 4. b 5. a 6. d

2/ Answer the questions:a) Where is the old lamp made in? => China.b) What color is the box painted? => Green.c) What is the truck recycled from? => Aluminum cans.d) What color is the doll dress in ? => Pink.e) What are the the flowers wrapped in? => Yellow paper.f) Where are the toys kept? => In the cardboard box.

3/ Structure:a) Model sentence:- How much is the old lamp made in China?+ The old lamp made in China is five dollars.b) Form: V-ed/ V-3 ( Past participle)c) Use: A past participle ( phrase) can be used as an adjective to quality a noun with passive meaning.

4/ Question - Answer Drill:a) the box painted green/ $1 - How much is the box painted green? => The box painted green is one dollar.b) truck made from recycled aluminum cans/ $2 - How much is the truck made from recycled aluminum cans? => The truck made from recycled aluminum cans is two dollars.



the questions. Call on some pairs to demonstrate for the class.

+ Production: Ask students to use the right form of the verbs in the box to fill in the gaps.

c) doll dressed in pink/ $2 - How much is the doll dressed in pink? => The doll dressed in pink is two dollars.d) flowers wrapped in yellow paper/ $1- How much is the flowers wrapped in yellow paper?=> The flowers wrapped in yellow paper is one dollar.e) toys kept in a cardboard box/ $10- How much is the toys kept in a cardboard box?=> The toys kept in a cardboard box is ten dollars.

5/ Gap fill:sit - break - live - water - sing

a) The girl living at 50 Tran Hung Dao in my friend.b) The garden watered every morning is full of flowers.c) The cat sitting on the table is hers.d) The vase broken yesterday is my father's favorite one.e) The woman singing on the stage is my neighbor.Answer keys: a) living b) watered c) sitting d) broken e) singing

E/ Homework: Ask students to do exercise in their notebooks.

Week 25: Date: Tuesday, February 23, 2010Period 71:


A/ Aim: Helping students to review with the knowledge of the situations which repaire first - aid, to make and respond to offers, promises and respond, to write a thank – you note, to give and respond to instructions, to talk about feelings, to write a set of instructions to express intervest, to make and respond to formal requests, to make suggestions, to complete a narrtive.B/ Language Focus:1) in order to, so as to2) Making requests, offers and requests using modal “will”.3) Further Simple with “ will/ shall”. 4) Passive forms.5) Adjectives followed by - an infinitive - a noun clause6) Present Simple.7) Future Simple. 8) Making requests with - Would / Do you mind if I ... ? - Would/ Do you mind + infinitive ?9) -ed and -ing participles.C/ Teaching aids: Paper test.D/ Procedure:



Full name: ......................................................................Class: 8 ......


Score:

I/ Choose the best words: (2 ms) 1) Could I help you ( with/ of/ on/ to) your luggage? 2) People use first - aid ( so that/ in order to/ so as not to/ in order that) ease the victim's pain and anxiety. 3) English ( speak/ speaks/ is spoken/ has spoken) all over the world.4) They are happy ( to save/ when save/ when saving/ that saving) money from recycled things.5) ( Compost/ Tire/ Plastic/ Leather) helps plants grow. 6) Would you mind sitting ( on/ at/ during/ in) the front seat?7) The woman ( holds/ holding/ is holding/ was holding) a brown handbag is Minh's aunt. 8) The lamp ( made/ was made/ is made/ makes) in Japan is fifty dollars. II/ Turn into the passive voice: (2ms)1) Our father often takes us to the zoo at weekends. => ................................................................ .2) Nga wrote a letter to her pen pal yesterday. => ......................................................................... .III/ Supply the correct verb form: (3 ms)1) The girls ( play) .............................................................................. badminton are Lan and Hoa.2) Would you mind if I ( ask) ......................................................................... you some questions?3) Would you like ( go) ................................................................... to the movie with me tonight? => Thanks, I'd love to. What time ................................. the film ( begin) .................................... ?4) Tom ( love) .............................. playing soccer but he ( not like) .............................. swimming.IV/ Use the cues given to complete the following sentences: (1 m) 1) Jim/ sad/ not be/ member of the club. => ................................................................................... . 2) Her father/ angry/ see/ her/ come home/ late/ last night. => ...................................................... . V/ Read the following passage. Then answer the questions below: (2 ms) Ha Long - Bay of the Descending Dragon - is popular with both VietNamese and international tourists. One of the attractions of Ha Long is the Bay's calm water with limestone mountains. The Bay's water is clear during the spring and early summer. Upon arriving in Ha Long City, vositors can go along Chay Beach. From the beach, they can hire a boat and go out the Bay. It is here that the visitors can find some of Southeast Asia's most beautiful sites. Dau Go Cave is one of the most beautiful caves of Ha Long. It was the cave in which General Tran Hung Dao hid wooden stakes to beat the Mongols on Bach Dang River in 1288. 1) Who(m) is Ha Long popular with? => ....................................................................................... . 2) What can visitors do when they arrive in Ha Long City? => .................................................... . Dương Quang Minh English 8 157


3) In Dau Go Cave one of the most beautiful caves at Ha Long or not? => .................................. .4) Where did General Tran Hung Dao hide wooden stakes to beat the Mongols on Bach Dang River in 1288? => ......................................................................................................................... .

Week 26: Date: Saturday, February 27, 2010Period 72:

CORRECT THE TESTA/ Aim: Helping students to review with the knowledge of the situations which repaire first - aid, to make and respond to offers, promises and respond, to write a thank – you note, to give and respond to instructions, to talk about feelings, to write a set of instructions to express intervest, to make and respond to formal requests, to make suggestions, to complete a narrtive.B/ Objective: By the end of the lesson, students will be able to know more mistakes in test.C/ Teaching aids: Paper test.D/ Procedure:I/ Choose the best words: (2 ms) 1) with 2) in order to 3) is spoken 4) to save 5) Compost 6) in 7) holding 8) made II/ Turn into the passive voice: (2ms)1) => We are often taken to the zoo by our father at weekend.2) => A letterwas written to Nga's pen pal ( by her) yesterday.III/ Supply the correct verb form: (3 ms)1) The girls ( play) playing badminton are Lan and Hoa.2) Would you mind if I ( ask) asked you some questions?3) Would you like ( go) to go to the movie with me tonight? => Thanks, I'd love to. What time does the film ( begin) begin?4) Tom ( love) loves playing soccer but he ( not like) doesn't like swimming.IV/ Use the cues given to complete the following sentences: (1 m) 1) => Jim is sad that he is not a member of the club. 2) => Her father was angry to see her come home late last night. V/ Read the following passage. Then answer the questions below: (2 ms) 1) => Ha Long Bay is popular with VietNamese and international tourists. 2) => They can go along Chay Beach, from the beach, they can hire a beat and go out to the Bay, where they can find some of Southeast Asia's most beautiful sites.3) => Dau Go Cave is one of the most beautiful caves at Ha Long.4) => He hid wooden stakes in Dau Go Cave to beat the Mongols on Bach Dang River in 1288.

Unit 12: A VACATION ABROADI/ Aim: Helping students:- To make plans. Dương Quang Minh English 8 158


- To make, accept and decline invitations.- To ask and answer questions about the ưeather.- To ửite a postcard.II/ Language Focus:1) The Past Progressive tense.2) The Past Progressive with When and While.3) The Present Progressive with "always".III/ Vocabulary: (to) bother, (to) carve, (to) include, (to) pick up, (to) pour, (to) come over, a brochure, a gallery, an itinerary, lava (n), a prison, sightseeing (n), valley (n), wharf (n), a volcano, overhead (adj) IV/ Allocation unit:

Lesson 1

Getting StartedListen and ReadL F 3

Reading for details about making, accepting and declining invitation.Practice in past progressive with "always".

Lesson 2

Speak Practice in making plans.

Lesson 3

ListenL F 1 - 2

Listening for information about the weather.Practice in past progressive with When and While.

Lesson 4

Read Reading for information about places of interest in the world.

Lesson 5

Write Practice in writing a postcard.

Week 26: Date: Tuesday, March 2, 2010Period 73:

Unit 12: A VACATION ABROADLesson 1: GETTING STARTED Page: 111 LISTEN AND READ Page: 112 - 113 LANGUAGE FOCUS 3 Page: 120A/ Aim: Reading for details about making plans for a vacation abroad.Practice in past progressive with "always".B/ Objective: By the end of the lesson, students will be aware of how to make, accept and decline invitationsand practice in Present Progressive Tense with "always".C/ Teaching aids: Textbooks, pictures, chart. D/ Procedure:


Content

+ Warm up: Ask students to match the name of the countries with pictures/ flags.


I/ Getting started: Matching the name of the countries in the box with appropriate pictures/ flags.Answer keys: a) The United Startes of America b) Australia c) Thailand d) Britain e) Canada f) Japan

II/ Listen and Read:



. Check: Rub out and Remember.. Set the scene: Mrs Quyen is going to the Usa for a vocation. She is ringing her friend, Mrs Smith, to tell her about the trip.

+ While reading: Ask students to work in pairss to decide if the statements are true or false. Get students to give their answers and write them on the board. Have students open their books, listen to the tape while reading the dialogue on page 112. Call on some students to correct the false statements. Draw the grid on the board and have students copy it. Ask students to open their books and read the dialogue. Ask students to work in pairs to complete Mrs Quyen's schedule with the information taken from the dialogue. Call on some students to go to the board to write the infromation in the grid on the board. Ask students to look at their books and answer the questions on page 113. Let students compare their answers with their partner. Call on some students to answer. Give feedback and correct.

1/ Vocabulary:- (to) include [in'klu:d] : bao gồm (translation)- (to) come over [kʌm 'ouvə] : mời đến(explanation/ to come to someone's house to visit for a short time)- ( to) pick (someone up) [pik ʌp] : đón, rước (explanation/ to come and get someone in your car to drive him/ her to a place)- abroad [ə'brɔ:d] (adv): ở nước ngoài = in a foreign country => (to) be/ go/ travel/ live abroad

2/ True - False statements:a) Mrs Quyen is calling Mrs Smith from the airport in San Francisco.b) Mrs Smith invites Mrs Quyen and her husband to stay with her while they are in town.c) Mrs Quyen doesn't accept Mrs Smith's invitation because she wants to stay with a VietNamese friend of hers.d) Mrs Quyen and her husband will be in the USA for 3 days.e) Mrs Quyen and her husband will come over to Mrs Smith's place for dinner on night.f) Mr Thanh; Mrs Quyen's husband, goes abroad for a business meeting.Answer keys: a) F b) T c) F d) T e) F f) Ta) Mrs Quyen is calling Mrs Smith from the airport in Ha Noi.c) Mrs Quyen doesn't accept Mrs Smith's invitation because her accommodation is included in her ticket price.e) Only Mrs Quyen will come over to Mrs Smith's place for dinner on night.

3/ Grid:Date Mon 25 Tue

26Wed 27 Thur 28

Schedule Coming to San Francisco

Going out

Having dinner with the Smiths

Leaving San Francisco

4/ Answer the questions:a) Will Mrs Quyen and her husband stay at Mrs Smith's house? Why? Why not? => No, they won't. Because they are coming on a tour and their accommodation is included in the ticket price, so they will stay at the hotel.b) Will Mrs Quyen's husband have dinner with the Smiths? Why (not)? => No, he won't. Because he will have a business meeting in



+ Post reading:. Set the scene: Elicit the model from students, using VietNamese. Have students repeat and write the sentence on the board. Ask students to look at the pictures. Model the first picture and have students repeat. Ask students to work through the rest of the pictures. Call on some students to go to the board to write the statements.

the evening that day.c) How will Mrs Quyen go to Mrs Smith's house?=> Mrs Smith will pick her up at the hotel.

III/ Language Focus 3:1) Structure:

a) Model sentence:- Bao is always forgetting his homework.b) Form:S + BE (am/ is are) + V-ing ..............

c) Use: to express a complaint2) Practice:

a) Bao is always forgetting his homework.b) Mrs Nga is always losing her umbrella.c) They (Mr and Mrs Thanh) are always missing the bus.d) Nam is always watching TV.e) Na is always talking on the phone.f) Liem is always going out.

E/ Homework: Ask students to do exercise LF 3 in their notebooks.

Week 26: Date: Tuesday, March 2, 2010Period 74:

Unit 12: A VACATION ABROADLesson 2: SPEAK Page: 113 - 114 A/ Aim: To get students to practice in making plans using tourist brochures and flight information.B/ Objective: By the end of the lesson, students will be able to talk about their plans for a trip abroad.C/ Teaching aids: Textbooks. D/ Procedure:


Content

+ Warm up: Tell students the student who can answer the question will get 1 or 2 good marks.

+ Presentaion:- Bookshut.- Eliciting.- Recording.

1/ Quiz:a) What's the end of everything? - Letter g.b) What work starts with T, ends with T, and is full of T? - Teapot; Pot => full of teac) What's the middle of New York City? - York.d) Which river in America has 4 eyes? - Mississippi ; Four eyes => hononym

2/ Vocabulary:- an itinerary [ai'tinərəri; i'tinərəri] : lộ trình(explanation/ translation/ a plan for a journey including the route and the places you visit.)- a gallery ['gæləri] : phòng trưng bày tranh(situation/ I go to this place to see works of arts to be shown.



. Check: Slap the board. Ask students to read the dialogue on page 113 then complete itinerary.

+ Practic:. Set the scene: These people are making a plan for their trip from Los Angeles to Boston. Let's do it with them. Put the mapped dialogue chart on the board. Elicit the exchanges from students. Have some pairs practice each exchange before going on to another exchange. After finishing the dialogue, ask a good pair to demonstrate the whole dialogue. Ask some pairs to demonstrate dialogue. Ask students to work in pairs, replacing the information using the tables. Monitor and correct.

+ Production: Ask students to make a plan for their coming summer holiday by filling the information in their itinerary. Call on some pairs to demonstrate their plans for the class. Give feedback and correct.

What's it in English?)- a flight [flait] = a journey made by plane: chuyến bay- via ['vaiə] (prep) = through a place: băng qua- faclities [fə'siliti] (n): phương tiện, tiện nghi(translation)- a brochure ['brou∫ə] : tập quảng cáo(realia/ => travel brochure)

3/ Complete itinerary:Depart Los Angeles: Flioght 835 at 10:00 on Mon.Arrive Boston: At 4:00.Acommodation: Atlantic Hotel.Sightseeing: Boston University, Museum and art galleries.Depart Boston: Flight 710 at 10:00 on Thursday, 22.

4/ Mapped dialogue:Nam Lan

- Where ... stay?

- Where ... visit?

- What time ... Los Angeles?

- The Revere Hotel ... expensive, but ... gym.

- I think we should ... Havard Medical School, the Museum and Arts Gallery.

- There's ... at 10 am, ... ?Exchange:Nam: Where shall we stay?Lan: The Revere Hotel is expensive, but it has a gym.Nam: Where should we visit?Lan: I think we should visit Havard Medical School, the Museum and Arts Gallery.Nam: What time should we leave Los Angeles? Lan: There's a daily flight at 10 am, would that be OK ?

5/ Transformation:Depart Quang Ngai: ................................................................Arrive Ho Chi Minh City: ......................................................Acommodation: ......................................................................Sightseeing: ............................................................................Depart Ho Chi Minh City: ......................................................

E/ Homework: Ask students to write your itinerary in their notebooks.



Week 27: Date: Saturday, March 6, 2010Period 75:

Unit 12: A VACATION ABROADLesson 3: LISTEN Page: 115

LANGUAGE FOCUS 1 - 2 Page: 119 - 120 A/ Aim: Listening for information about the weather.B/ Objective: By the end of the lesson, students will be able to practice in listening to the weather forecast for information about the weather in big cities in the world.C/ Teaching aids: Textbooks, chart, cassatte. D/ Procedure:


Content


Write the topic on the board. Ask students to find the words related to the topic. Collect students' words and write them on the board. Ask students some questions to lead the lesson.

+ While listening: Put the gap fill table on the board. Have students copy in their notebooks. Tell students are going to listen the weather forecast about the cities in the table and have to fill in the gaps with the information they hear. Tell students to work in pairs to conmpare their answers. Get students to give their answers and correct. Have students copy the answer.

+ Post listening: Have students ask and

I/ Listen:1/ Chain game:

Yesterday, I went shopping and bought a lot of things.2/ Brainstorm:

Words related to the weather forcastAnswer keys: cloudy, cool, cold, warm, hot, dry, fine, humid, rainy, snowy, sunny, wet, windy, stormy, degree, minus, Centigrade, ......

3/ Chatting:Suggesstions:a) Have you ever listened to the weather forecast on TV or on the radio?b) What does it often tell you about? => ( weather and temperature).c) Do you think it's necessary to listen to the weather forecast? Why/ Why not?d) What do you know about the high and the low temperaturet? => ( It refers to the lowest and highest temperautre degrees in a day.)

4/ Gap fill:City Weather Temperaute

Low High1. Sydney dry; windy 20 262. Tokyo dry; windy 15 223. London humid;

cold-3 7

4. Bangkok warm; dry 24 325. New York

windy; cloudy

8 15



answer the questions about the weather and temperature using the information in the table. Model, using a good student. Write the exchanges on the board. Open pairs. Ask a pair to demonstrate the exchanges. Close pairs. Have the whole class practice speaking, using the information in the table. Monitor and correct. Call on some pairs to demonstrate the exchanges before the class.

+ Presentation: Ask students to look at the pictures on page 119. Tell students to listen and number the pictures. Read the words aloud. Call on some students to give their anwers. Give feedback and correct.. Set the scene: (Look at the picture a)! What was ba doing at 8 o'clock last night?" Elicit the answer from students, got students to repair and write the sentence on the board. Continue to picture f) with the same steps. - "What were Lan and her Grandma doing at that time?"

6. Paris cool; dry 10 16Tape transcript: "And here is today's weather forcast for the international traveler.1. Let's start with Sydney. It will be a dry in Sydney today, and windy. For the temperature, the low will be twenty and the high will be twenty-six degrees.2. Tokyo will be dry and windy, with a low of fifteen and a high of twenty-two.3. London is going to have a humid day. It will be very cold with a low of minus three and a high of seven.4. Bangkok will be warm and dry, with a low of twenty-four degrees centigrade and a high of twenty-two. 5. New york is going to have a windy day. It will be clowdy with a low of eight and a high of fiftee.6. In Paris, it will be cool and dry today. The low will be ten degrees and the high will be sixteen."

5/ Role play:Exchange:A: What's the weather like in Sydney today?B: It will be dry and windy.A: How about the temperautre?B: The low will be 20 and the high 26 degrees.

II/ Language Focus 1:1/ Ordering pictures:

1. walk with a dog 2. eat dinner3. take a shower 4. talk a Grandma5. read a comic 6. write a letterAnswer keys: a.3 b.2 c.5 d.6 e.1 f.4

2/ Structure:a) Model sentence:- Ba was talking a shower at 8 oc'lock last night.- They were talking to each other at that time.b) Form: (Past progressive tense)Was/ were V-ing

c) Use: to indicate an action that was in progress at a point of time in the past.

3/ Word cue drill:a) Hoa/ eat dinner=> Hoa was eating dinner at 8 oc'lock last night.b) Bao/ read a comic=> Bao was reading a comic at 8 oc'lock last night.c) Nga/ write a letter=> Nga was writing a letter at 8 oc'lock last night.d) Na/ walk with her dog



+ Practice: Show the cardboards and go throgh the verbs. Model the first sentence and have students repeat. Ask the whole class work through the rest of the cues. Call on some students to go to the board and write the sentence.

+ Presentation: Ask students to look at the pictures on page 119. Call on some students to give their anwers. Elicit model sentence by asking the questions. - What was the Le family doing when the mailman came? - What happened while Nga was eating? Get students to coppy.

+ Practice: Put the photocopied pictures on the board in the order of the word cues. Model the first sentence and have students repeat. Ask students to work through the rest of the cues.

=> Na was walking with her dog at 8 oc'lock last night.e) Lan / talk to her grandmother=> Lan was talking to her grandmother at 8 oc'lock last night.

III/ Language Focus 2:1/ Matching:

Answer keys: a.C b.F c.E d.B e.D f.a

2/ Structure:a) Model sentence:- The Le family was sleeping when the mailman came.- The phone rang while Hoa was eating.b) Form: (Past progressive tense)Past Progressive

When Past Simple

Past Simple While Past Progressivec) Use: Sequence of tense: An action was taking place in the past when another action took place.

3/ Picture drill:a) Hoa/ eating/ the phone/ ring=> While Hoa was eating, the phone rang.b) Nam/ win the race/ the crowd/ cheer=> When Nam won the race, the crowd was cheering.c) Mrs Thoa/ cook/ Tuan/ arrive home=> Mrs Thoa was cooking when Tuan arrived home.d) Lan/ arrive at school/ the school drum/ sound=> When Lan arrived at school, the school drum was sounding.e) It/ rain/ the plane/ get to Ha Noi=> It was raining when the plane got to Ha Noi.

E/ Homework: Ask students to write, using the information in the table to write a weather report.

Week 27: Date: Wednesday, March 10, 2010Period 76:

Unit 12: A VACATION ABROADLesson 4: READ Page: 116 - 118 A/ Aim: Reading for information about the places of the intersest in the world.B/ Objective: By the end of the lesson, students will be able to obtain some knowledge about some scenic sports in the USA.C/ Teaching aids: Textbooks, postcards, pictures.



D/ Procedure: Teacher’s and Students’

activitiesContent

+ Warm up:


. Check: Ordering. Write the vocabulary on the board randomly. Have students copy the words into their exercise notebooks. Read the paragraph aloud. Get students to compare their answers with their partners. Ask students to give their answers and read the text again to correct.

+ While reading: Draw the grid on the board. Ask students to copy the grid in their notebooks. Ask students to read the postcards from Mrs Quyen to her children and fill in the gaps with the information taken from them. Call on some students to go to the board and write the information in the grid on the board. Give feedback and coerrect.

1/ Palmanism:1. humid

2. warm

3. windy

4. dry 5. cloudy

6. humidily

7. warmth

8. wind

9. dryness

10. cloud

11. coolness

2/ Vocabulary:- a volcano [vɔl'keinou] : núi lửa(picture/ drawing) - lava ['lɑ:və] (n): dung nham ( picture/ drawing)- (to) pour out [pɔ: aut]: chảy tràn( picture/ drawing)- (to) carve [kɑ:v]: khắc, tạc(mimi/ explanation)- (to) be situated [bi: 'sitjueitid] : bên cạnh(translation)- overhead ['ouvəhed] (adv): ở phía trên

3/ Odering: " Mrs Quyen and her husband visited many places of interest in the USA while they were there. First they went swimming at Waikiki Beach situated on the Hawaiian Island of Oahu. There they could see the lava pouring out of the Kilawea Volcano when they flew oeverhead. They also saw the heads of four American Presidents carved into the rock of Mount Rushmore..." Answer keys: volcano (6) overhead (7) Island (3) lava (4) went swimming (1) pouring out (5) carved (8) situated (2)

4/ Grid: Place What she did and saw

a. Hawaii went swimming, visited Kilawea Volcano

b. New York went shopping, bought lots of souvernirs

c. Chicago saw Lake Michigand. Mount Rushmore

saw the heads of 4 American Presidents

e. San Francisco visited Fisherman's wharf, the Napa Valley wino-growing area and the Alcatraz Prison

5/ Comprehension questions:



+ Post reading: Ask stusents to look at the questions on page 118 and answer the questions. Tell them to comparte their answers with their partners. Call on some pairs to give their answers and give feedback.

a) How did Mrs Quyen go to Kilawea Volcano?=> She went there by plane.b) Where in San Francisco did Mrs Quyen see the famous prison? => She saw the famous prison on the island of Alcatraz.c) What is special about Mount Rushmore? => It is the mount where the heads of four American Presidents are carved into the rock, and it can be seen from more than 100 kms away.d) What is the other name of Chicago?=> It is also called "The windy City".e) What did Mrs Quyen do while her husband was visiting the Statue of Librety? => She went shopping.

E/ Homework: Write the answers into their notebooks.

Week 27: Date: Wednesday, March 10, 2010 Period 77:

Unit 12: A VACATION ABROADLesson 4: WRITE Page: 118 A/ Aim: To get students to practice in writing a postcard.B/ Objective: By the end of the lesson, students will be able to write postcadr to their friends about their trip.C/ Teaching aids: Textbooks, chart, drawing. D/ Procedure:


Content

+ Warm up: Write the numbers on the board. Tell students each number is for a question but 4 of them are lucky numbers. For a lucky number, students will get 2 points.Ask students to answer briefly.

+ Pre writing:. Set the scene: From the USA, Mrs Quyen sent a postcard to her friend Sally to tell her about the trip. Ask students to look at the postcard on page 118 and

1/ Wordsquare:1. Where did Mrs Quyen and her husband spend their holiday? => In the USA.2. Lucky number.3. What did they see on Mount Rushmore? => The heads of 4 American Presidents carved into the rock.4. Who did they visit when they were in the USA? => The Smiths.5. Lucky number.6. What did Mrs Quyen do while her husband was visiting the Statue of Libety? => She went shopping.7. Lucky number.8. What did Mrs Quyen buy? => Lots of souvernirs.9. What did she send to her children from the USA?



complete the gaps with the appropiate words. Call on some students to go to the board and write the words they guess. Give feedback. Write the topic on the board. Ask students to look at part 2 on page 118. Go through the instructions by using questions. Draw on the grid the board. Let students copy the grid. Ask students to read the postcard again and fill in the gaps with the sentences showing the information on the left. Call on some students to go to the board and write their answers in the grid. Give feedback and correct. Ask students to write the grid in their notebooks.

+ While writing:. Set the scene: Imagine you are a tourist on vocation in a certain place/city in Vietnam. Write a postcard to a friend about your trip, using the information in the grid. Tell students to write the postcard on the piece of paper. Monitor and assist students with their writing.

+ Post reading: Call on some students to the front of the class and ask them to read their postcards to the whole class. Give feedback and correct.

=> Postcards.10. Lucky number.

2/ Gap fill: Dear Sally, We are having a wornderful time (1) ...... the USA. The (2) ...... are friendly and the (3) ...... has been warm and sunny. In San Francisco, I (4) ...... my friend, Sandra and (5) ...... family. It was (6) ...... to see them. I (7) ....... lots of souvernirs (8) ........ the childen. Thanh is always complainting about the (9) ......... of my suicase. See you (10) ...... . Love, Quyen.Answer keys: 1. in 2. people 3. weather 4. visited 5. her 6. nice/ lovely 7. bought 8. for 9. heaviness 10. soon

3/ Grid:Place We are having a

wonderful time in the USAHow you feel about the people

The people are friendly

Weather The weather has been warm and sunny

Who you meet/ visit In San Francisco,visited friends- Sansra Smith

What you buy Bought lots of souvernirs4/ Writing:

Dear Sally, We are having a wornderful time in the USA. The people are friendly and the weather has been warm and sunny. In San Francisco, I visited my friend, Sandra and her family. It was lovely/ nice to see them. I bought lots of souvernirs for the childen. Thanh is always complainting about the heaviness of my suicase. See you soon . Love, Quyen."

5/ Exhibition:



E/ Homework: Write your postcard into their notebooks.

Unit 13: FESTIVALSI/ Aim: Helping students:- To ask for explanations of events.- To give an account of something.- To write a paragraph about what was done.II/ Language Focus:1. Passive Form: BE + Past Participle.2. Compound words.3. Reported speech.III/ Vocabulary: (to) award, (to) fetch, (to) participate, (to) separate, (to) urge, (to) yell, (to) rub, (to) spread, carol (n), competition (n), council (n), husk (n), patron saint (n), pomegranate (n), teammate (n), judge (n), tradition patron saint (n), jolly (adj),IV/ Allocation unit:

Lesson 1

Getting Started Listen and ReadLanguage Focus 3

Compound words.Ask for explanations of events.

Lesson 2

Speak Practice in talking about preparations for a special event.

Lesson 3

Listen Listening for details about the preparations for Tet.

Lesson 4

Read Reading for details about Christmas.

Lesson 5

Write Practice in writing a paragraph about what has been done.

Lesson 6

Language Focus 1 - 2 - 4

Practice in reported speech. Passive forms. Reported speech.


Unit 13: FESTIVALSLesson 1: GETTING STARTED Page: 121

LISTEN AND READ Page: 121 - 122LANGUAGE FOCUS 3 Page: 130

A/ Aim: Reading for details about the traditional festivals. B/ Objective: By the end of the lesson, students will be able to ask for explanations of events. C/ Teaching aids: Textbooks, posters, cassette. D/ Procedure:


Content

+ Warm up: I/ Getting started:



Write the names on the board: Tom, David, Huckleberry, Oliver, Robinson Tell students these people are going to go on their visits to Vietnam and they need advice on where to go. Introduce the names, one by one.

+ Pre reading:- Bookshut.- Eliciting.- Recording.. Check: What and Where.. Set the scene: Ba invites his friend Liz to a traditional festival in the North of Vietnam. Do you know what kind of festival it is? (it is the rice cooking festival.) Ask students to guess what they are going to read by asking questions then write students' answers on the board.+ How many competitions do people enter in a rice-cooking festival? (3)+ In water-fetching competition, what do people do? How about a fire-making competition? A rice-cooking competition?ask students to open their books on page 121 - 122, read the dialogue and listen to the tape.

+ While reading: Ask students to read the statements on page 122 and check the boxes, using the information in the dialogue. Get students to give their answers and correct the false sentences.

Chatting:1) Tom likes swimming and sunbathing. Where should he go? Why?2) David is interested in ancient cities. Where should he go? Why?3) Huckleberry likes mountain climbing. Where should he go? Why?4) Oliver is keen on pottery. Where should she go? Why?5) Robinsonis fond of crowded place. Where should he go? Why?


- (to) fetch [fet∫] : đem về(denifition/ to go to get (something) and bring it back)- (to) yell [jel]: la hét = (to) shout loudly- (to) urge [ə:dʒ]: thúc giục(translation/explanation/ to make a person/ an animal move more quickly)- (to) rub [rʌb]: cọ sát(mime)- (to) participate [pɑ:'tisipeit]: tham gia = (to) take part (in something)- participation (n) [pɑ:,tisi'pei∫n] : sự tham gia - (to) award [ə'wɔ:d]: thưởng(situation: he is the winner of the competition. They (award him the first price)- to award (someone) (something) = to award (something) to (someone)

3/ Open prediction:Rice-cooking festival

(water-fetching)

to fetch water

(fire-making)to make a fire

(rice-cooking)to cook rice

4/True - False statements:a) Two team members take part in the water-fetching contests.b) One person has to collect four water bottles.c) The fire is made without matches or lighters.d) Pieces of wood are used to make the fire.e) In the final contest, the team members tast the rice.f) The grand prize is given to the team with the most points.Answer keys: a) F b) F c) T d) F e) F f) Ta) Only one team member takes part in the water-fetching contests.b) One person has to collect one water bottle.d) Pieces of bamboo are used to make the fire.



Have students copy down.

+ Post reading: Elicit the examples and write them on the board. Deliver posters to students. Ask students to do the exercise on page 130 and write their answers on the posters. Have students put their posters on the board. Give feedback and correct.

e) In the final contest, the judges tast the rice.III/ Language Focus 3:

1/ Structure:a) Model sentences:- a rice-cooking festival- a water-fetching competitionb) Form:

Compound adjectives nouns(article) + (noun) + (verb-ing) + (noun)

c) Use: to form a compound adjective nouns2/ Transformation drill:

*) It is a contest in which participants have to cook rice.=> It's a rice-cooking contest.a) It is a contest in which participants have to make a fire.=> It's a fire-making contest.b) It is a festival in which people have their bulls fight against each other. => It's a bull-fighting festival.c) The United States has a big industry that make cars.=> It's a car-making industry.d) Last week Tran Hung Dao School held a contest in which students arranged flowers as attractively as they could.=> It's a flower-arranging contest.e) Viet Nam is a country which exports a lot of rice.=> It's a rice-exporting country.f) This is a machine which is used to wash clothes.=> It's a clothes-washing machine.

E/ Homework: Ask students to write 5 things that they like and dislike to eat.


Unit 13: FESTIVALSLesson 2: SPEAK Page: 123A/ Aim: Practice in talking about preparations.B/ Objective: By the end of the lesson, students will be able to talk about their preparations for a special event.C/ Teaching aids: Textbooks, chart. D/ Procedure:


Content

+ Warm up: Ask students to think of 5 things they often prepare the Tet and write them

1/ Find things in common:Answer keys: decorate/ clean/ paint/ the house/ the room/ the yards ... buy cakes/ candies/ drinks/ food/ fruits ... cook/ makes cakes ... get/ buy new dress ... write/ send



down on the piece of paper. Choose one student randomly in a side and ask him/ her call out his/ her words while the students in the other side check ( ) the words on their paper same as that student's.

+ Presentation:- Bookshut.- Eliciting.- Recording. . Check: Bingo. Ask students to read the dialogue on page 123 and put the sentences in the correct order. Call on some pairs to give their answers. Give feedback and correct.

+ Practice: Ask students to close their books. Put the chart with the cues on the board. Elicit the exchanges from students. Have some pairs practice each exchange before going on to another exchange. After finish the dialogue, ask a good pair to demonstrate the whole dialogue. Open pairs: Call on some pairs to demonstrate the dialogue. Closed pairs: Have the whole class work in pairs. Monitor and correct.

+ Practice: Ask students to practice the statements and then the response. Ask students to work in pairs.

New Year cards to friends/ relatives...2/ Vocabulary:

- a pomegranate ['pɔmigrænit]: quả lựu- peach-blossom [pi:t∫'blɔsəm](n): hoa đào- marigold ['mærigould](n): cúc vạn thọ- spring roll [spriη 'roul] (n): chả giò- a dried watermelon seed [drai 'wɔ:tə'melən si:d] (n): hạt dưa hấu

3) Ordering:Mrs Quyen Lan

A. Have you tide the bedroom?B. Not, really. But I want our house to look nice at the festival.C. To the market. I have to buy some oranges and some pomegranate.D. Sure, I will.E. That's very good. Bye-bye. Sweetie.

F. Yes, I have. Where are you going, Mom?G. Mom, I know what to do now, I'll clean all the glass windows.H. Could you collect my new "ao dai' at the tailor round the corner?I. Bye, Mom.J. Thanks, Mom. Is there anything you want me to do while you're out?

Answer keys: A - F - C - H - D - J - B - G - E - I

4/ Mapped dialogue:Mrs Quyen Lan

A. you/ tide/ bedroom?

B. market/ have to/ oranges/ pomegranate

C. sure/ will

D. not really/ But/ want house/ look nice// festival

E. That/ very good/ Bye.

1. yes/ where/ going?

2. Could/ collect/ new/ "ao dai" tailor/ corner?

3. Thanks/ anything/ want/ me/ do/ while/ out/

4. Mom/ I/ what/ do now/ will/ clean/ glass windows

5. Bye!Exchange:Mrs Quyen: Have you tide the bedroom?Lan: Yes, I have. Where are you going, Mom?Mrs Quyen: To the market. I have to buy some oranges and some pomegranate.Lan: Could you collect my new "ao dai' at the tailor



+ Further practice: Ask students to choose one of the festivals on page 123 and make up their own dialogues. Monitor and assist students while they are working Call on some pairs to demonstrate their dialogue for the class. Give feedback and correct.

round the corner?Mrs Quyen: Sure, I will.Lan: Thanks, Mom. Is there anything you want me to do while you're out?Mrs Quyen: Not, really. But I want our house to look nice at the festival.Lan: Mom, I know what to do now, I'll clean all the glass windows.Mrs Quyen: That's very good. Bye-bye. Lan: Bye, Mom.

4/ Speak:

E/ Homework: Ask students to write a dialogue into their notebooks.


Unit 13: FESTIVALSLesson 3: LISTEN Page: 124 A/ Aim: Listening for details.B/ Objective: By the end of the lesson, students will be able to talk about their preparations for a special event.C/ Teaching aids: Textbooks, chart, cassette. D/ Procedure:


Content

+ Warm up: Ask students to think of 5 things they often prepare the Tet and write them down on the piece of paper. Choose one student randomly in a side and ask him/ her call out his/ her words while the students in the other side check ( ) the words on their paper same as that student's.

+ Pre listening:. Set the scene: " The Robinson family is making preparations for Tet.They want to buy things to make

1/ Find things in common:Answer keys: decorate/ clean/ paint/ the house/ the room/ the yards ... buy cakes/ candies/ drinks/ food/ fruits ... cook/ makes cakes ... get/ buy new dress ... write/ send New Year cards to friends/ relatives...

2/ Gap fill prediction: "The Robinson family are making preparations for Tet.a) Mrs Robinson wants Mr Robinson to go to the flower market.b) Mrs Robinson wants some marigolds because they are traditional at Tet.c) Mrs Robinson wants Liz to buy a packets of dried water-melon seeds.d) Mrs Robinson is asking Mrs Nga how to make spring rolls."Answer keys: a) Mr Robinson/ flower market b) traditional



it a traditional festival as Vietnamese people do." Ask students to open their books and read the statements on page124. Get students to predict the words in the gaps. Write students' guesses on the board.

+ While listening: Play the tape two or three times. Ask students to listen and fill in the gaps. Call on some students to give their answers and check if students' guesses are right or not. Play the tape again and correct.

+ Post reading: Ask students to copy the grid on page 124 in their notebooks and fill in the gaps with the information taken from the statements above. Call on some students to give their answers.

c) dried water-melon seeds d) makeTape transcipt:Mrs Robinson: John, I want you to go to the flower market for me, please.Mr Robinson: What do I have to buy? Mrs Robinson: Some peach blossoms and a bunch of flowers.Mr Robinson: What sort of flowers?Mrs Robinson: Marigolds, because they are traditional at Tet.Mr Robinson: Anything else?Mrs Robinson: No. but I need Liz to do a few things.Liz: What is that, Mom?Mrs Robinson: Are you busy?Liz: No. Do you need something?Mrs Robinson: Yes. Go to the market and pick up some candies and one packet of fried water-melon seeds, please.Liz: Okay.What are you going to do?Mrs Robinson: I'm going to Mrs Nga's. She's going to show me how to make spring rolls.

3/ Grid:Mr Robinson

go to the flower market to buy peach blossoms and a bunch of marigolds.

Mrs Robinson

go to Mrs Nga's to learn how to make spring rolls.

Liz Go to the market to buy some candies and one packet of fried water-melon seeds.

E/ Homework: Ask students to write the grid into their notebooks.


Unit 13: FESTIVALSLesson 4: READ Page: 124 - 125 - 126A/ Aim: Reading for details about Christmas.B/ Objective: By the end of the lesson, students will be able to get some knoelegde about Christmas.C/ Teaching aids: Textbooks, pictures, posters, cardboards. D/ Procedure:


Content

+ Warm up: Ask students to listen to

1/ Sing a song:2/ Vocabulary:



the tape and sing a song along.


. Check: Jumble words. Stick the pictures on the board ( Christmas tree/ card/ carol/ Santa Claus) Put the statements/ poster on the board, ask students to read them and do the matching.

+ While reading: Call on some students to give their answers and write them on the bboard. Ask students to open their books and read the paragraphs on page 124 and 125. Check if students' answers are right or not. Draw the grid on the board and have students copy it. Ask students to read the paragraph again and complete the grid. Call on some students to fill in the gaps in the grid on the board. Give feedback and correct. Have students to copy.

+ Post reading: Ask students to answer the questions on page 126.

- (to) spread [spred]: lan truyền(explanation/ to cover a larger and larger area.)- Christmas carol ['krisməs 'kærəl] (n): bài thánh ca( example: Silent night is a Christmas carol)- patron saint ['peitrən seint](n): thánh bảo hộ(translation)- jolly ['dʒɔli](adj): vui nhộn = happy and cheerful- (to) decorate ['dekəreit]: trang trí(picture/ definition/ to make something look more attractive by putting things on it)

3/ Jumble words:a) tansa aucls = Santa Claus b) yljol = jollyc) locra = carol d) pdsear = spreade) codraete = decorate f) ontrpa tsian = patron saint

4/ Matching:a. Christmas Carol

1. It has been said he was the patron saint of children, a fat jolly man who wore a red suit and gave children presents on Christmas Eve.

b. Christmas Card

2. The custom of decorating it and putting it in a common place, spread throught Europe to America.

c. Santa Claus

3. They were stories put to music and enjoyed by most people. First the leaders of the Church did not like them but later they became popular.

d. Christmas tree

4. An English man had someone design it to send Christmas greetings to his friends. Now it is a part of the Christmas tradition.

Answer keys: 1 + c 2 + d 3 + a 4 + b

5/ Grid:Christmas Specials Place of origin DateThe Christmas tree Riga (early 1500s)The Christmas Cards

England mid-19th century

Christmas Carol (no information)

800 years ago

Santa Claus USA 18235/ Comprehension questions:

a) How long ago did the Christmas tree come to the USA?=> More than a century ago.b) Why did the Englishman have someone design a card?



Tell students to compare their answers with their partners. Call on some students to give their answers. Give feedback and correct. Get students to write the answers in their notebooks.

=> He wanted to send Christmas greetings to his friends.c) When were Christmas songs first performed?=> 800 years ago.d) Who wrote the poem "A visit from Saint Nicholas"?=> An American professor named Clement Clarke Moore.e) What is Santa Claus based on?=> On the description of Santa Nicholas in professor Moore's poem.

E/ Homework: Get students to write it up: Use the information in the grid to write the brief paragraphs.


Unit 13: FESTIVALSLesson 5: WRITE Page: 126 - 127A/ Aim: To get students to practice in writing a resort.B/ Objective: By the end of the lesson, students will be able to practice in writing a resort on a festival they have joined.C/ Teaching aids: Textbooks, pictures, chart. D/ Procedure:


Content

+ Warm up: Show the photocopied pictures to students and ask them to observe it carefully. Let students look at the picture for about 20, then put it away. Divide the class into 2 teams. Ask students (one student in each team at a time) to go to the board and write their answers. Ask students to listen to the questions. Put the picture on the board again. Give feedback and correct.

+ Pre writing: Write 9 numbers on the

1/ Memory game:a) How many people are there in the picture? What are they doing?=> They are participating in the rice-cooking competition.b) Name all the things in the pictures?=> Rice, basket, pans, bamboo sticks, paper fans, chopsticks, a flag.

2/ Lucky numbers:1. What do you call the festival where people have to cook rice? => (The rice-cooking festival.)2. How many competitions are there in the rice-cooking festival? What are they? => (Three. Water-fetching, fire-making and rice-cooking.)3. Lucky number.4. What do people use to fetch water? => (Bottles.)5. Lucky number.6. Do they use pieces of wood to make fire?



board from 1 to 9. Tell students each number is for a question but 3 of them are lucky numbers. If students choose a lucky number, they do not have to answer any question but they get 2 points and they can get another number. Divide the class into 2 teams.

+ While writing: Ask students to use the information in the dialogue on page 121 to fill in the gaps in the resort on page 127. Have students to write their answer on a piece of paper. Tell students the first 5 or 10 pairs with the right answers will get 1 or 2 good marks. Collect students' papers' and correct.

+ Post writing: Ask students to write a similar resort on a festival they have joined recently. Have students look at the questions on page 127. Let students practice speaking first by answering the questions from a to g. Have students connect the sentences to make it a resort. Monitor and help students with their work. Call on some students to read their resorts aloud.

=> (No, pieces of bamboo.)7. What do people have to do before they cook the rice? => (Separate the rice from the husk.)8. Lucky number.9. How many people are there altogether in a team taking part in the rice-cooking festival? => (Nine. One for water-fetching, two for fire-making and six for rice-cooking.)

3/ Gap fill:The Rice-cooking Festival

by Festival Councilor Pham Phuong Linh This resort shows how the (1) rice-cooking festival was held. The festival was held in the communal house yard about (2) one/a kilometer away from a river. There were competitions (3) water-watching, fire-making and rice-cooking. The festival took one day. In the water-watching contest one person from each team had to (4) run to the river to get the (5) water. In the fire-making contest two team members had to make a fire in the (6) traditional way. They tried to rub pieces on (7) bamboo together to make the fire. (8) Six people from each team took part in the rice-cooking contest. They had to (9) separate the rice from the husk and then cook the rice. After three contests, all the person were (10) added and the Thon Trieu group won the grand prize. The festival was wonderful. Answer keys: (1) rice-cooking (2) one/a (3) water-watching(4) run (5) water (6) traditional (7) bamboo (8) Six (9) separate (10) added

4/ Questions and answer:a) What is the name of the festival?b) Where was the festival held?c) How long did the festival last?d) How many activities were there? Were there any competitions?e) How were the activities organized?f) How many people took part in each activity?g) What did you think about the festival?

E/ Homework: Have students write your resort in your notebooks.




Unit 13: FESTIVALSLesson 6: LANGUAGE FOCUS 1 - 2 - 4 Page: 128 - 130A/ Aim: To get students to practice in reporting what was said and further practice in using the passive forms.B/ Objective: By the end of the lesson, students will be able to use reported speech and the passive in the past, present and further tences.C/ Teaching aids: Textbooks, cardboards, chart. D/ Procedure:


Content

+ Warm up: Ask students to choose 2 numbers, one in the first row, and one in the second row.

+ Presentation: Ask students to match the words in the column A with the forms in the column B. Call students to give their answers. Have student copy.

+ Practice: Ask students to look at LF 1 on page 128. Have students fill in the gaps with the right form of the verbs in the box. Call on some students to go to the board and write their answers (only the verb forms). For each sentence, students should be asked why they decided to use that verb from.

+ Presentation:- Bookshut.

*/ Pelmanism:Put Write Hold Make BrteakHeld Put Broken written Made

I/ Language focus 1:1/ Matching:

1. Present Simple2. Past Simple3. Future Simple4. Present Perfect

a. was/ were + past participleb. have/ has been + past participlec. is/ am/ are + past participled. will be + past participle

Answer keys: 1 + c 2 + a 3 + d 4 + b

2/ Gap fill:a) Christmas songs were performed for people in towns and villages eight hundredyears ago.b) On Christmas Eve in the early 1500s, a tree was decorated and put in the market place in the Latvian city of Riga.c) In the rice-cooking festival, a fire is made in the traditional way. d) An Englih-speaking contest will be held at Nguyen Hue School next month.e) The first prize was awarded to the Me Kong Team just after the final match yesterday.f) The Christmas Carol "Silent Night, Holy Night" was written in Austria by Franz Gruber in the 19th centery.Answer keys: a) were performed b) was decorated / put c) is made d) will be held e) was awarded f) was written



- Eliciting.- Recording. Have students copy.

+ Practice: Ask students to look at LF 2 on page 128 and 129 and fill in the gaps with the right form of the verbs in the box. Call on some students to go to the board and write their answers (only the verb forms). For each sentence, students should be asked why they decided to use that verb form.

+ Presentation:. Set the scene: " Yesterday, Lan's grandmother, Mrs Thu, needed a plumber. A man came to her door and said, "I'm a plumber.' Write the quoted speech on the board: He said, "I'm a plumber." (quoted/ direct speech) Ask students to resort what the man said and write it on the board. Ask students to pay attention to the changes in: Have students copy.

+ Practice: Ask students to look at LF 4 on page 130 and do the exercise. Let students resay the

II/ Language focus 2:1/ Vocabulary:

- (to) jumble ['dʒʌmbl]: làm lộn xộn(translation) - (to) scatter ['skætə]: rải rắc(explanation/ mime/ to throw things everywhere on the ground)- a jar [dʒɑ:]: lọ(drwing/ realia)

2/ Gap fill :Hanh: Mom! Something has happened to our kitchen.Mrs Thanh: What's wrong?Hanh: Mom! Look. The cupboard is open and everything has been (1) junbled.Mrs Thanh: Oh, no. The jar I like has been (2) broken.Hanh: Many bowls and dishes have been (3) broken, too. And look at this, Mom. The dried mushrooms have been (4) scattered all over the floor.Mrs Thanh: And where is the pan of fish I left on the stove?Hanh: Here it is. It has been (5) pulled into the sink. The fish has gone.Mrs Thanh: Who has done all this?Hanh: Mom, it must have been the cat!Answer keys: (1) junbled (2) broken (3) broken(4) scattered (5) pulled

III/ Language focus 4:1/ Structure:

a) Model sentence: Reported speech- He said he was a plumber. (reported/ indirect speech0b) Change:1. Tenses: Quoted speech Reported speech- Present Simple - Past Simple- will - would - must - had to

2. Pronouns: (depending on the subject of the main clause)3. Adverb of place and time:this thatnow thanhere theretoday that daytomorrow the next dayyesterday the day beforeago before



sentences first, then ask them write down. Call on some students to go to the board and write the sentences.

4. Spelling2/ Transformation drill:

a) "I'm a plumber."=> He said was a plumber.b) "I can fix the faucets."=> He said he could fix the faucets.c) "The pipes are broken."=> He said the pipes were broken.d) "New pipes are very expensive."=> He said new pipes were very expensive.e) "You must pay me now.'=> He said Mrs Thu had to pay him then.

E/ Homework: Ask students to write exercise into their notebooks.

Unit 14: WONDERS OF THE WORLDI/ Aim: Helping students:- To seek information.- To recognize and correct mistakes.- To prepare and complete questionaire.- To write a letter to a friend.II/ Language Focus:1. Passive forms.2. Indirect questions with if and whether.3. Question words before to-infinitives.4. Verb + to-infinitives.III/ Vocabulary: (to) claim, (to) compile, (to) snorkel, (to) suround, (to) suggest, (to) honor, edge, god, heritage, jungle, memorial, ranger, twin towers, wonder, clue, pyramid, canyon, crystal-clear (adj), marine (adj), religious (adj), royal (adj), bored (adj), breathtaking (adj), temperate (adj) IV/ Allocation unit:

Lesson 1


Reading to seek information.

Lesson 2

Speak Practice in asking and answering questions about places and how to report them.

Lesson 3

Listen Recognize and correct mistakes Verb forms: TO - infinitive/ Bare infinitive

Lesson 4

Read Reading for details about wonders of the world.Review Passive forms.

Lesson 5

Write Write a letter to a friend.

Lesson 6

Language Focus 1 - 2 - 3 - 4

Reported speech with if and whether.




Unit 14: WONDERS OF THE WORLDLesson 1: GETTING STARTED Page:131 LISTEN AND READ Page: 131 - 132A/ Aim: To get to practice in reading to seek information. B/ Objective: By the end of the lesson, students will be able to seek information about a language game to complete a summary.C/ Teaching aids: Textbooks, pictures,postcards, cassette, chart. D/ Procedure:


Content

+ Warm up: Have students look at the picture on page 131 and do the matching. Check if they know where/ in which country these wonders are.

+ Pre reading:. Set the scene: "Nga, nhi and Hoa are playing a language game called guessing game. How does this game work? Rearrange the statements in the right order of the game." Put the statements chart on the board. Ask students to read the statements and put them in the right order. How to play the guessing game:

+ While reading: Call on some pairs to go to the board and write their answers. Ask students to open their books and read the dialogue on page 131, 132 while listening to the tape. Check if students' guess are right or not. Have students copy the statements in the right order. Have students read the

I/ Getting Started (Matching):Answer keys: a) The Pyramid ['pirəmid] b) Sydney Opera Housec) Stonehenge

II/ Listen and Read:1/ Ordering:

1. B asks questions to find out who or what is.2. A thinks of a famous person or place.3. B wins if he/ she can guess the correct answer.4. A gives B a clue.5. B loses if he/ she cannot guess the correct answer.6. A can only answers "yes' or "no". Answer keys: 2 - 4 - 1 - 6 - 3 - 5

4/ Gap fill: Hoa, Nga and her cousin Nhi were bored, so Nga suggested that they play a (1) game called 20 Questions. She explained the rules and then the girls started to play. Nga thought of a (2) place and she gave the others a (3) clue by saying that it wasn't in (4) Vietnam. Nhi found out the place was in (5) America. Hoa thought it was the (6) Gold Gate Brigde, but that is in San Francisco. Nhi was (7) right when she said it (8) was the Statue of Liberty.

III/ Grammar Awareness:1/ Structure:



dialogue again and complete the summary (2) on page 132. Ask students to complete their answers with their partners. Have some students give their answers. Elicit the target language by asking students a question (in Vietnamese).

+ Post reading: Asking students to read the summary again. Write the words on the board. Ask students to match the words in column A with their explanations in column B. Ask some students to give their answers.

a) Model sentence:- I don't know how to play a game.b) Form:S + V + Question word + TO - infinitive ....

c) Use: Reduced form of an indirect question.Eg: Nga told Nhi how to go to school.

2/ Matching:A B1. suggest

2. golden

3. clue4. bored

a. a piece of information that helps you discover the answer to a question.b. What you often feel when you have nothing to do .c. made of goldd. make a suggestion

Answer keys: 1.d 2.c 3.a 4.b

E/ Homework: Write the complete the dialogue into their notebooks.


Unit 14: WONDERS OF THE WORLDLesson 2: SPEAK Page:131A/ Aim: Practice in asking and answering questions about places and how to report them. B/ Objective: By the end of the lesson, students will be able to make a report on famous places using reported speech.C/ Teaching aids: Textbooks, posters, chart. D/ Procedure:


Content

+ Warm up: Inform the topic and time limit. Write 10/ 15 famous world places within 3 minutes. Deliver posters to students. Tell students to put their posters on the board.

1/ Who is the fastest:2/ Matching:

- Great Wall of China- Empize State Building USA- PETRONAS Twin Towers

1. It was designed and build by the French civil enginner with 300 meters in height.2. It is in South Central Asia, 8848 meters high above sea level.3. It was built from 246 - 209 BC and some people say it can be seen from the



Give feedback and corect.+ Presentation:

Put the chart with the statements on the board. Ask students to read the statements and the names of the famous places in the box on page 133 and do the matching. Check if students understand the statements. Call on some pairs to give their answers.

+ Practice: Ask students to write yes/ no questions about 10 places in the box, using the information in the matching. (Each student in a group asks a question) Monitor and assist students if necessary. Have students ask and answer the questions, check yes or no. Call on a group to demonstrate their work.. Set the scene: Ask a student:T: Is Hue Citadel in the Central Vietnam, Lan?S: Yes, it is.Ask students to listen:T: I asked Lan if Hue citadel was in the Central Vietnam. She said (that) it was. Write the statement on the board. Have students copy.

+ Production: Choose a group's answer to demonstrate the model (asking and reporting). Call on apair in a group to demonstrate the exchanges and the tell one of them to

- Great Barrier Raef- Hue Citadel- Ha Long Bay- Phong Nha Cave- Eiffel Tower- Mount Everest- Big Ben

moon.4. It is a bell striking the hours in the clock tower of the Houses of Parliament in London.5. It is a skycraper in Manhattan, New York City.6. It is a famous place in Quang Binh Province recognized as a World Heritage Site by UNESCO.

Answer keys: 1. Eiffel Tower 2. Mount Everest 3. Great Wall of China 4. Big Ben 5. Empize State Building USA 6. Phong Nha Cave

3/ Questions and answer drill:a) Have they just built the Eiffel Tower in Paris?b) Is the Empize State Building located in New York City?c) Are the Petronas Twin Towers located in Malaysia?d) Is the Great Barrier Reaf in Australia?e) Have you ever seen Mount Rushmore?f) Is Mount Everest in Nepal?

4/ Grammar drill:a) Model sentence:- I said to Lan, "Is Hue Citadel in the Central Vietnam?" (Yes/ No question -> direct speech)- I asked Lan if Hue Citadel was in the Central Vietnam. whether(Main clause) (indirect Yes/ No question)b) Form:S + V + (O) + if + S + V ... whether

c) Use: - to say -> to ask/ want to know.- if the verb in the main clause is in apst tense, the tense in the indirect questions must be changed:Direct question Indirect question Present Simple -> Past Simple -> Present Perfect ->

Past SimplePast PerfectPast Perfect



report. Have students to work in their groups. Call on some students in different groups to report in front of the class. Give feedback and correct.

5/ Reported:

E/ Homework: Have students write 10 indirect questions of your group in your notebooks.


Unit 14: WONDERS OF THE WORLDLesson 3: LISTEN Page:133A/ Aim: To get students to practice in recognizing and correcting mistakes. B/ Objective: By the end of the lesson, students will be able to recognize mistakes through listening to an advertisement.C/ Teaching aids: Textbooks, pictures, chart, cassette. D/ Procedure:


Content

+ Warm up: Put the chart on the board. Ask students to draw the crossesword in their notebooks. Ask students to listen and fill in the crossword.1. Unable to find something/ someone.2. Something that help you find out an answer to a question.3. A very thick forest.4. To make a suggestion.

+ Pre listening:- Bookshut.- Eliciting.- Recording.. Check: What and Where.

+ While listening:. Set the scene: "You are going to listen to an advertisement on the tape.

1/ Crossword puzzle:L O S EC L U E

J U N G L EGEST

2/ Vocabulary:- relaxing (adj) [ri'læksiη]: thư giản(translations/ relaxing vacation)- crystal clear ['kristlkliə(r)] (adj): hoàn toàn trong suốt = completely clear and bright- coral (n) ['kɔrəl]: san hô(realia// translation)- (to) snorkel ['snɔ:kl] : ống thở(translation)

relaxing crystal clear coral snorkel

3/ Listening: Do you want a quiet, relaxing vacation? Look no further than beautiful southern far north Queensland. Stay right on the beach at the Coconut Palm



There are 4 mistakes in the advertisement in your books. What are they?" Have students read the advertisement in their books for a fewminutes. Ask students some questions about the geographical names in the paragraph. Play the tape 2 or 3 times. Get some students ti give their answers. Play the tape the last time, give feedback and correct.

+ Post listening: Ask students to correct the mistakes into their notebooks.

Inn Hotel. Take guided tours through the jungle rainforest, swim in the crystal-clear water of the Coral Sea and snorkel amongst the coral of the Great Barrier Reef Marine Park - a World Heritage Site. Call (077) 6824 6924 3927 for more information.Tape transcript:Mr Robinson: I think this place sounds all right.Mrs Robinson: You mean the one in far north Queensland?Mr Robinson: Yes, it sounds perfect. The Coconut Palm Hotel is right on the beach according to the advertisement. Imagine getting up in the morning and looking at the Pacific Ocean.Mrs Robinson: It must be near a rainforest because the hotel offers guided tours. I hope there won't be a lot of mosquitoes.Mr Robinson: I don't think there will be because it'll be dry when we go.Mrs Robinson: The Great Barrier Reef Marine Park is a World Heritage Site, isn't it?Mr Robinson: That's right.Mrs Robinson: OK. Let's find out how much it costs. What's the phone number?Mr Robinson: 07769243927.Mrs Robinson: 69243927.Answer keys: far north Hotel rainforest 6924

E/ Homework: Ask students to write the passage into their notebooks.

Week 31: Date: Saturday, April 3, 2010Period 87:

Unit 14: WONDERS OF THE WORLDLesson 4: READ Page:134A/ Aim: Read for details about the wonders of the world. B/ Objective: By the end of the lesson, students will be able to get some knowledge about the wonders of the world.C/ Teaching aids: Textbooks, pictures, chart, postcards. D/ Procedure:


Content

+ Warm up: Draw dashes on the board, each dash is for a letter of the world. Have students guess the

1) Hangman:C O R A L



letters, one by one. For every wrong guess, draw a line (from 1 to 8), students will lose the game if they guess wrong 8 times.


. Check: Slap the board. Put the chart on the board. Ask students to decide if the statements are true or false. Write students' guess on the board.

+ While reading: Ask students to read the text on page 134, to check their guesses. Call on some students to correct the false statements. Ask students to choose the best answers to complete the sentences. Put the answers chart on the board. Read the statements aloud and make hand gestures to show the missing words. Ask students to choose A, B, C or D. Correct and have students write thr right answers in their notebooks.

+ Post reading: Draw the grid on the board and have students copy it. Ask students to read the

2) Vocabulary:- (to) compile [kəm'pail]: biên soạn(translation)- (to) claim [kleim]: khẳng định(translation/ explanation/ to say something is true)- (to) honor ['ɔnə]: tôn kính = (to) show respect [ri'spekt]

- a god (male) [gɔd]: vị thần / goddess (female)(translation)- religion (n) [ri'lidʒən]: tôn giáo / religious (adj)(translation)- royal (adj) ['rɔiəl]: thuộc hoàng gia(situation: Phu Xuan (Hue) use to be an old royal capital city of Vietnam)

compile claim honor god religion royal

3) True - False statements:a) An Egyptian man complied a list of what he thought were the seven wonders of the world.b) The only surviving wonder is The Pyramid of Cheops in Egypt.c) Today, we can still see the Hanging Gardens of babylon in present - day Iraq.d) Angkor Wat was originally built to honor a Hindu God.e) The Great Wall of China first wasn't in the list of the seven wonders of the world.f) In the early fifteenth centery, the Khmer King chose Angkor Wat as the new capital.Answer keys: a) F b) T c) F d) T e) T f) Fa) A Greek man complied a list of what he thought were the seven wonders of the world.c) Today, we can still see the only surviving is the Pyramid of Cheops in Egypt.f) In the early fifteenth centery, the Khmer King chose Phnom Penh as the new capital.

4) Multiple choice:a) The only surviving wonder on Antipater's list is the Pyramid of Cheops.b) Angkor Wat was originally built for Hindus.c) Angkor Wat was part of a Royal Khmer city a long time ago.d) In the 1400s, the Khmer King chose Phnom Penh as the new capital.Answer keys: a) C the Pyramid of Cheops b) A Hindusc) D was part of a Royal Khmer city a long time agod) B chose Phnom Penh as the new capital



text again and fill in the grid with the information taken from the text.

5) Grid:Wonders of the world Country

1. The Pyramid of Cheops2. Hanging gardens of Babylon3. The 12-m Statue of Zeus4. Great Wall5. Taj Mahal6. Angkor Wat

1. Egypt2. Iraq3. Greece4.China5. India6. Cambodia

E/ Homework: Have students to give their answers into their notebooks.


Unit 14: WONDERS OF THE WORLDLesson 5: WRITE Page:135A/ Aim: Practice in writing a letter to a friend. B/ Objective: By the end of the lesson, students will be able to write a letter to a friend about a place they have visited.C/ Teaching aids: Textbooks, pictures, drawing. D/ Procedure:


Content

+ Warm up: Ask students to think of one of the wonders of the world and write it on a piece of paper.


. Check: What and Where. Ask students to read the letter Tim sent to Hoa about his tripto the grand Canyon on page 135. Tell students to complete the letter by inserting the letters of the missing sentences (A, B, C and D). Call on some students to read their completed letters

1/ Guessing game:2/ Vocabulary:

- a ranger ['reindʒə]: người quản lý (explanation: person who takes care of a park)- edge (n) [edʒ]: cạnh (bàn), lề, rìa (rừng)(drawing/ the edge of the table)- a canyon ['kænjən]: hẻm núi(translation/ picture)- breathtaking (adj) ['breθteikiη]: hấp dẫn = very exciting - temperate (adj) ['tempərət]: thuộc về ôn (explanation/ translation)- Stone age (n) [stoun eidʒ]: thời kỳ đồ đá(translation)

3/ Insertion: [in'sə:∫n]

May 29, 2003 Dear Hoa, How are you? (1) C I hope you are studying hard for your exams next week. My class has just returned from a trip to the Grand Canyon in Arizona. (2) B The Canyon is part of Grand Canyon National Park and it was formed by the Lolorado River over



in front of the class. Give feedback and correct.

+ While writing:. Set the scene: Imagine you have visited a place recently. Write a letter to a friend of yours and tell him/ her about this place. Draw the outline on the board and elicit some details. Have students talk about something they have done first by asking questions for them to answer. Ask students to write the letter in their notebooks. Monitor and assist students if necessary. Call on some students to read their letters in front of the class. Give feedback.

+ Post reading: Ask students to use the outline on the board and the information in their letters to make an interview. Model: Call on a student to stand up to answer the questions. Ask students to play in turn the role of an interviewer and an interviewee. Monitor and correct. Call on some pairs to demonstrate their interview.

million of years. We spend a week there and I don't want to leave. Although it was summer, it was quiet cool at night because the area is more than 2,000 meters above sea level. On our first day, a park ranger led us on a guided hike along the edge of the canyon. He talked about the history of the area (3) D He also talked about the original inhabitans who lived there during the Stone Age. (4) A That's all I have time to tell you about. What do you plan to do during the summer vacation? Write to me after your exams. Your friend, Tim.Answer keys: 1) C I hope you are studying hard for your exams next week. 2) B The Canyon is part of Grand Canyon National Park and it was formed by the Lolorado River over million of years.3) D He also talked about the original inhabitans who lived there during the Stone Age.4) A That's all I have time to tell you about.

4/Writing:- Place: Cuc Phuong National Park/ Phong Nha Cave/ Ha Long Bay ...- Distance from your city/ home: 100 km/ 300 lm/ 12 hours by train/ by coach ...- How to get there: by bus/ train/ airplane ...- Sights: beautiful/ magnificent/ breathtaking ...- Weather: temperature/ sunny/ cool/ windy ...- how you feel: happy/ excited/ relaxed ...

5/ Interview:a) Where have you just visited?b) How far is it?c) How did you het there?d) What is it like? Is it beautiful?e) How about the weather?f) How did you feel?

E/ Homework: Have students write the completed letter (1) in your notebooks.


Unit 14: WONDERS OF THE WORLD Dương Quang Minh English 8 188


Lesson 6: LANGUAGE FOCUS 1 - 2 - 3 - 4 Page: 135A/ Aim: Further practice in Reported speech and the paasive and using TO-infinitive. B/ Objective: By the end of the lesson, students will be able to can report what people ask and answer about one of the world cultureal Heritage of Vietnam.C/ Teaching aids: Textbooks, charts, posters. D/ Procedure:


Content

+ Warm up: Temparate, breathtaking, royal, religious, canyon, pyramid, edge, god, jungle, compile, ...

+ Presentation: Ask stuents to resay the form of the passive in the Past Simple tense. Have students look at the exercise and choose the right verbs in the box for the gaps in the sentences.

+ Practice: Ask students to complete the sentences with the right passive form of the verbs. Call on some students to give their answers. Give feedback and correct.

+ Production: Write the words and their meaning on the board. Ask students to read the exercises again and do the matching. Call on some students to go to the board to draw the lines to connect the words.

+ Presentation:. Set the scene: Yesterday, Nga and Nhi talked about My Son, one of the world culture Heritage of Vietnam. Beside aswering some of Nhi's questions, Nga gave her some additional information

Bingo:

I/ Language Focus 1:1/ Revision:

S + was/ were + Past participle (V-ed/ cột 2)2/ Gap fill:

a) Sudney Opera House was complete in 1973.b) The first and longest section of the Great Wall of China was constructed between 221 and 204 BC (Before Christ).c) The Eiffel Tower was designed by the French civil engineer Alexander gustave Eiffel for the Paris World's Fair of 1889.d) The Statue of Liberty was presented to the United States by French in 1876.e) The summit of Mount Everest was reached by two members of a British expedition and a Nepalese guide on May 29, 1953.Answer keys: a) was complete b) was constructed c) was designed d) was presented e) was reached

4/Matching:1. construct2. design3. summit4. expendition5. guide

a. thiết kếb. đoàn thám hiểmc. xây dựngd. hướng dẫn viêne. đỉnh núi

Answer keys: 1 + c 2 + a 3 + e 4 + b 5 + dII/ Language Focus 2:

1/ Structure:a) Model sentence:- Do you know My Son, Nga?+ Nhi asked Nga if/ whether she knew My Son.b) Form:S + V + (O) + if + S + V ...



about My Son. Ask students to report what Nhi asked Hoa, using reported speech. Call on some students to resay the use of the indirect Yes/ No question if necessary. Show the question on the board. Model the first question and ask students to listen.

+ Practice: Oral drill. Call on one student to read the question, another student read the reported sentence. Give feedback and correct if necessary. Go on asking students to do the rest questions orally with the same steps.

+ Production: Writing drill. Call on some students to go to the board and write the reported sentences. Correct and ask students to write the right answers in their notebooks.

+ Presentation: Oral drill. Show the word cue chart on the board. Model the first sentence and ask students to listen. Check if students recognize the model sentence. Ask one student to say the next sentence. Give feedback and correct. Have students do the rest of the exercise orally with the steps.

Whetherc) Use: - to say -> to ask/ want to know.- if the verb in the main clause is in apst tense, the tense in the indirect questions must be changed:Direct question Indirect question Present Simple -> Past Simple -> Present Perfect ->

Past SimplePast PerfectPast Perfect

2/ Substitution drill:a) Do you know My Son, Nga?=> Nhi asked Nga if she knew My Son.=> Nhi asked Nga whether she knew My Son.b) Is it far from Ha Noi?=> Nhi asked Nga if it was far from Ha Noi.=> Nhi asked Nga whether it was far from Ha Noi.c) Do many people live at My Son?=> Nhi asked Nga if many people lived at My Son.=> Nhi asked Nga whether many people lived at My Son.d) Do many tourists visit My Son every year?=> Nhi asked Nga if many tourists visited My Son every year.=> Nhi asked Nga whether many tourists visited My Son every year.e) Do you want to visit My Son one day?=> Nhi asked Nga if she wanted to visit My Son one day.=> Nhi asked Nga whether she wanted to visit My Son one day.

III/ Language Focus 3:1/ Revision:

a) Model sentence:- Nga told Nhi how to go there.b) Form:S + V + Question word + TO - infinitive ....

c) Use: Reduced form of an indirect question.2/ Word cue drill:

a) tell/ how/ go there=> Nga told Nhi how to go there.b) show/ where/ get tickets=> Nga showed Nhi where to get tickets.



+ Practice: Writing drill. Ask some students to go the board and write complete sentences. Give feedback, correct and have students copy.

+ Production: Deliver posters to students. Write the question words on the board and ask students to write complete sentences of their own. Tell students to write their sentences on posters and put them on the board after finishing them. Award students good marks if their sentences are right.

+ Presentation: Elicit the target language from students. Get students to copy.

+ Practice: Ask students to open their books and complete the passage on 137 with the right from of the berbs. Call on some students to give their answers. Corect and have a student read the whole paragraph aloud.

+ Production: Ask students to write the passage into their notebooks.

c) point out/ where/ buy souvernirs=> Nga pointed out Nhi where to buy souvernirs.d) advise/ how/ go from My Son to Hoi An=> Nga advised Nhi how to go from My Son to Hoi An.e) tell/ what/ do ther during the visit=> Nga told Nhi what to do ther during the visit.

IV/ Language Focus 4:1/ Structure:

a) Model sentence:1. I want to go out at weekends.2. She enjoys swimming very much.3. He can speak many language.b) Form:1. S + V + TO_infinitive

Use: Most of the verbs in English are followed by a to infinitive.2. S + ENJOY + V-ing

Use: Same use as enjoy: start, begin, advive, ...3. S + CAN + infinitive without TO

Use: Modals: can could, will, would, shall, should, may, might, must, ...

2/ Complete: Nhi and her parents are visiting Hoi An and My Son. They are staying at a hotel near Cua Dai. Early this morning, Nhi decided (0) to go (go) for a run. She left the hotel and started (1) jogging (jog) in the direction of Cua Dai beach. She thought she might (2) go (go) along the beach for 20 minutes before heading for the hotel. Unfortunately, after 10 minutes, dark clouds began (3) gathering (gather) and it started (4) raining (rain). Nhi tried (5) to reach (reach) a shelter, but within a few seconds she was completely wet. So she decided (6) to continue (continue) her run because she couldn't (7) get (get) wetter!

E/ Homework: Have students write the write these exercises in your notebooks.Week 32: Date: Saturday, April 10, 2010Period 90:




A/ Aim: Helping students to review to make plans, accept and decline invitations, to ask and answer questions about the weather, to write a postcard, ask for explanations of events, give an acount of something, write paragraph about what was done, seek information, recognize and complete questionaire, write a letter to a friend.B/ Language Focus:1) Past Progressive.2) Past Progressive with WHEN and WHILE.3) Past Progressive with ALWAYS. 4) Passive forms.5) Compound words.6) Rep[orted speech.7) Inderect questions with IF and WHETHER. 8) Questions words before TO-infinitive9) Verb + TO-infinitive.C/ Teaching aids: Paper test.D/ Procedure:

Full name: ....................................................................Class: 8 ......


Score:

I/ Choose the best words: (2 ms) 1) I (get/ got/ was getting/ have got) into the bath when the bell rang last night. 2) He (was/ is/ have/ will) always (forgetting/ forgotten/ forget) his homework. 3) While I (was going/ went/ go) to the cinema, I (came/ was coming/ have come) across my old friend. 4) This novel (is translate/ was translate/ was translated/ translated) into English by a famous professor. 5) Tet is said (to be/ to have/ to come/ to know) one of the most impoftant festivals for Vietnamese people. 6) Viet Nam is a (country rice-exporting/ rice-exporting country/ country exporting-rice/ exporting-rice country). 7) Nga told Mai (what to do/ what doing/ what she does/ what do) during the visit. 8) Mary asked me if I (can go/ goes/ could go/ will go) with her to the theater.II/ Make complete sentences: (2 ms) 1) Mary/ fall asleep/ while/ magazine. => ..................................................................................... .2) I/ do homework/ while/ younger brother/ play games/ computer. => ....................................... .3) While/ Diana/ watch/ favorite televison program/ there/ power-cut. => ................................... .4) What/ you/ do/ when/ alarm/ sound? => .................................................................................... .III/ Complete the following sentences with the correct verb forms: (2 ms) 1) She told her father (stop) .................................................................. smoking as soon as posible. 2) He asked her if she (like) ........................................................ playing the piano in her free time.



3) This tree (plant) ........................................................................... by my grandfather a week ago. 4) Last night I (do) ..................................................... the washing up when the electriciy went out. IV/ Rewrite the following sentences beginning with the words given: (2 ms) 1) Lan said,"I have to go to the school library now." => Lan said ................................................ .2) The government will build some more schools next year. => - Some ...................................... .V/ Read the following passage then make questions with the cues and answer them: My name is Liz. I come from China. I am a student, a university student. I am 18 years old. I am studying English as a foreign language. English is important to me because I will need it for my job in the future. I began learning English when I was very young - at the age of eight. I think that my biggest problem is listening. People speak very quicky, so, I can't understant them. English is really hard for me to learn, but I like it. I want to be a teacher of English, or I hope to become a singer one day because I love English songs very much.1) Why is English important for her? => ....................................................................................... .2) How old was she when she began learning English? => ........................................................... .3) What aspect (khía cạnh) of learning English does she find most difficult? => ......................... .4) What does Liz want to be? => ................................................................................................... .


CORRECT THE TESTA/ Aim: Helping students to review to make plans, accept and decline invitations, to ask and answer questions about the weather, to write a postcard, ask for explanations of events, give an acount of something, write paragraph about what was done, seek information, recognize and complete questionaire, write a letter to a friend.B/ Objective: By the end of the lesson, students will be able to know more mistakes in test.C/ Teaching aids: Paper test.D/ Procedure:I/ Choose the best words: (2 ms) 1) was getting 2) is/ forgetting 3) was going/ was coming 4) was translated 5) to be 6) rice-exporting country 7) what to do 8) could goII/ Make complete sentences:1) => Mary fell asleep while she was reading a magazine. 2) => I was doing my homework while my younger brother was playing games computer. 3) => While Diana was watching her favorite television program, there was a power-cut . 4) => What were you doing when the alarm sounded?



III/ Complete the following sentences with the correct verb forms: (2 ms) 1) She told her father (stop) to stop smoking as soon as posible. 2) He asked her if she (like) liked playing the piano in her free time. 3) This tree (plant) was planted by my grandfather a week ago. 4) Last night I (do) was doing the washing up when the electricity went out. IV/ Rewrite the following sentences beginning with the words given: (2 ms) 1) => Lan said she had to go the school library then. 2) => Some more schools will be built by the government next year.V/ Read the following passage then make questions with the cues and answer them:1) => Because she will need it for her job in the future. 2) => She was eight. 3) => She finds listening most difficult. 4) => She wants to be a teacher of English.

Unit 15: COMPUTERSI/ Aim: Helping students:- To recognize facts and opinion.- To express opinions.- To agree and disagree.- To complete a flow chart.- To write a set of instructions.II/ Language Focus:1. Present Perfect with YET and ALREADY.2. Comparision of Present Perfect and Past Simple.III/ Vocabulary: (to) adjust, (to) connect, (to) fix, (to) install, (to) post, (to) restrict, (to) turn on, under guarantee, concern, degree, document, freshman, jack, jam, manual, printer, requirement, plug, socket, challenging (adj), skeptical (adj), properly (adj), IV/ Allocation unit:Lesson 1


Reading to recognize facts and opinions and to know how to express opinions.

Lesson 2

Speak Practice in expressing agreement and digreement.

Lesson 3

Listen Practice in writing instructions on how to use the printer and completing a flow chart.

Lesson 4

Read Reading for details about how compute work in a university.

Lesson 5

Write Practice in writing instructions on how to use the printer and completing a flow chart.

Lesson 6


Practice with Present perfect with YET and ALREADY, and complete of Present Perfect and Past Simple.




Unit 15: COMPUTERSLesson 1: GETTING STARTED Page:138

LISTEN AND READ Page: 138 - 139A/ Aim: To get students to differentiate facts from opinions through reading. B/ Objective: By the end of the lesson, students will be able to express their opinions about a problem.C/ Teaching aids: Textbooks, pictures, realia, cassette, chart. D/ Procedure:


Content

+ Warm up: Write the topic on the board. Ask students to think of the topic and express their opinions. Collect students opinions and write them on the board.

+ Pre reading:- Bookshut.- Eliciting.- Recording.. Check: Bingo.. Set the scene: Nam and his father, Mr Nhat are talking about the problem of the compute, they have just bought. What happen to the computer? Put the chart on the board and have students gues which statemnets are true and which are false. Call on some students to give their answers. Write students' guess on the books.

+ While reading: Ask students to open their books, read the dialogue on the page 138 and listen to the tape. Have students work in pairs again to check if their guesses are right or not.

I/ Getting Started:*/ Brainstorm:

Computers help us:Suggestions:- Computers help us learn interestingly. - Computers help us learn more quickly. - Computers are convenient./ easy for keeping/ storing information. - Computers are very quick in giving answers to our questions.


- a printer ['printə]: máy in(picture)- manual (n) ['mænjuəl]: sách hướng dẫn(explanation/ realia/ a book coming with a machine tells you how to use operate the machine)- (to) connect [kə'nekt]: nối , kết nối(hand gesture) - under guarantee ['ʌndə] [,gærən'ti:]: trong thời gian bảo hành(situation/ The machine you buy at a shop ưill be under guarantee from 6 to 12 months)- a plug [plʌg]: phích cắm(realia)- a socket ['sɔkit]: ổ cắm điện(picture/ realia)

2/ True false statements:a) The printer isn't working.b) Nam has already turned the computer on.c) Nam knows how to connect a printer but he hasn't connected it properly.



Give feedback. Have students copy the corrected sentences. Explain the words:"Fact and Opinion:+ Fact: a thing that is known to be true, especially whenn can be proved.+ Opinion: You feel or thought about someone or something, rather than a fact. Get students to read the statements and check ( ) the suitable boxes. Call on some students to give their answers. Have students copy.

+ Post reading: Ask students to used reported speech to rewrite the dialogue. Divede the class into 3 groups and assign each group to report about 3 or 4 sentences. Have them write their report on a poster and put it on the board for public check.

d) The manual helped them to find out the problem.e) Mr Nhat bought the computer in Ho Chi Minh City and it's still under guarantee.f) Mr Nhat thinks the company wouldn't do anything with his computer because it's too far from his place.Answer keys: a) T b) T c) F d) F e) T f) Fc) Nam knows how to connect a printer and he has connected it properly.d) Mr Nhat thinks it isn't ery helpful.f) Mr Nhat thinks the company should do something with it.

3/ Reading comprehension:a) The printer isn't working.b) There shouldn't be anything wrong with it.c) I know how to connect a printer.d) The manual isn't very helpful.e) I bought it in Ho Chi Minh City.f) I don't know what they can do.Answer keys: a) F b) O c) O d) O e) F f) F

4/ Write it up:

E/ Homework: Have students write in their notebooks.


Unit 15: COMPUTERSLesson 2: SPEAK Page:139 - 140 A/ Aim: To get students to practice in expressing agreement and dissagreement. B/ Objective: By the end of the lesson, students will be able to use to some common useful expressions to express agreement and disagreement.C/ Teaching aids: Textbooks, pictures, chart. D/ Procedure: Teacher’s and Students’

activitiesContent

+ Warm up: 1/ Guessing game:



Ask students each to think of one of the ways computers are helpful and write it on the piece of the paper.

+ Presentation: Write the topic on the board: Useful expressions to express agreement and disagreement. Put the table on the board and elicit students' answers then write them in the table. Explain the phrase "on the other hand"to students. Get students to copy the table. Put the photocopies (page 139) on the right of the board and the words cuess on the left (not in order). Ask students to match the words with the pictures. Call on some students to go to the board to draw the matching lines.

+ Pratice: Erase the words but leave the pictures. Get a student to demonstrate the model a). Ask students to use the adjectives on the board to practice speaking with their partners. Call on some pairs to demonstrate for the class. Give feedback and correct.

+ Production: Present the dialogue and have students repeat, sentence by sentence. Call on some students to demonstrate the dialogue. Open pair. Closed pairs: Students make similar dialogue referring the cues on page

"Do you think that ... ?"2/ Brainstorm:

Opinion Agreement Degree of agreemen

t

Disagreement

I like ...I don't like ...I think ...I feel ...I don't believe ...

So I do.I agree.You are right.Neither do I.

I agree, but ...Yes, but on the other hand ...

I disagree.I can't agree with you.No, I think ...

3/ Matching:1. Reading comic books2. Playing in the rain3. Driving a car4. Eating foreign foodAnswer keys: 1.b 2.c 3.a 4.d

4/ Picture drill:Example: - I think computers are useful. => I disagree. I think they are unnecessary../ So do I.a) - I think driving a car is easy. => I disagree. I think it's difficult to drive a car./ So do I.b) - I think reading comic books is boring. => I disagree. I think it's interesting to read comic books./ So do I.c) - I think playing in the rain is fun. => I disagree. I think it's interesting to play in the rain./ So do I.d) - I think eating foreign food is delicious.=> I disagree. I think it's unhealthy to et foreign food./ So do I.

5/ Mapped dialogue:Lan Ba

- I am having problems with ...

- It doesn't work. I think ... .

- Oh! Sorry.

- What's wrong?

- No. You didn't ...

Example exchange:Lan: I am having problems with my computer.Ba: What's wrong?Lan: It doesn't work. I think it's broken.Ba: No. You didn't plug it in.



140 (below the dialogue) to replace the information. Put the mapped dialogue chart on the board.

Lan: Oh! Sorry.

E/ Homework: Have students write a similar dialogue in your notebooks.


Unit 15: COMPUTERSLesson 3: LISTEN Page:141 A/ Aim: Listening for details. B/ Objective: By the end of the lesson, students will be able to complete the flow chart.C/ Teaching aids: Textbooks, pictures, chart, cassette. D/ Procedure:


Content

+ Warm up:

+ Pre listening:- Bookshut.- Eliciting.- Recording. Put the flow chart on the board and have students copy it into their exercise books. Get students to understand how events are sequenced in a flow chart and the meanings of all the shapes used in the chart.

+ While listening: Ask students to look at the flow chart and guess the words in the gaps. Play the tape (2 or 3 times) and ask students to listen. Tell students to fill the gaps with the information they have heard from the tape. Have students compare the answers with their

1/ Shark attack:COMPUTER

2/ Vocabulary:- a circle ['sə:kl] : vòng tròn, hình tròn (starting/ stopping point)- a triangle ['traiæηgl]: hình tam giác (questions)- a oval ['ouvəl]: hình bầu dục (answers)

3/ Gap fill:Find a machine

a) Do you have the correct change

b) Yes. c) What do you want to drink?

Lemon soda. Insert coins and press button

d) Take it.Tape transcript: " Computer programers use flow charts to help people understand how events are sequenced. All the shapes on this chart have a particular meaning. For example, the circles indicate a starting or stopping point, the triangles



answers. Call on some students to go to the board to write their answers. Give feedback and correct. Have students copy.

+ Post listening: Have write a set of instructions on how to get a drinmk from a machine, using the flow chart.

are questions and the ovals are answers.This flow chart show how to get a drink from a machine. It shows that the first step is to find a machine. Next, ask yourself if you have the correct change. When the answer to this question is "yes", ask yourself what you want to drink. For example, lemon soda. Finally, insert the coins and press the button to choose the drink you want. Once the drink appears, you may take it from the machine."

4/ Write it up:

E/ Homework: Let students do the exercises in the exercise book.


Unit 15: COMPUTERSLesson 4: READ Page:141 - 142A/ Aim: Reading comprehention.B/ Objective: By the end of the lesson, students will be able to know more about how computers work in a university.C/ Teaching aids: Textbooks, cardboard, chart. D/ Procedure:


Content

+ Warm up: Inform the topic. Put the cardboards on the board.


. Check: What and Where. Introduce the topic of the text.

1/ Jumbled words:a) terpirn = printerb) seumo = mousec) recsne = screend) nimorot = monitore) bdoaryke = key boardf) moseu dap = rmouse pad

2/ Vocabulary:- a freshman ['fre∫mən] = the first-year student at a college/ university sinh viên năm thứ nhất- a jack [dʒæk]: kích lên(translation)- a bulletin board ['bulitin'bɔ:d] = notice board: bảng thông báo - skeptical (adj) ['skeptikl]: tính hoài nghi(translation)- impact (n) ['impækt]: ảnh hưởng, tác động(translation)

3/ Open prediction:



Ask students to guess what they are going to read.Write the students' guesses on the board. Ask students to read the text to check if their guesses are correct or not.

+ While reading: Get students to read the text again then read the true or false statements and decide if the statements are true or false. Call on some students to give their answers and correct the false statements. Have students copy all the right statements in their notebooks.

+ Post reading: Have students read the questions on page 147 and find the information in the text to answer. Ask students to compare their answers with their partners. Call on some students to give their answers for the class. Give feedback.

a) Where in the library do we get/ find information?b) How can we store the information?c) If we want to discuss something, how can we do?

4/ True False statements:a) There is a new university without a library in the USA recently.b) Users can send and receive messages by using computers.c) First-year student in many universities are required to have access to a computer.d) Students have to go to computers rooms to connect their computers to the computer jacks.e) Computer bulletin boards are the same as the traditional ones.f) Not all people think positively about the new method on study off campus.Answer keys: a) T b) T c) T d) F e) T f) Td) Students don't have to go to computers rooms because collect campus now have computer jacks in every part of the university.

5/ Comprehension questions:a) What makes the new university different from others?=> It has no library. All the information normally found in a library is now stored in the university's computers.b) What type of information is available through the computer?=> All the information normally found in a libraryor messages normally found on a bulletin board. c) What type of equipment is necessary for first-year students?=> A computer and a telephone (line).d) What is the difference between a traditional bulletin board and the one on the internet?=> With a bulletin board on the Internet, a great number of people (over 20 million) can get access to the bulletin and exchange information quickly.e) Would you like to complete a college degree from home?=> (Student's answers)

E/ Homework: Have students write the answers into their books.




Unit 15: COMPUTERSLesson 5: WRITE Page:142 - 143A/ Aim: To get students to practice in writing instructions.B/ Objective: By the end of the lesson, students will be able to write a set of instructions on how to use the printer and complete a flow chart.C/ Teaching aids: Textbooks, pictures, chart. D/ Procedure:


Content

+ Warm up: Put the word square chart on the board. Inform the topic and the number of the hidden words. Ask students to write the words they find out on a piece of paper and hand in offer they finish their work. Give feedback and correct.


Ask students to look at exercices 1 on page 142 and do the matching. Give some students to give their answers and correct.

+ While reading: Get students to make use of some phrasal verbs.

1/ Wordsquare:C N E E R C S KO U T P U T P EM O N I T O R YP A E N O C I BU H B C D E N OT R A Y O P T AE S U O M G E RR I P O W E R D

Answer keys: output, monitor, tray, powerscreen, icon, mousecomputer, printer, keyboard

2/ Vocabulary:- paper input tray ['peipə] ['input] [trei]: khay để giấy vào máy (translation)- power button ['pauə] ['bʌtn]: nút mở điện (translation)- icon ['aikən]: ký hiệu trên màn hình (translation)- output path ['autput] [pɑ:θ] : lối ra giấy in (example)- (to) remove [ri'mu:v] = to put something away: lấy cất đi(translation)

3/ Matching:a) ... paper input tray.b) ... monitor screen. c) ... power button.d) ... icon.e) ... output path.f) ... paper.Answer keys: a) 3 b) 1 c) 6 d) 2 e) 4 f) 5

4/ Gap fill:1. (to) wait for (someone/ something).2. (to) remove # (something).3. (to) turn on/ off (a machine).4. (to) plug in (something).



Put the words on the board and ask students to fill in the gaps with the right words if possible. Ask some students to give their answers and correct.

+ Post writing: Ask students to look at the pictures on page 143 and read the cues. Have students work in pairs to outline the instructions. Call on some students to say out the instructions first. (1 or 2 students for each sentence). Ask students to write the instructions in their notebooks. Have some students read their writing before the class. Give feedback and correct.

5. (to) load # (something).Answer keys: 1. for 2. # 3. on/ off 4. in 5. #

5/ Writing:- Put in the rprinter and turn on the power.Remove/ old paper/ load/ new paper/ input tray.- Remove the old paper and load the new paper in the paper input tray.Wait/ power button/ flash.- Wait for the power button to flash.Have/ pages/ appear/ computer screen.- Have the pages appear on the computer screen.Click/ icon/ the screen/ wait/ a few seconds.- Click the printer icon on the screen and wait for a few seconds.- The prined-paper will get out from the output path in a minute.

E/ Homework: Have students write those sentences into their notebooks.


Unit 15: COMPUTERSLesson 6: LANGUAGE FOCUS 1 - 2 - 3 - 4 Page:142 - 143A/ Aim: Further practice in using the present perfect and past simple.B/ Objective: By the end of the lesson, students will be able to use "yet" and "already" to express the present perfect past simple.C/ Teaching aids: Textbooks, chart. D/ Procedure: Teacher’s and Students’

activitiesContent

+ Warm up: Write 10 numbers on the board. Tell students each number is for a question but 3 of

*/ Lucky numbers:1. What does your father/ mother do?2. What did you do last night?3. Lucky number.4. How often is Hue Festival held?



them are lucky numbers. If students choose a lucky number, they don't have to answer any question but they'll get 2 points and they can choose another number. Divide the class into 2 teams.

+ Presentation:. Set the scene: "Ba's mother has just been back from market. She wanted him to do some housework while she was at the market. Ba made notes in his diary and checked ( ) the work he has done. Look at Ba's diary."Show the chart (Ba's diary) on the board. Ask questions and elicit the answers from students. Have students repeat and write the sentences on the board. Have students copy.

+ Practice: Ask students to look at Ba's diary and complete the dialogue using YET and ALREADY. Call on some pairs to demonstrate the dialogue for the class. Give feedback and correct.

+ Production: Ask students to look at the flight information tables and ask questions to show the models. Ask students taking in turns to ask and answers the questions. Call on some students to demonstrate the exchanges in front of the class.

5. Lucky number.6. What were you doing at 8 o'clock last night?7. Guess what your parents are doing at the moment?8. Who often cooks in your family?9. Which grade will you be in next school year?10. Lucky number.

I/ Language Focus 1:1/ Structure:

- Do homework (V) (already)- Tidy the room (X) (not yet) - Turn off the washing machine (V) (already0- Call and tell Aunt Le to have lunch (V) already)T: Has Ba done his homework yet?S: Yes, he has already done his homework.T: Has Ba tidied the room yet?S: No, he hasn't tidied the room yet.*) Concept check: Present Perfect with "YET" and "ALREADY".**) Use: - Yet: used in questions and negative statemnets. - already: used in positive statements.***) Positions: - Yet: at the end of the sentence. - already: between auxiliary HAVE and PAST PARTICIPLE.

2/ Gap fill:Ba's mother: Have you finished your homework yet?Ba: Yes, I have already finished it , Mom.Ba's mother: Good. What about your room? Is it tidied now?Ba: I'm sorry, Mom. I haven't cleaned and tidied it yet.Ba's mother: Bad boy, Ba. And the washing machine! Have you turned it off yet?Ba: Don't worry, Mom. I have already turned it off .Ba's mother: Have you called and told Aunt Le to have lunch with us today?Ba: Yes. I have already called and told her to have lunch with us, and she said she would come.Answer keys: (1) I have already finished it (2) I haven't cleaned and tidied it yet.(3) I have already turned it off . (4) I have already called and told her to have lunch with us

3/ Questions - Answers (LF2):T: Has the flight to Vientiane departed?S: Yes, it has alrewady departed.T: Has the flight from Los Angeles arrived yet?S: No. it hasn't arrived yet

II/ Language Focus 3:1/ Structure:



Give feedback and correct.

+ Presentation: . Set the scene: Use Vietnamese to elicit the models. Have students copy.

+ Practice: Ask students to look at the table on page 146, read the sentences and check (V) the correct column. Call on some students to give their answers. Give feedback and feedback.

+ Presentation: Put the chart on the board and ask stuents to read the sentences.. Ask students to decide which sentence is in the present perfect anmd which is past simple. Call on students to give their answersa. Give feedback and correct.

+ Practice: Ask students to complete the dialogue on page 146 orally. Call on some pairs to give their answers. Give feedback and correct. Have some pairs to demonstrate the dialogue

a) Model sentence:*) I have ever been to Da Lat. ( finished)(Tôi đã từng đến Đà Lạt)**) My parents have gone to Da Lat for 3 days. (incomplete)(Ba mẹ tôi đi Đà Lạt đã 3 ngày nay rồi)b) Concept check: present perfect tensec) Use: - finish actions indefinite time- incomplete actions for, since, recently, ...d) Form: have/ has + past participle

2/ Grammar drill:finish actio

n

incomplete action

a) I've been to Sa Pa highlands. Vb) They have lived in Ca Mau for 10 years.

V

c) She has finished her homework.

V

d) He has worked with the computer since early morning.

V

e) We have found the troubles of the printer.

V

f) Someone has unplugged the printer.

V

g) People have received information through the internet recently.

V

III/ Language Focus 4:1/ Revision:

a) Her family moved to Ha Noi 2 years ago. (Past simple => finished action with definite time.)b) He has never met such an intelligent boy before. ( Present perfect => an action (not) taking place from the past to the present.c) My brother has become more independent since he left home. ( Present perfect)d) When did the second world war break out? (Past simple)

2/ Grammar drill:Ba: (1) Have you seen the film Jurassic Park yet? (see) Nam: Yes, I have.Ba: When did you see it?Nam: I saw it three months ago.Loan: We (2) have not had a vacation since last year. (not have)



for the class. Pronunciation correction.

+ Production: Ask students to write 4 sentences of their own 2 in the past simple and 2 in the present perfect. Have some of them write their sentences on the board for public check and give them points if possible.

Chi: Why not? Loan: My parents (3) have been very busy since then. (be)Nga: (4) Have you heard the news about Nam? (hear)Mai: No, What (5) happened? (happen)Nga: Ha (6) had an acident. He was jogging. He suddenly (7) fell and (8) broke his leg. ( fall, break)Sung: (9) Have the plane arrived yet? (arrive)Clerk: Yes, it has.Sung: When did it arrive?Clerk: It arrived at the airport two hours ago.

E/ Homework: Have students write those sentences into their notebooks.

Unit 16: INVENTIONSI/ Aim: Helping students:- To say what something was like.- To talk about processes.- To write about processes.II/ Language Focus:1. Passive form.2. Sequence markers.III/ Vocabulary: (to) crush, (to) grind, (to) liquify, (to) manufacture, (to) remove, (to) drain, a conveyor-belt, a facsimile, a hairdryer, a helicopter, loudspeaker, a microwave, mold, process, pulp, reinforced concrete, toaster, procedure, a vat, roller, IV/ Allocation unit:Lesson 1

Getting Stared Listen and Read

Reading for details about the development of paper and the process of producing chocolate.

Lesson 2

SpeakLanguage focus

Practice in talking about the inventions using the passive.

Lesson 3

Listen Listening to fill in the gaps and oreder the sentence.

Lesson 4

Read Reading a poem for information about inventions.

Lesson 5

Write Practice in using sequence markers.

Lesson 6


Further practice in using the passive.




Unit 16: INVENTIONSLesson 1: GETTING STARED Page:147

LISTEN AND READ Page: 147 -149A/ Aim: Reading for details about the development of paper and how to produce chocolate.B/ Objective: By the end of the lesson, students will be able to know the origin of paper and talk about the process of producing something.C/ Teaching aids: Textbooks, cassette, pictures, grid chart. D/ Procedure:


Content

+ Warm up: Get students to look at the pictures on page 147 and ask them some questions to evaluate how much they understand the pictures. Ask students to read the sentences (a - e) and match them with the correct pictures.


. Check: Slap the board.

. Set the scene: Tim Jones, Hoa's American penpal, is visiting a chocolate factory with his class and his teacher, Mrs Allen. Now, guess who will show them around the factory and what they will learn from this visit. Write the students' predictions on the board.

+ While reading: Play the tape and ask students to listen while reading the dialogue on page 148. Ask students to match the

I / Getting Started:Answer keys: A. b) B. c) C. e) D. a) E. d)

II / Listen and Read:1/ Vocabulary:

- (to) remove [ri'mu:v]: bóc ra (translation)- (to) crush [krʌ∫] : nghiền (translation)- (to) liquefy ['likwifai]: hóa lỏng (translation)- (to) grind [graind]: xay(translation)- (to) manufacture [mænju'fækt∫ə]: sản xuất = (to) produce- a process ['prouses]: quy trình - manufacturing process (Use the flowchart to explain the word)- a mold [mould]: cái khuôn (realia/ picture)- conveyor belt [kən'veiə] [belt] : băng chuyền (picture)

2/ Open prediction:3/ Matching:

a) The beans are cleaned

b) Mr Roberts thought

c) After cooking,

d) Sugar is

e) Mrs Allen warned Samf) A sample of chocolate is given

A. after visitors have toured the factory.B. to leave some chocolate for others.C. the cacao beans smell like chocolate.D. Tim and Sam were going to touch the button.E. before being cooked.F. one of the ingredients in chocolate.

Answer keys:a) + E (The beans are cleaned before being cooked.)



half sentences on page 149. have students compare their answer with their pictures. Call on students to give their answers for the class. Give feedback and correct. Get students to write the full sentences in their exercise notebooks.

+ Post reading: Put the grid on the board and have students copy. Ask students to read the dialogue again and fill in the grid. Call on some pairs to go to the board to write their answers. Give feedback and correct.

b) + D (Mr Roberts thought Tim and Sam were going to touch the button.)c) + C (After cooking, the cacao beans smell like chocolate.)d) + F (Sugar is one of the ingredients in chocolate.)e) + B (Mrs Allen warned Sam to leave some chocolate for others.)f) + A (A sample of chocolate is given after visitors have toured the factory.)

4/ Grid:CHOCOLATE MANUFACTURING PROCESS

Answer keys:1. The beans are washed, weighed and cooked.2. The shells are removed.3. The beans are crushed and liquefied.4. Cocoa butter, sugar, vanilla and milk are added.5. The mixture is ground, rolled and pround into the molds.

E/ Homework: Ask students to rewrite the grid using sequence markers into their exercise books.

Week 35: Date: Saturday, May 1, 2010Period 99:

Unit 16: INVENTIONSLesson 2: SPEAK Page:149 - 150

LANGUAGE FOCUS Page: 156A/ Aim: Further practice in using the passive.B/ Objective: By the end of the lesson, students will be able to talk about the inventions using the passive.C/ Teaching aids: Textbooks, grid chart. D/ Procedure: Teacher’s and Students’

activitiesContent

+ Warm up: Get students to brainstorm a list of 10 words and write them on the board. Ask students to choose say 4 words and copy them into their paper.

1/ Bingo:Foreman, liqiefy, process, manufacture, remove, crush, grind, pour, mold, conveyor belt, ...

2/ Vocabulary:- a facsimile [fæk'simili]: máy fax(translation) - reinforced concrete (n) [,ri:in'fɔ:st'kɔnkri:t] : bê tông cốt thép(translation)



Call on the words until someone has ticked all of his/ her words and shouts "bingo".

+ Presentation:- Bookshut.- Eliciting.- Recording. Have studentsstudy the meanings of the inventions using Vietnaese. Ask students to read the dialogue on page 148 again and pick out all of the passive sentences. Call on students to give their answers. Have students review the passive in the present and past simple tenses.

+ Practice: Have students read the model dialogue on page 149. Let students know what they are going to do: Ask and answer questions about the inventions to fill in the missing information. Ask students to look at the tables on page 150 and 156 and model the exchanges, using a good student. Have students work in pairs, one looks at the table on page 150 and other page 156. Ask students to ask and answer the questions orally then fill in the missing information. Monitor and help students if necessary. Call on sopme pairs to demonstrate the exchange. Give feedback and

- a microphone ['maikrəfoun]: micrô(translation) - X-ray (n) ['eks'rei]: tia X(translation) - a louderspeaker ['laud'spi:kə] : loa phóng thanh(translation) - a helicopter ['helikɔptə]: máy bay lên thẳng(translation)

3/ Grammar Awareness:Answer keys:1. This is where the cocoa beans are stored. (present simple)2. That button cannot touched. (passive with model)3. The beans are washed, weighed and cooked here. 4. After the shells are removed ... into molds.

4/ Word cue drill:T: What was invented by Friedrich Koenig?S: Printing Press.T: When was it invented?S: In 1810.T: Where was Koenig from?S: He was from Germany. Answer keys:Invention Date Inventor NationalityPrinting Press 1810 Friedrich

KoenigGerman

Bicycle 1816 Karl D Sauerbronn

German

Facsimile 1843 Alexander Bain

English

Sewing machine

1845 Elias Howe American

Reinforced concrete

1849 F J Monier French

Microphone 1878 D E Hughes AmericanX-ray 1895 Wilhelm

KonaradGerman

Loudspeaker 1924 C W Rice AmericanHelicopter 1939 Igor Sikorsky AmericanColor television 1950 Peter Carl

GodmarkAmerican

Optical fiber 1955 Narinder Kapany

German

Laser 1958 Gordon Gould

American

5/ Making reports:



correct. Have students copy the complete table.

+ Production: Model and have students repeat. Ask students to use the complete table to report what they have found.

a) The printing press was invented by Friedrich Koenig in 1810.b) The bicycle was invented by Karl D Sauerbronn in 1816.c) The facsimile was invented by Alexander Bain in 1843.d) The sewing machine was invented by Elias Howe in 1845.e) The reinforced concrete was invented by F J Monier in 1849.f) The microphone was invented by D E Hughes in 1878.g) The X-ray was invented by Wilhelm Konarad in 1895.h) The loudspeaker was invented by C W Rice in 1924.i) The helicopter was invented by Igor Sikorsky in 1939.j) The color television was invented by Peter Carl Godmark in 1950.k) The optical fiber was invented by Narinder Kapany in 1955.l) The laser was invented by Gordon Gould in 1958.

E/ Homework: Ask students to use the information in the table to write 12 complete sentences in their notebooks.


Unit 16: INVENTIONSLesson 3: LISTEN Page:150 - 151A/ Aim: Listening about papermaking and inventions.B/ Objective: By the end of the lesson, students will be able to fill in the gaps and order sentences from listening .C/ Teaching aids: Textbooks, cassatte, pictures. D/ Procedure:


Content

+ Warm up: Ask students each think of an invention or write it down on a piece of paper. Call on a student to the front of the class or ask the rest of the students ask him/ her yes/ no questions. The chosen student can only answer Yes or No.


1/ Guessing game: - What invention?Are you thinking of ...... ?No./ Yes.

2/ Vocabulary:- procedure [prə'si:dʒə](n): thủ tục (translation) - pulp [pʌlp](n): bột (question: What is used to make paper?)- a vat [væt]: thúng (picture/ drawing)- (to) drain [drein]: làm ráo nước(explanation/ to make something empty or dry by removing all the liquid from it)




+ While listening: Inform the topic: paper-making process. Have students read the sentences. Play the tape 2 or 3 times and ask students to fill in the gaps with the words they catch. Ask students to compare their answers their partners. Call on students to give their answers. Give feedback and correct.

+ Post listening: Ask students to read the sentences (a - g) carefully and guess the order. Write the students' predictions on the board. Play the tape again and ask students to listen. Call on students to give their correction. Give feedback and correct.

- roller ['roulə](n) : trục lăn (picture)- roll (n): trục cán

procedure pulp vat drain roller roll

3/ Gap fill:a) Papermaking is a (1) simple process.b) The procedure is almost the (2) same as it was (3) two hundred years ago.c) The pulp vat is on the (4) left of the machine.d) The papermaking machine has a lot of (5) rollers.Answer keys: (1) simple (2) same (3) two hundred (4) left (5) rollers Tape transcript: "Papermaking is a simple process. The procedure is almost the same as it was 200 years ago. Look closely at this picture of an old papermaking machine. On the left is the pulp vat. Paper pulp was placed in the vat and mixed with a lot of water. The water was then drained and the pulp fibers were poured out of the vat and onto a conveyor belt. The conveyor belt took them under the rollers. There were quite a lot of rollers as you can see. These rollers smoothed the fibers and pressed them dry. The finished paper was then put on a roll at the end. You can see the roll of paper at the far right of the picture."

4/ Ordering prediction:a) The water was drained.b) The paper was put on a roll.c) Paper pupl was placed in the vat.d) Paper pulp was mixed with water.e) The pulp fibers were poured out.f) The pulp was conveyor bvelt under the rollers. Answer keys: c) d) a) e) g) f) b)

E/ Homework: Have students fill the gaps LF-1 on page 150 and write sentences in LF-2 into their notebooks..


Unit 16: INVENTIONSLesson 4: READ Page:151 - 152A/ Aim: Reading for information about papermaking and inventions.B/ Objective: By the end of the lesson, students will be able to fill in the gaps and order sentences.



C/ Teaching aids: Textbooks, cassatte, pictures. D/ Procedure: Teacher’s and Students’

activitiesContent

+ Warm up: Get students to brainstorm a list of 10 new words and write them on the board. Ask students to choose any 4/5 words and copy them into their paper. Call out the words until someone has ticked all of the words and shout "Bingo" and wins.

+ Pre reading:- Bookshut.- Eliciting.- Recording.. Check: Bingo.

+ While reading: Get students to read the poem on page 151. Ask students some questions to help them understand the reading more. Have students match the headingsto the verseson page 152. Call on some students to give their answers. Give feedback and correct.

+ Post reading: Tell students to read the sentences carefully and fill in the gaps with the inventions taken from the poems. Have students compare their answers with their partners. Call on some students to give their answer and correct.

1/ Brainstorm:Household appliances

Answer keys: Microwave, vacuum, hairdryer, dishwasher, telephone, toaster, washing machine, ...

2/ Vocabulary:- a microwave ['maikrəweiv]: lò nướng vi sóng (translation) - a vacuum ['vækjuəm]: máy hút bụi (translation)- a toaster [toustə] : lò nướng bánh mì bằng điện (translation)*) Bingo: Microwave, vacuum, hairdryer, dishwasher, telephone, toaster, washing machine, ...

3/ Matching:+) What the 1th verse about?+) Is the 2nd verse about the appliances used in the kitchen?+) What about "doom [du:m] (sự diệt vong), chugga-chug [t∫ʌg] (tiếng nổ bình bịch), vroom, boom [bu:m]

(tiếng vang)"Answer keys:Verse 1: b. Appliances that cook food.Verse 2: c. Appliances that clean or dry things.Verse 3: a. Instrument invented by Alexander Graham Bell.

4/ Gap fill:a) "Joan, where's the (1) vacuum? I want to clean the floor. b) Last night I was reading in the bedroom when the (2) telephone rang. It was Ann, an old friend I didn't see for more than twelve years.c) A (3) washing machine is a kitchen appliance that automatically washes, rinses, and dries dishes and utensils.d) "Jane, why don't you put the meat in the (4) microwave to defrost it?"e) "Can I borrow your (5) hairdrier? I've just wshed my hair."f) The Romans knew how to toast bread over an open fire two thousand years ago. We now toast bread with a (6) toaster on the table.Answer keys: (1) vacuum (2) telephone (5) hairdrier(3) washing machine (4) microwave (6) toaster

E/ Homework: Have students write the sentences in their notebooks.




Unit 16: INVENTIONSLesson 5: WRITE Page:152 - 153A/ Aim: Further practice in using the sequence markers.B/ Objective: By the end of the lesson, students will be able to use the sequence markers to describe a manufacturing procedure.C/ Teaching aids: Textbooks, cardboards, pictures. D/ Procedure: Teacher’s and Students’

activitiesContent

+ Warm up: Put the cardboards with jumbles words on the board. Inform the topic:words related to papermaking procedure. Ask each group to write their answers on a piece of paper to hand it.


. Check: Rub out and Remember. Ask students to read the text on page 152 and fill in the gaps with the right sequence markers to describe the procedure of paper-making. Ask students some questions to check if they understand the text. Call on some students to read the completed sentences. Give feedback and correct.

+ While writing:

1/ Jumble words:1. lppu = pulp2. llreor = roller3. morever = remove4. darni = drain5. berif = fibre

2/ Vocabulary:- a log [lɔg]: gỗ khúc(drawing/ explanation: a thick piece of wood that is cut from a tree) - (to) flatten ['flætn]: làm cho bằng(to make something become flat)- (to) refind [ri'fain] : lọc, tinh luyện(translation)- (to) chemically ['kemikəli]: bằng hoá chất (translation/ treated in a chemical process)

3/ Gap fill:How Paper to Made

(1) First, logs are cut into smal chips. (2) Then they are mixed with water and acid. (3) Next they are heated and crushed into a heavy pulp. This wood pulp is also cleaned and chemically whitened. (4) After this, it is passed through rollers to be flattened. (5) Then, sheets of wet paper are procedured. (6) Finally, the water is removed from the sheets which are pressed, dried and refined until the finished paper is procedured.Answer keys: (1) First (2) Then (3) Next (4) After this (5) Then (6) Finally



Have students look at the pictures on page 153. Ask students to think of the process of chocolate-making and put the pictures in the correct order. Call on some pairs to give their answers. Ask students to listen to check if their answers are correct or not. Read the statements aloud. Give feedback and correct.

+ Post writing: Ask students to rearrange the sentences on page 153 according to the ordered pictures. Call on students to give their answer. Have students use the sequence markers to link the sentence together in a paragraph. Monitor and assist students if necessary. Call on some students to read their writing for the the class. Have students to copy.

4/ Ordering pictures:Answer keys: 6 - 2 - 4 - 1 - 5 - 3

5/ Write:a) The beans are dried in the sun.b) They are shelled and ground to produce chocolate liquor.c) The beans are roasted to bring out the chocolate flavor.d) The fruit harvest is fermented for three to nine days to kill the beans and turn them brown.e) The beans are cleaned is special machines.f) The liquor is made into chocolate candy or cocoa power.Answer keys: 1) d 2) a 3) e 4) c 5) b 6) f First, the fruit harvest is fermented for three to nine days to kill the beans and turn them brown. Then the beans are dried in the sun. Next the beans are cleaned is special machines. After this, the beans are roasted to bring out the chocolate flavor. Then they are shelled and ground to produce chocolate liquor. Finally, the liquor is made into chocolate candy or cocoa power.

E/ Homework: Ask students to write a paragraph.


Unit 16: INVENTIONSLesson 6: LANGUAGE FOCUS 1 - 2 - 3 - 4 Page:152 - 153A/ Aim: Further practice in using the PASSIVE.B/ Objective: By the end of the lesson, students will be able to change active sentences into passive cues and write WH-questions in the passive.C/ Teaching aids: Textbooks, cardboards. D/ Procedure:

Teacher’s and Students’ Content



activities+ Warm up:

Inform the topic: Infinitive - Past participle. Divide the class into 2 teams.

+ Presentation:- Bookshut.- Eliciting.- Recording.

+ Practice: Have students do exercise 1 on page 154. Call on some students to give their answers oraaly for the class. Get some students to go to the board and write the sentences. Give feedback and correct.

Have students do exercise 2. Ask students to complete their answers. Call on some students to give their answers orally then ask them to go to the board and write the sentences. Have students do exercise 2. Go through the understand words with students before have them write questions.

1/ Pelmanism:Write Draw Sell Win RunRun Sold Won Written Drawn

2/ Vocabulary:- a zipper ['zipə]: dây kéo(realia) - xerography [ziə'rɔfədʒi] :ăn khô(translation)

3/ Language Focus 1:Answer keys:Example: Miss lien wrote the letter.=> The letter was written by Miss Lien.a) Mrs Quyen typed the document.=> The document was typed by Mrs Quyen.b) Mr Nhan repaired the computer.=> The computer was repaired by Mr Nhan.c) Ba drew the picture.=> The picture was drawn by Nam.d) Hoa returned off the lights.=> The lights were returened off by Hoa.e) Lan baked the cake.=> The cake was baked by Lan.

2/ Language Focus 2:a) The grand prize (award) awarded to the Hoa Vinh Village team.b) Viet Nam (win) won two gold medals on the first day of the Games.c) Last year Mrs Jackson (run) ran a small business around the corner.d) The factory (run) was run by Quang Vinh Ltd before it (sell) was sold to a foreign film.e) Thanh Ha School (close) was closed for two days last week due to a flood.Answer keys: a) awarded b) won c) ran d) was run/ was sold e) was closed

3/ Language Focus 3:Example: The facsimile was invented by Alexander Bain in 1843.=> When was the facsimile invented?a) The zipper was invented by W I Judson in 1893.=> What was the zipper invented in 1893?b) Maize was bought into Viet Nam by Phung Khac Khoan in the 16th century.=> What was bought into Viet Nam by Phung Khac Khoan in the 16th century?=> When was Maize bought into Viet Nam by Phung Khac



+ Production: Ask students to use the pictures and the word cues on page 155 to write a description of how while rice is produced in the traditional way, using the sequence markers. Have students complete the sentences orally first. Ask students to write the paragraph in their exercise notebook. Monitor while students are writng and help if necessary. Call on some students to read their writing. Give feedback and correct.

Khoan?c) The fountain pen was invented by Lewis Waterman in 1884.=> Who invented the foundtain pen?=> When was the foundtain pen invented?d) The ballpoint pen was invented in Hungary by brothers Lazlo and Georg Biro in 1935.=> Where was the ballpoint pen invented?e) Xerography is widely used in commerce and industry in copying machine.=> In which machine is xerography widely used?

4/ Language Focus 4:Answer keys: First, the rice crop is harverted. Then the rice plants are threshed (to separate the grains from the straw). Next (after this), the rice grains are husked in the mill to produce brown rice. After this, the bran is removed in the mortar and it is finally winnowed to produce while rice.

E/ Homework: Have students do exercises in their notebooks.


ĐỀ CƯƠNG ÔN TẬP TIẾNG ANH 8 HỌC KỲ II - NĂM HỌC: 2010 - 2011

A. Theory: (Lý thuyết)I. Passive voice (Dạng bị động):Active voice: S + V + OPassive voice: S + BE PP (V-ed/ V-3) + by OExample: People speak English in Viet Nam. => English is spoken (by people) in Viet Nam.II. Reported speech (Câu tường thuật gián tiếp): 1. Câu mệnh lệnh khẳng định: S + ordered/ told/ asked/ ... + someone + TO - infinitive ...Example: My teacher asked me:" Do your homework, please." => My teacher asked me to do my homework.2. Câu mệnh lệnh phủ định: S + ordered/ told/ asked/ ... + someone + NOT TO - infinitive ...



Example: Tom told Mai: " Don't close window, please." => Tom told Mai not to close window.3. Câu hỏi Yes/ No: S + asked/ ... + someone + if/ whether + S + V ......Example: "Are you a student, Minh?" Lan asked. => Lan asked Minh if/ whether he was a student.*) Present Simple ( infinitive/ V-s/ V-es) => Past simple (V-ed/ V-2) Past Simple (V-ed/ V-2) => Past Perfect [ had PP( V-ed/ V-3)] Present Perfect [ have/ has PP( V-ed/ V-3)] => Past Perfect [ had PP( V-ed/ V-3)]4. Câu hỏi có từ hỏi: a. S + asked ... + someone + WH-questions + S + VExample: "How old are you, Nam?" Mai asked. => Mai asked Nam how old he was.*) Present Simple ( infinitive/ V-s/ V-es) => Past simple (V-ed/ V-2) Past Simple (V-ed/ V-2) => Past Perfect [ had PP( V-ed/ V-3)] Present Perfect [ have/ has PP( V-ed/ V-3)] => Past Perfect [ had PP( V-ed/ V-3)]b. S + asked ...... + someone + WH-questions + TO - infinitive ....Example: Mrs Robinson askes Mrs Nga how to make springroll.III. Các dạng của động từ (Form of the verbs):1. V-ing: (thường đi với các động từ sau) like, dislike, hate, start, stop, finish, enjoy, keep, ......(sau các cấu trúc): would you mind, be used to, look forward to, how about, ......(sau các giới từ): about, of, with, without, ......2. TO-infinitive (hai động từ thường)/ (sau các tính từ): glad, happy, ready, kind, ...(sau các cấu trúc): in orrder to, so as to, enough, too3. infinitive without TO (sau các động từ khiếm khuyết): can, could, would, shall, should, may, might, rather, had better, ......IV. Present Participle ( dạng hiện tại phân từ/ V-ing) and Past Participle (dạng quá khứ phân từ):Example: 1. The boy is my brother. He is sitting in the room. => The boy sitting in the room is my brother. 2. These bicycles are very good. They are made in Japan. => These bicycles made in Japan are very good.V. Cấu trúc in order to/ so as to + infinitive ...Example: He went to Ha Noi. He wanted to meet his grandmother. => He went to Ha Noi in order to meet his grandmother. => He went to Ha Noi so as to meet his grandmother. VI. The Present Progressive tense with ALWAYS: S + am/ is/ are always V-ing + ...VII. The Present Perfect tense with ALREADY or YET: S + have/ has + ALREADY + PP (V-ed/ V-3) + ......S + have/ has NOT PP (V-ed/ V-3) + ...... + YET.Have/ Has + S + PP (V-ed/ V-3) + ...... + YET?VIII. Cấu trúc: It + is + adjective + TO - infinitive ......IX. Cấu trúc: Would you mind/ Do you mind + V-ing ...... ? Would you mind if I + V-ed/ V-2 ...... ? Do you mind if I + infinitive ................ ?B. Exercises:



ĐỀ KIỂM TRA HỌC KỲ II NĂM HỌC: 2010 - 2011 (Huyện Sơn Tịnh) (tham khảo)

I/ Circle the best answer A, B, C or D (1 m)1. A. show B. follow C. how D. throw2. A. pour B. touch C. bought D. thought3. A. cooked B. washed C. laughed D. weighed4. A. internet B. monitor C. printer D. iconII/ Underling the best answer: (2 ms)1. Mr Lam asked me (give/ to give/ giving/ gave) ………………………...….. you the dictionary.2. She (have finished/ has finished/ haven’t finished/ hasn’t finished) ……….. her homework yet.3. I’d like (live/ lived/ to live/ living) ………………………..………. a house in the countryside.4. His new car (is make/ is made/ is making/ is to make) ………………………………. in Japan.5. It is easier (learn/ learning/ learned/ to learn) ………….. English than any other language else.6. Would you mind (do/ doing/ to do/ did) ………………...…….. the washing up for me tonigh?7. I prefer walking (to/ than/ with/ for) ……………………………………………... riding a bike.8. She used to (look for/ look after/ look up/ look at) her younger brother when her parents went out.III/ Supply the appropriate prepositions: (1m)1. I disagree ………………………………..……………... you I think English is very interesting.2. Computers are necessary ……………………………………..………… the first-year students.3. The new university is defferent ……………………………………………………. the old one.4. Nam turned ………………………………………………… his computer, but it doesn’t work.IV/ Give the correct forms of the verbs: (2ms)1. Nam ………………… (do) already…………………………………………….. his homework.2. I didn’t know how (get) ……………………………………………………………... to the city.3. It (rain) ……………………………… heavily while my family were having dinner yesterday.4. They (not go) ………………………………………………… anywhere last summer vacation.V/ Rewrite the sentences, not change the meaning: (2 ms)1. This factory produces thousands of cars each year.=> Thousands of cars …………………………………………………………………………… . Dương Quang Minh English 8 217


2. “My sister likes reading old folktales.” said Nam.=> Nam said that ………………………………………………………………………………... .3. Where is the dentist’s office?=> Could you tell me …………………………………………………………………………... .4. The question is so difficult that we can’t answer it.=> The question is too ………………………………………………………………………….. .VI/ Write the meaningful sentences, use the cues: (2ms) 1. Jane/ not write/ me/ since/ leave/ my farm/.=> ……………………………………………………………………………………………….. .2. She/ prefer/ stay/ home/ shopping/. => ……………………………………………………………………………………………….. .

I/ Circle the best answer A, B, C or D (1 m)1. C. how 2. B. touch 3. D. weighed 4. D. iconII/ Underling the best answer: (2 ms)1. to give 2. hasn’t finished 3. to live 4. is made 5. to learn 6. doing 7. to 8. look after III/ Supply the appropriate prepositions: (1m)1. I disagree with you I think English is very interesting.2. Computers are necessary for the first-year students.3. The new university is defferent from the old one.4. Nam turned on his computer, but it doesn’t work.IV/ Give the correct forms of the verbs: (2ms)1. Nam has (do) alreadydone his homework.2. I didn’t know how (get) to get to the city.3. It (rain) was raing heavily while my family were having dinner yesterday.4. They (not go) didn’t go anywhere last summer vacation.V/ Rewrite the sentences, not change the meaning: (2 ms)1. => Thousands of cars are produced by this factory each year .2. => Nam said that his sister liked reading olk folktales.3. => Could you tell me where the dentist’s office is.4. => The question is too difficult for us to answer.VI/ Write the meaningful sentences, use the cues: (2ms) 1. => Jane hasn’t written to me since she left my farm.2. => She prefers staying at home to going shopping.




I/ Choose the best answer of each sentence and underline: (1m)1. Who is (good/ better/ the best/ well) ……………………………………….. player in the team?2. The Angkor Thom used (be/ to be/ being/ been) ………………………… the royal capital city.3. They emigrated (at/ in/ to/ for) ………………………………. Australia in 1960s to find work.4. Would you mind (close/ closing/ to close/ closed) ………………………………. the window?5. We are (delight/ delighted/ delighting/ to delight) ….. that you passed your final examination.6. Thanks (for/ to/ at/ from) …………………………………………….. inviting me to the party.II/ Circle the words that has the underlined part pronounced different from the others: (2ms)1. A. grow B. open C. officer D. moment2. A. quiet B. industry C. relative D. participant3. A. famous B. tourist C. tedious D. anxious4. A. unique B. computer C. university D. discussIII/ Supply the correct form of the verbs in brackets: (1m)1. Last night, when I came to visit him, he (do) …………………………………... an experiment.2. How long (you, be) ………………………………………… a nurse, Mrs Lan? => For 5 years.3. I (not, finish) ……………………………………………………. reading “War and Peace” yet.4. The first papermaking machine (invent) …………………… in the late 1700s by a Frenchman.IV/ Supply the correct words form: (1m)1. There are a lot of (tradition) …………………………………………….. festivals in Viet Nam.2. Sugar is not an (health) ………………………………………. food, because we need it to live.3. D E huges was the (invent) ……………………………………………………. of microphone.4. What is the (nation) ……………………………………………………….. of Thomas Edison?V/ Fill in the blanks with proper words in the box: (1.5 ms)

garbage – pollution – serious – harmful – atmosphere – environment Big cities in the world are facing (1) ……………. problems of (2) ……………. pollution, especially air and water pollution. The great number of motorcycles is on of the main causes of air (3) ……………. . Smoke coming out from vehicles contains a big amount of lead which is very (4) ……………. to health. Besides, factoriesin the cities release so much carbon dioxide into the (5) ……………. every day. These factories pollte not only the air but also the water as well. Poisonous sewage from factories flows directly into rivers Dương Quang Minh English 8 219


withoput any treatment. Moreever, tons of (6) ……………. are thrown into rivers, turning them into huge garbage dumps.VI/ Rewrite the following sentences without changing their meaning: (1.5 ms)1. It is dangerous to walk home late in the evening.=> Walking ……………………………………………………………………………………... .2. Could you send this letter for me?=> Do you mind ………………………………………………………………………………… .3. “I don’t want to go swimming”, says Mr Minh.=> Mr Minh said that …………………………………………………………………………... .VII/ Write the sentences with using the cues words: 1. it/ simple/ solve/ this/ problem/.=> ……………………………………………………………………………………………….. .2. I/ going/ visit/ grandma/ after school/ afternoon/. => ……………………………………………………………………………………………….. .

I/ Choose the best answer of each sentence and underline: (1m)1. the best 2. to be 3. to 4. closing5. delighted 6. for II/ Circle the words that has the underlined part pronounced different from the others: (2ms)1. C. officer 2. A. quiet 3. B. tourist 4. D. discussIII/ Supply the correct form of the verbs in brackets: (1m)1. Last night, when I came to visit him, he (do) was doing an experiment.2. How long (you, be) have you been a nurse, Mrs Lan? => For 5 years.3. I (not, finish) have not finished reading “War and Peace” yet.4. The first papermaking machine (invent) was invented in the late 1700s by a Frenchman.IV/ Supply the correct words form: (1m)1. There are a lot of (tradition) traditional festivals in Viet Nam.2. Sugar is not an (health) unhealthy food, because we need it to live.3. D E huges was the (invent) inventor of microphone.4. What is the (nation) nationality of Thomas Edison?V/ Fill in the blanks with proper words in the box: (1.5 ms)garbage – pollution – serious – harmful – atmosphere – environmental Big cities in the world are facing (1) serious problems of (2) environmental pollution, especially air and water pollution. The great number of motorcycles is on of the main causes of air (3) pollution. Smoke coming out from vehicles contains a big amount of lead which is very (4) harmful to health. Besides, factoriesin the cities release so much carbon dioxide into the (5) atmosphere every day. These factories pollte not only the air but also the water as well. Poisonous sewage from factories flows directly into rivers withoput any Dương Quang Minh English 8 220


treatment. Moreever, tons of (6) garbage are thrown into rivers, turning them into huge garbage dumps.VI/ Rewrite the following sentences without changing their meaning: (1.5 ms)1. => Walking home late in the evening is dangerous.2. => Do you mind sending this letterfor me?3. => Mr Minh said that he didn’t want to go swimming.VII/ Write the sentences with using the cues words: 1. => It is simple to solve this problem.2. => I am going to visit my grandma after school in the afternoon.


I/ Choose the words that doesn't have the same sound as the others: (1m)1. A. machine B. vanilla C. microwave D. mixture2. A. chocolate B. challenging C. fetch D. charecter3. A. canoe B. carol C. jack D. gallery4. A. sunbathe B. crutch C. jungle D. urgeII/ Put the verbs in brackets into the correcttense: (2ms)1. Last night Lan (lose) ................................ her key, but it (just find) .................................. again.2. How did you know each other? => Oh, I (work) .......... in the factory when I (meet) .......... him.3. The bicycle which you (ride) ................... at present (invent) ................. in 1816 by a German.4. He should know how (use) ........ the computer, but if he doesn't you'd better (show) ......... him.III/ Find one mistake in each sentence, underlined and correct it: (2ms)Example: He must to collect on bottle of water. collect1. The poem "A Visit from Saint Nicolas" was writing by an American professor.

1. ...............2. The girl spoke to my brother last night in my cousin.

2. ...............3. Last Sunday our class held a painting picture contest.

3. ...............4. He said me that he was a journalist.

4. ...............IV/ Fill in the blank the correct form of the words given in brackets: (1m)1. A toaster is a kitchen (apply) ................................................................ that is used to cook food.2. Santa Claus is based on the (describe) ............................................. of Saint Nicolas in a poem.V/ Finish the second sentences so that it has the same meaning as the first one: (2ms)



1. He said to me: "Will you go here will your father next week?"=> He asked me ............................................................................................................................. .2. She learns English so that she can communicate with people from other countries.=> She learns English in ................................................................................................................ .3. I sent a letter to my friend in Canada last week.=> A letter ...................................................................................................................................... .4. Some grammartical rules are difficult to explain.=> It is ............................................................................................................................................ .VI/ Read the passage and answer the questions: (1.5ms) Sydney Opera House, a major arts center built on the harhor in Sydney, Australia. It was designed in 1970 by the Danish architect Jurn Ulzon. The building was completed in 1973. Although called an opera house, it is a complex that contains several halls and theaters. There are two concet halls, a theater for opera and ballet, a smaller theater for plays, a recording hall and rehearsal rooms, and cinema. It is the home of the Sydney Symphony Orchestra. The Austrilian Ballet, and Australian Oprea.*) Questions: 1. Where is Sydney Opera House?=> ................................................................................................................................................... .2. When was it designed and completed? => ................................................................................................................................................... .3. How many concert halls are there in Sydney Opera House?=> ................................................................................................................................................... .4. Are there any theaters in Sydney Opera House?=> ................................................................................................................................................... .

I/ Choose the words that doesn't have the same sound as the others: (1m)1. C. microwave 2. D. character 3. A. canoe 4. D. urgeII/ Put the verbs in brackets into the correcttense: (2ms)1. Last night Lan (lose) lost her key, but it (just find) has just been found again.2. How did you know each other? => Oh, I (work) was working in the factory when I (meet) met him.3. The bicycle which you (ride) are riding at present (invent) was invented in 1816 by a German.4. He should know how (use) to use the computer, but if he doesn't you'd better (show) show him.III/ Find one mistake in each sentence, underlined and correct it: (2ms)Example: He must to collect on bottle of water. collect1. The poem "A Visit from Saint Nicolas" was writing by an American professor. 1. written



2. The girl spoke to my brother last night in my cousin. 2. speaking3. Last Sunday our class held a painting picture contest. 3. picture painting 4. He said me that he was a journalist. 4. toldIV/ Fill in the blank the correct form of the words given in brackets: (1m)1. A toaster is a kitchen (apply) appliance that is used to cook food.2. Santa Claus is based on the (describe) description of Saint Nicolas in a poem.V/ Finish the second sentences so that it has the same meaning as the first one: (2ms)1. => He asked me if / whether I would go there with myfather the following week..2. => She learns English in order to communicate with people from other countries.3. => A letter was sent to my friend in Canada last week.4. => It is difficult to explain some grammartical rules.VI/ Read the passage and answer the questions: (1.5ms)1. => Sydney Opera House is in Sydney, Australia.2. => It was designed in 1970 and completed in 1973.3. => There are two concet halls in Sydney Opera House. 4. => Yes, there are.


KIỂM TRA HỌC KỲ II NĂM HỌC: 2010 - 2011 I/ Circle the best answer A, B, C or D (1 m)1. A. show B. follow C. how D. throw2. A. pour B. touch C. bought D. thought3. A. cooked B. washed C. laughed D. weighed4. A. internet B. monitor C. printer D. iconII/ Underling the best answer: (2 ms)1. Mr Lam asked me (give/ to give/ giving/ gave) ………………………...….. you the dictionary.2. She (have finished/ has finished/ haven’t finished/ hasn’t finished) ……….. her homework yet.3. I’d like (live/ lived/ to live/ living) ………………………..………. a house in the countryside.4. His new car (is make/ is made/ is making/ is to make) ………………………………. in Japan.5. It is easier (learn/ learning/ learned/ to learn) ………….. English than any other language else.6. Would you mind (do/ doing/ to do/ did) ………………...…….. the washing up for me tonigh?7. I prefer walking (to/ than/ with/ for) ……………………………………………... riding a bike.



8. She used to (look for/ look after/ look up/ look at) her younger brother when her parents went out.III/ Supply the appropriate prepositions: (1m)1. I disagree ………………………………..……………... you I think English is very interesting.2. Computers are necessary ……………………………………..………… the first-year students.3. The new university is defferent ……………………………………………………. the old one.4. Nam turned ………………………………………………… his computer, but it doesn’t work.IV/ Give the correct forms of the verbs: (2ms)1. Nam ………………… (do) already…………………………………………….. his homework.2. I didn’t know how (get) ……………………………………………………………... to the city.3. It (rain) ……………………………… heavily while my family were having dinner yesterday.4. They (not go) ………………………………………………… anywhere last summer vacation.V/ Rewrite the sentences, not change the meaning: (2 ms)1. This factory produces thousands of cars each year.=> Thousands of cars …………………………………………………………………………… .2. “My sister likes reading old folktales.” said Nam.=> Nam said that ………………………………………………………………………………... .3. Where is the dentist’s office?=> Could you tell me …………………………………………………………………………... .4. The question is so difficult that we can’t answer it.=> The question is too ………………………………………………………………………….. .VI/ Write the meaningful sentences, use the cues: (2ms) 1. Jane/ not write/ me/ since/ leave/ my farm/.=> ……………………………………………………………………………………………….. .2. She/ prefer/ stay/ home/ shopping/. => ……………………………………………………………………………………………….. .

I/ Circle the best answer A, B, C or D (1 m)1. C. how 2. B. touch 3. D. weighed 4. D. iconII/ Underling the best answer: (2 ms)1. to give 2. hasn’t finished 3. to live 4. is made



5. to learn 6. doing 7. to 8. look after III/ Supply the appropriate prepositions: (1m)1. I disagree with you I think English is very interesting.2. Computers are necessary for the first-year students.3. The new university is defferent from the old one.4. Nam turned on his computer, but it doesn’t work.IV/ Give the correct forms of the verbs: (2ms)1. Nam has (do) alreadydone his homework.2. I didn’t know how (get) to get to the city.3. It (rain) was raing heavily while my family were having dinner yesterday.4. They (not go) didn’t go anywhere last summer vacation.V/ Rewrite the sentences, not change the meaning: (2 ms)1. => Thousands of cars are produced by this factory each year .2. => Nam said that his sister liked reading olk folktales.3. => Could you tell me where the dentist’s office is.4. => The question is too difficult for us to answer.VI/ Write the meaningful sentences, use the cues: (2ms) 1. => Jane hasn’t written to me since she left my farm.2. => She prefers staying at home to going shopping.


Documents

Tieng Anh Lop 8 New